Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual

Technical Publication PI-1005R3

Pre-Installation HF Series Generators

HF Series Generators Pre-Installation

REVISION HISTORY REVISION

DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0

JUL 15, 2002

First edition

1

SEP 20, 2003

kW corrections for SHF-5xx model

2

FEB 17, 2004

New equipments

3

SEP 15, 2005

Revision of environmental and electrical requirements

This Document is the English original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.

ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below.

DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.

ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA.

Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.

Note

PI-1005R3

.

Alert readers to pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1

i

Page INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

1.1

Responsibility of Purchaser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

2

PRE-INSTALLATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

3

ROOM REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

3.1

Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

3.2

Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

3.3

Line Powered Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

3.4

Line Powered Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

3.5

Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

3.6

Capacitor Assisted Generators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

3.7

Battery Powered generators -- Power Line Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

3.8

Battery Powered Ggenerators -- Recommended Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

3.9

Interconnection and Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

3.10 Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

PI-1005R3


PI-1005R3

ii


SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION This Pre-Installation document provides the information and data needed to plan and qualify the customer site prior to equipment delivery and installation. This document considers only the Generator and its associated components. Product information, environmental and electrical requirements are specified. For system-related requirements, such as room layout, and system interconnections, refer to documentation provided with other subsystems.

1.1

RESPONSIBILITY OF PURCHASER Site planning and preparation are the responsibilities of the purchaser. The following points should be considered fundamental to the customers Pre-Installation activities; addition work may be needed depending on specific site circumstances:

Note

PI-1005R3

.

•

Install required material prior the delivery of the system components.

•

Complete room floor, ceiling and wall finish.

•

Install conduit, duct, and raceway.

•

Install proper size junction boxes with covers at locations specified in the installation plan.

•

Install mains power of proper voltage output and adequate kVA rating.

•

Install all safety devices according to this document and Local Codes.

•

Provide current room dimensions, including hall way and entry door sizes.

Complete and proper Pre-Installation will avoid delays and confusion.

1


This page intentionally left blank.

2

PI-1005R3


SECTION 2

PRE-INSTALLATION DATA This section provides product information and illustrations showing physical dimensions, weight, mounting holes and normal access areas for cabling and service. (Refer to Illustration 2-1.)

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS COMPONENT

DIMENSIONS

WEIGHT

Length

Width

Height

Vertical Generator Cabinet with LF-RAC (LSS) or DRAC (HSS)

506 mm

468 mm

1101 mm

148 kg

Compact Generator Cabinet (for only 1 Tube (LSS))

445 mm

360 mm

568 mm

72 kg

Compact Generator Cabinet (for 1 or 2 Tubes (LSS or HSS))

592 mm

360 mm

690 mm

95 kg

500 mm

360 mm

790 mm

108 kg

Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet with Batteries Module

813 mm

436 mm

948 mm

235 kg

Compact--ESM Generator Cabinet with Batteries Module (17 A/h batteries)

813 mm

436 mm

1223 mm

372 kg

LINE POWERED GENERATORS

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS Compact Generator Cabinet with Capacitors Module

BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS

PI-1005R3

3


PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS DIMENSIONS

COMPONENT

WEIGHT

Length

Width

Height

w/o Pedestal

433 mm

298 mm

123 mm

8 kg

with Pedestal

433 mm

298 mm

1023 mm

22 kg

w/o Pedestal

554 mm

360 mm

124 mm

12 kg

with Pedestal

554 mm

360 mm

1010 mm

35 kg

with Handswitch support

545 mm

290 mm

50 mm

6 kg

w/o Handswitch support

430 mm

290 mm

50 mm

6 kg

with Handswitch support

468 mm

290 mm

114 mm

8 kg

w/o Handswitch support

360 mm

290 mm

114 mm

8 kg

298 mm

236 mm

930 mm

10 kg

STANDARD CONTROL CONSOLES RAD Control Consoles

R&F Control Consoles

RAD Console Graphic Display

Touch Screen Console (TPC 10” or 12”)

Optional Pedestal for RAD Console Graphic Display or Touch Screen Console

Note.-- Dimensions for no-standard Consoles are not indicated in this document.

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE AND PC UNIT Touch Screen Console

400 mm

200 mm

400 mm

5 kg

PC Unit

480 mm

200 mm

400 mm

15 kg

PC Interface Box

130 mm

140 mm

46 mm

0.6 kg

Note.-- Specifications of Touch Screen Consoles and PC Units subject to change without notice.

4

PI-1005R3


METHOD OF MOUNTING COMPONENT

Note:

NORMAL METHOD OF MOUNTING

Generator Cabinet

Floor freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to floor with four M10 (3/8”) bolts.

Control Consoles

Desk freestanding, wall mounted or anchor to an optional pedestal.

Anchoring hardware should be field supplied. For seismic areas all components must be anchored, Local Standards should be applied.

MINIMUM RECOMMENDED FREE AREA FOR SERVICE ACCESS COMPONENT

SURFACE Left Side

Right Side

Front

Rear

Top

Bottom

Generator Cabinet

50 cm (20”)

50 cm (20”)

100 cm (40”)

-(see note)

Completely free

--

Control Consoles

10 cm (4”)

10 cm (4”)

Completely free

10 cm (4”)

Completely free

--

Note: Ventilation conditions requires to keep a minimum free distance of 15 cm (6”) from both lateral sides of the Generator Cabinet and also the same distance from the rear side when the Generator is provided with High Speed Starter (fans for the starter module).

PI-1005R3

5


Illustration 2-1 Generators

568

Cable Access

COMPACT GENERATOR

(For only 1 Tube)

445 57

57

83

427.5 57

57

67

67.5

80

44

67

Generator 702

Wall Support

206

200

150

8

28

150

33

40

251

435

Floor Support

110

422

224

Wall and Floor Supports are options

40

19

315

6

PI-1005R3


Illustration 2-1 (cont.) Generators

690

Cable Access

COMPACT GENERATOR

(For 1 or 2 Tubes)

592 57

57

57

57

427.5 57

57

57

57

68

67.5

827

Generator

280

250

Wall Support

200

28

8

40

40 44

68

150

33 40

336

580

Floor Support

105

422

234

Wall and Floor Supports are options

40

19

462

PI-1005R3

7


Illustration 2-1 (cont.) Generators

CAPACITORS GENERATOR

Cable Access

790

1101

VERTICAL GENERATOR

Cable Access

Cable Access

948

1223

Cable Access

COMPACT-ESM GENERATOR

8

COMPACT-ESM GENERATOR (with Batteries 17 A/h)

PI-1005R3


Illustration 2-1 (cont.) Consoles

1010

124

R&F CONSOLE

PEDESTAL (optional) RAD CONSOLE

Mounting Holes ø8

1023

123

Cable Access

PEDESTAL (optional)

Mounting Holes ø8

Cable Access

400

45

400

Cable Access

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE FOR PC

PI-1005R3

PC UNIT

PC INTERFACE BOX

9


Illustration 2-1 (cont.) Consoles

TABLE SUPPORT RAD CONSOLES -- GRAPHIC DISPLAY

WALL SUPPORT

TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES (TPC)

PEDESTAL

THESE CONSOLES CAN BE MOUNTED ON A TABLE SUPPORT, WALL SUPPORT OR PEDESTAL

10

PI-1005R3


SECTION 3

3.1

ROOM REQUIREMENTS

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS LINE POWERED GENERATORS / CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS

BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS

Storage / Transport Environmental Conditions

Temperature range of --40oC to 70oC Relative Humidity range of 10% to 100% Atmospheric Pressure range of 500 hPa to 1060 hPa

Temperature range of --20oC to 40oC Relative Humidity range of 10% to 100% Atmospheric Pressure range of 500 hPa to 1060 hPa

Operating Environmental Conditions

Temperature range of 10oC to 40oC (Battery Powered Generators: for a longer life cycle of batteries it is recommended a temperature around 22 oC) Relative Humidity (no condensing) range of 30% to 75% Atmospheric Pressure range of 700 hPa to 1060 hPa

Heat Output

In normal environmental circumstances the maximum heat output of the equipment can reach: -- for Line Powered Generators 0.16 kW (544 btu/hr) -- for Capacitor Assisted Generators 0.20 kW (682 btu/hr) -- for Battery Powered Generators 0.26 kW (890 btu/hr). Components must not be allowed to overheat. Overheating of components can cause system malfunction.

3.2

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS This Generator contains advanced circuitry which will maintain the selected X-ray techniques during adverse line conditions. However, there is a limit to the Generators ability to correct for inadequate line power. To ensure proper operation: •

Do not under size the Distribution Transformer (Line Powered Generators). It is recommended that the secondary of Distribution Transformer has a “Star” configuration.

•

Size feeder and ground wires per this document.

•

Ensure and maintain input mains voltage to specification. Ensure that the ground resistance is lower than 10 Ω.

The power requirements given here (wire sizes, etc.) are the recommended specification. With the exception of high current carrying conductors and grounds, low voltage connections are made with preterminated wires.

The installation should comply with all the electrical requirements indicated in this document. These requirements should be upgraded if Local Standards were more stringent.

PI-1005R3

11


3.3

LINE POWERED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS Operation:

• GENERATOR MODEL

SHF-310

SHF-315

SHF-320

Max. Power kW

32 kW

Maximum mA

400 mA

SHF-325

SHF-330

SHF-335

Maximum kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

Power Line

A

A

B

B

C/D

C/D

GENERATOR MODEL

SHF-410

SHF-415

SHF-420

SHF-425

SHF-430

SHF-435

Max. Power kW

40 kW

Maximum mA

500 mA

Maximum kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

Power Line

A

A

B

B

C/D

C/D

GENERATOR MODEL

SHF-510

SHF-515

SHF-520

SHF-525

SHF-530

SHF-535

Maximum Power kW

50 kW

Maximum mA

640 mA (or 630 mA under special order)

Maximum kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

Power Line

A

A

B

B

C/D

C/D

GENERATOR MODEL

SHF-630

SHF-635

SHF-835

Maximum Power kW

64 kW (or 65 kW under special order)

80 kW

Maximum mA



Maximum kVp

125 kVp

150 kVp

150 kVp

Power Line

C/D

C/D

D (or E for 1000 mA)

POWER LINE A

B

C

D

E

230 / 240 VAC, Single-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz

230 / 240 VAC, Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz

400 / 415 / 440 VAC, Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz

480 VAC, Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz

530 VAC, Three-Phase, 50 / 60 Hz

Line voltage automatic compensation: ±10%. Maximum line regulation for maximum kVA demand: 5%. NOTES: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input. -- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).

12

PI-1005R3


•

RMS line current during a X-ray exposure, minimum line power required, Generator stand-by consumption (W), the differential sensitivity (mA) and the thermomagnetic breaker should be:

SINGLE-PHASE GENERATORS

LINE VOLTAGE

32 kW

40 kW

50 kW

208 VAC *

192 A

240 A

300 A

230 VAC

174 A

217 A

272 A

240 VAC

167 A

208 A

260 A

Minimum kVA required

Maximum kW x 1.25

Stand-by Consumption

500 W

Differential Sensitivity (Earth Leakage / Ground Fault)

30 mA

Differential, Thermomagnetic (Fuses) and Contactor

50% of the RMS line current (RMS = momentary line current based on 100 ms X-ray exposures)

NOTE:

-- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.

LINE VOLTAGE

THREE-PHASES GENERATORS 32 kW

40 kW

50 kW

64 kW (or 65 kW)

80 kW *

208 VAC *

111 A

138 A

173 A

--

--

230 VAC

100 A

125 A

156 A

240 VAC

96 A

120 A

150 A

--

--

400 VAC

58 A

72 A

90 A

115 A

144 A

415 VAC

55 A

69 A

87 A

111 A

139 A

440 VAC

52 A

65 A

82 A

105 A

135 A

480 VAC

48 A

60 A

75 A

96 A

120 A

Minimum kVA required

Maximum kW x 1.25

Stand-by Consumption

500 W

Differential Sensitivity (Earth Leakage / Ground Fault)

30 mA

Differential, Thermomagnetic (Fuses) and Contactor

50% of the RMS line current (RMS = momentary line current based on 100 ms X-ray exposures)

NOTES: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input. -- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).

PI-1005R3

13


•

Maximum Power Line Impedance. The Impedance of the Power Line in the installation must be lower than the maximum value indicated below:

SINGLE-PHASE GENERATORS POWER LINE VOLTAGE 32 kW

40 kW

50 kW

208 VAC *

0.045 Ω

0.035 Ω

0.028 Ω

230 VAC

0.055 Ω

0.045 Ω

0.036 Ω

240 VAC

0.060 Ω

0.045 Ω

0.036 Ω

NOTES: -- The above values comply with the Standard IEC-60601.2.7. -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.

THREE-PHASE GENERATORS POWER LINE VOLTAGE 32 kW

40 kW

50 kW

64 kW (or 65 kW)

80 kW *

208 VAC *

0.070 Ω

0.055 Ω

0.044 Ω

N.A.

N.A.

230 VAC

0.087 Ω

0.070 Ω

0.056 Ω

N.A.

N.A.

240 VAC

0.094 Ω

0.075 Ω

0.060 Ω

N.A.

N.A.

400 VAC

0.270 Ω

0.220 Ω

0.170 Ω

0.135 Ω

0.110 Ω

415 VAC

0.300 Ω

0.240 Ω

0.180 Ω

0.150 Ω

0.120 Ω

440 VAC

0.340 Ω

0.270 Ω

0.200 Ω

0.170 Ω

0.135 Ω

480 VAC

0.400 Ω

0.320 Ω

0.240 Ω

0.200 Ω

0.160 Ω

NOTES: -- The above values comply with the Standard IEC-60601.2.7. -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input. -- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).

14

PI-1005R3


3.4

LINE POWERED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE Correct sizing of the feeder wires is critical to proper Generator operation. Wire size is dependent on the Generator power, the line voltage and the distance from the Distribution Transformer to the Generator Cabinet. The maximum voltage drop during an exposure must not exceed 5% of the nominal mains value. It is recommended that the Distribution Transformer (Hospital) used as power source have at least a power of the 25% more than the maximum power of the X-ray Generator. Recommended wire sizing is indicated in Table 3-1. These lengths are measured from the Distribution Transformer to the Room Electrical Cabinet (room disconnect). From the Room Electrical Cabinet to the Generator Cabinet 16 mm2 (AWG 6) may be used as long as that length does not exceed 6 m (20 ft). The maximum wire size that can be connected to the Generator Cabinet (Input Line Fuse Holder) is 35 mm2 (AWG 2).

Table 3-1 Minimum Wire Size from Distribution Transformer to Room Electrical Cabinet GENERATOR

32 kW,, 3φ φ

50

230 VAC

50

mm2

240 VAC

50 mm2

208 VAC *

40 kW,, 3φ φ

45 m

60 m

95

AWG 1/0

95

mm2

AWG 3/0

120

AWG 4/0

--

--

AWG 1/0

95 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

35 mm2

AWG 2

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

95 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

230 VAC

35 mm2

AWG 2

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

95 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

240 VAC

25 mm2

AWG 4

50 mm2

AWG 1/0

83 mm2

AWG 3/0

105 mm2

AWG 4/0

400 VAC

16

mm2

AWG 6

35

mm2

AWG 1/0

70

mm2

AWG 2/0

16

mm2

35

mm2

70

mm2

AWG 2/0

440 VAC

16

mm2

AWG 6

35

mm2

50

mm2

AWG 1/0

480 VAC

16 mm2

AWG 6

25 mm2

208 VAC *

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

230 VAC

70 mm2

240 VAC

AWG 1/0

AWG 3/0

120

mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

mm2

50

mm2

50

mm2

AWG 2

50

mm2

AWG 4

35 mm2

AWG 2

50 mm2

AWG 1/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

AWG 2/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

105 mm2

AWG 4/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

208 VAC *

35 mm2

AWG 2

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

105 mm2

AWG 4/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

230 VAC

35 mm2

AWG 2

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

105 mm2

AWG 4/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

240 VAC

35

mm2

AWG 2

70

mm2

AWG 2/0

95

mm2

AWG 3/0

120

mm2

AWG 4/0

25

mm2

50

mm2

70

mm2

83

mm2

AWG 3/0

25

mm2

35

mm2

70

mm2

70

mm2

AWG 2/0

440 VAC

16

mm2

AWG 6

35

mm2

AWG 2

50

mm2

AWG 1/0

70

mm2

AWG 2/0

480 VAC

16 mm2

AWG 6

35 mm2

AWG 2

50 mm2

AWG 1/0

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

400 VAC 415 VAC

NOTE:

30 m mm2

415 VAC

40 kW,, 1φ φ

15 m mm2

208 VAC * 32 kW,, 1φ φ

WIRE SIZE AT:

LINE VOLTAGE

AWG 6

AWG 4 AWG 4

AWG 2 AWG 2

AWG 1/0 AWG 2

AWG 1/0 AWG 1/0

AWG 2/0 AWG 2/0

-- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input.

PI-1005R3

15


Table 3-1 (cont.) Minimum Wire Size from Distribution Transformer to Room Electrical Cabinet

GENERATOR

50 kW,, 1φ φ

64 kW, 3φ (or 65 kW, 3φ)

30 m

45 m

60 m

83 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

--

--

230 VAC

83 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

--

--

240 VAC

83 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

--

--

AWG 1/0

95

mm2

AWG 3/0

120

mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

mm2

AWG 3/0

120

mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

50

mm2

230 VAC

50

mm2

AWG 1/0

83

240 VAC

50 mm2

AWG 1/0

83 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

--

--

400 VAC

25 mm2

AWG 4

50 mm2

AWG 1/0

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

95 mm2

AWG 3/0

415 VAC

25 mm2

AWG 4

50 mm2

AWG 1/0

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

95 mm2

AWG 3/0

440 VAC

25 mm2

AWG 4

50 mm2

AWG 1/0

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

83 mm2

AWG 3/0

480 VAC

25 mm2

AWG 4

50 mm2

AWG 1/0

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

83 mm2

AWG 3/0

400 VAC

35 mm2

AWG 2

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

95 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

415 VAC

35 mm2

AWG 2

70 mm2

AWG 2/0

83 mm2

AWG 3/0

120 mm2

AWG 4/0

440 VAC

35

mm2

AWG 2

70

mm2

AWG 2/0

83

mm2

AWG 3/0

105

mm2

AWG 4/0

25

mm2

50

mm2

83

mm2

105

mm2

AWG 4/0

50

mm2

83

mm2

105

mm2

120

mm2

AWG 4/0

35

mm2

70

mm2

105

mm2

120

mm2

AWG 4/0

35

mm2

70

mm2

105

mm2

120

mm2

AWG 4/0

35

mm2

70

mm2

95

mm2

120

mm2

AWG 4/0

480 VAC 400 VAC 415 VAC * 80 kW, kW 3φ

15 m

208 VAC *

208 VAC *

50 kW,, 3φ φ

WIRE SECTION AT:

LINE VOLTAGE

440 VAC 480 VAC

AWG 4 AWG 1/0 AWG 2 AWG 2 AWG 2

AWG 1/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 2/0

AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 3/0

NOTES: -- For lines at 210 VAC or below an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to the Generator input. -- For 80 kW Generators operating with lines at 400 / 415 / 440 VAC an auxiliary boost transformer is required to adequate the line voltage to 480 VAC (or 530 VAC).

16

PI-1005R3


3.5

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS •

Operation: G G G

•

Thermomagnetic Interruptor / Circuit Breaker rating should be: G

3.6

Single-Phase at 100 / 110 / 120 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC. Line voltage automatic compensation: ±10%. 50 Hz / 60 Hz.

8 / 10 / 12.5 / 16 / 20 A (1P+N).

•

Differential Sensitivity: 30 mA

•

Minimum kW required: 2.0 kW

•

Line Impedance should comply with Standard IEC-60601.2.7.

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE The minimum recommended wire size for the line voltage is: LINE VOLTAGE 100 / 110 VAC 208 / 230 / 240 VAC

PI-1005R3

WIRE SIZE 4 mm2 2.5

mm2

AWG 12 AWG 14

17


3.7

BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS -- POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS •

Operation: G G G

•

Thermomagnetic Interruptor / Circuit Breaker rating should be: G

10 A (1P+N curve type D).

•

Differential Sensitivity: 30 mA

•

Minimum kW required: G G

•

3.8

Single-Phase at 110 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC. Line voltage automatic compensation: ±15%. 50 Hz / 60 Hz.

without Stand-Alone option: 2.2 kW with Stand-Alone option: 0.5 kW

Line Impedance should comply with Standard IEC-60601.2.7.

BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS -- RECOMMENDED WIRE SIZE The minimum recommended wire size for the line voltage is: LINE VOLTAGE

18

WIRE SIZE

110 VAC

4 mm2

AWG 12

208 / 230 / 240 VAC

2.5 mm2

AWG 14

PI-1005R3


3.9

INTERCONNECTION AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS Every installation must be provided with a main line disconnect device (thermomagnetic breaker) and the remote disconnect devices required at all Consoles that are not located next to the line safety switch. (For more information about interconnection and grounding refer to “Installation” document).

Illustration 3-1 Interconnection Block Diagram for LINE POWERED GENERATORS DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER (Hospital, etc.)

1

ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET WITH LINE SAFETY SWITCH (Provided by customer)

AUX. BOOST TRANSFORMER WHEN POWER LINES IS 210 VAC OR BELOW OR FOR 80 kW GENERATORS WITH LINES AT 400 / 415 / 440 VAC

(Provided by customer)

3 CONTROL CONSOLE SERIAL CONSOLE or TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE (TPC) TOUCH SCREEN

PC

PC INTERFACE BOX

or Serial Comm.

4 or

Note

.

CABLE RUN

4

LF-RAC (LS) or LV-DRAC (HS)

For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are located inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are factory made. Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet should be connected to the Serial Console, Touch Screen Console or PC Interface Box.

FUNCTION Single or Three Phase Power. (1φ : 230 / 240 VAC) (3φ : 230 / 240 VAC or 400 / 415 / 440 / 480 VAC)

1

GENERATOR CABINET

POWER MODULE HV TRANSFORMER

HV Cables

X-RAY TUBE

2

or Serial Comm.

REMARKS Connect to Room Electrical Cabinet according to the indicated electrical requirements. Customer supplied.

Ground. Single or Three Phase Power. (1φ : 230 / 240 VAC) (3φ : 230 / 240 VAC or 400 / 415 / 440 / 480 VAC)

2

Ground. 3

Control Signals and Ground Stator Supply. Ground.

4

Generator provided with LV-DRAC requires a shielded stator cable. (Refer to “Installation” document). NOTES:

Connect to Generator according to the indicated electrical requirements. Install an Auxiliar Boost Transformer when it is q required. eq i ed C Customer sto e ssupplied. pplied Cable quantity depends on the options installed (AEC, etc.) Provided with X-ray X ray Tube. Tube Field supplied.

-- For wire size refer to Section 3.4. Consult to Local Standards for feeder and ground wire size requirements. -- The system power ground point is located in the Generator Cabinet.

PI-1005R3

19


Illustration 3-2 Interconnection Block Diagram for CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATORS

ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET with LINE SAFETY SWITCH (Customer supplied)

1 (Customer supplied)

CONTROL CONSOLE SERIAL CONSOLE or TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE (TPC) TOUCH SCREEN

PC

1

PC INTERFACE BOX

2 or Serial Comm. or Serial Comm. HV Cables

X-RAY TUBE

Note

.

CABLE RUN

1

2 3 NOTES:

20

3

POWER MODULE

GENERATOR CABINET

HV TRANSFORMER

LF-RAC (LS)


FUNCTION Single-Phase Line. 100 / 110 / 120 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.

REMARKS

Ground.

The Unit is connected by a Line Plug. Power Line from a Room Electrical Cabinet with Safety Switch. Line plugs and cable are Customer supplied.

Control Signals and Ground

Cable quantity depends on the options installed (AEC, etc.)

Stator Supply. Ground.

Provided with X-ray X ray Tube. Tube


PI-1005R3


Illustration 3-3 Interconnection Block Diagram for BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS

ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET with LINE SAFETY SWITCH (Customer supplied)

1 (Customer supplied)

CONTROL CONSOLE SERIAL CONSOLE or TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE (TPC) TOUCH SCREEN

PC

1

PC INTERFACE BOX

2 or Serial Comm. or Serial Comm.

HV TRANSFORMER

HV Cables 3 or X-RAY TUBE

Note

.

CABLE RUN

3

2

REMARKS

Ground.

The Unit is connected by a Line Plug. Power Line from a Room Electrical Cabinet with Safety Switch. Line plugs and cable are Customer supplied.

Control Signals and Ground

Cable quantity depends on the options installed (AEC, etc.)

Ground. Generator provided with LV-DRAC requires a shielded stator cable. (Refer to “Installation” document).

NOTES:

or LV-DRAC (HS)

FUNCTION

Stator Supply. 3

LF-RAC (LS)


Single-Phase Line. 110 / 208 / 230 / 240 VAC.

1

GENERATOR CABINET

POWER MODULE

Provided with X-ray X ray Tube. Tube

Field supplied.


PI-1005R3

21


3.10 SAFETY DEVICES Devices such as Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning Light, and Door Interlock Switch should be supplied and installed by the customer. (Refer to Illustration 3-4.) SAFETY SWITCH / EMERGENCY SWITCH The main Safety Switch should be installed in the Room Electrical Cabinet (Room Disconnect) (close to the Generator Cabinet), and provided with light indicators for “Power On / Off”. It should be used for main disconnection, and located in an accessible place where it can be seen and controlled during operation and service. Other Emergency Switches should be installed in accessible locations in the room (near to the main entrance door or to the Control Console) for use in an emergency. They should be connected to the Room Electrical Cabinet (Room Disconnect) so that they cut power to the Generator when they are activated. The rating of these switches should be: 10 A, 500 VAC, NC. DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH The Door Interlock Switch indicates to the operator when Doorways to the X-ray room are open. It inhibits or not the X-ray generation, according to the Local Standards and customer preferences. This switch should be installed in the entrance door(s) and its connecting cable should be routed to the Generator Cabinet. WARNING LIGHT The Warning Lights are signal lamps installed outside of the X-ray room (near of the main entrance) that indicate: 1.

The system is under voltage (red lamp “ON”).

2.

X-ray exposure in process (yellow lamp “ON”) (for connection refer to Installation document.)

The Warning Lights connection cables should be routed to the Generator Cabinet.

Note

22

.

In any case, the installation must be in compliance with the Local Regulation.

PI-1005R3


Illustration 3-4 Room Electrical Cabinet and Mains Connection

EC Electrical Cabinet DCB

TCB

CR L

L

System Ground Bar

SS ON

OFF

WL1 GEN EM

WL2

EM

DIS

LEGEND

EC:

Electrical Cabinet (Room Disconnect) for powering X-ray equipment. (Customer supplied)

DCB:

Differential Circuit Breaker.

TCB:

Thermomagnetic (or Fuses) Circuit Breaker.

CR:

Contactor controlled by the Safety Switch (SS).

SS:

Safety Switch used for Generator main disconnection, with ON/OFF positions.

L:

ON / OFF Indicator Lamps located on the Electrical Cabinet.

EM:

Emergency Switch near to Control Console and/or to the Room main entrance.

GEN:

Generator Cabinet.

WL1:

X-ray Emission Indicator Lamp (yellow lamp) connected to the Generator Cabinet, located outside of the X-ray Room (above the exam room entrance).

PI-1005R3

WL2:

Warning Light (red lamp) located outside of the X-ray Room (above the exam room entrance).

DIS:

Door Interlock Switch located on the main entrance(s).

23



24

PI-1005R3

Technical Publication IN-1052R0

Installation HF Series Generators

(ONLY FOR GENERATORS WITH U-ARM POSITIONERS)

HF Series Generators Installation


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0

FEB 26, 2008

First edition

This Document is the english original version, edited and supplied by the manufacturer. The Revision state of this Document is indicated in the code number shown at the bottom of this page.

ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below. DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.



Note

IN-1052R0

.



TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1

2


1

1.1

Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

1.2

Pre-Installation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

1.3

General Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

UNPACKING, POWER LINE CONNECTION AND CABINET INSTALLATION . . .

5

2.1

3

Control Console Installation (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

3.1

Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

3.1.1

General Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

High Voltage Cables Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

3.2.1

X-ray Tubes with Metallic Insert Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

3.2.2

High Voltage Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

X-ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

3.3.1

Stator Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

3.3.2

Tube Selection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

Interconnection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22

3.4.1

Serial Interconnection RS232 / RS422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

3.4.2

Collimator Error Signal (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30

3.4.3

Door Interlock Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30

3.4.4

Warning Light Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

3.4.5

Collimator Lamp and System Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31

3.4.6

Buckys (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

3.4.7

Tomo Device (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

3.4.8

Ion Chambers (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

3.2

3.3

3.4

IN-1052R0

i


Section 4

5

ii

Page FINAL INSTALLATION AND CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

4.1

HV Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

4.2

Cable Fastening and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39

5.1

System Interconnection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39

5.2

System Interconnection Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41

IN-1052R0


SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION The Installation process depends on the Generator and System configuration. Installation must be performed in the order indicated along this document. Perform only the sections required to install this Generator.

1.1

TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT The following hand tools and products are required for the Installation: •

Standard service engineers tool kit.

•

Electric drill motor and assorted bits.

•

Silicone Insulating Grease (proofing compound).

•

Alcohol cleaning agent.

The following test equipment is required for Configuration and Calibration: •

Digital Multimeter.

•

Non-invasive kVp Meter.

•

Digital mAs Meter.

•

Calculator.

•

Only for AEC purposes:

•

G

Sensitometer (only for Film).

G

Densitometer (only for Film).

G

Copper Plates for the Collimator Filter Holder (recommended): 2 units of 1 mm thickness, 1 unit of 0.5 mm thickness, 2 units of 0.2 mm thickness, 1 unit of 0.1 mm thickness.

G

Acrylic Plastic Plates can be used Instead of Copper Plates: 6 units of 5 cm. thickness, 5 units of 1cm. thickness.

G

Dosimeter (optionally).

Only for Tomo purposes: G

IN-1052R0

Tomophantom tool.

1


1.2

PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK Prior to beginning installation, it is recommended to inspect the site and verify that the X-ray room complies with Pre-installation requirements, such as: •

Incoming Line.

•

Main Switch and Safety Devices.

•

Conduits.

•

Space Requirements.

(Refer to the “Pre-Installation” document.)

2

IN-1052R0


1.3

GENERAL CAUTIONS

MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF, APPROXIMATELY 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.

ALWAYS HAVE THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” CONNECTED IN THE GENERATOR PREVIOUS TO MAINS POWER IS ACTIVATED IN IT. IF THE “IPM DRIVER BOARD” IS NOT CONNECTED, PERMANENT DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO IGBTS.

TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT TOUCH ANY HEATSINK OF THE CIRCUIT BOARDS EVEN THE GENERATOR IS TURNED OFF. PREVIOUS TO DISASSEMBLE ANY BOARD, REMOVE ALL CONNECTORS PLUGGED TO IT.

LINE POWERED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE, AND POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE GENERATOR IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 (GENERATOR CABINET) IS ON. INTERNAL PARTS OF THE GENERATOR (ALL FUSES, LINE CONTACTOR (6K5), INPUT TRANSFORMER (6T2), ON/OFF RELAY (3K3) AND LF-RAC MODULE) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON THROUGH POWER LINE ALTHOUGH THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. BE SURE THAT THE SAFETY SWITCH IS OFF BEFORE HANDLING ANY INTERNAL PART OF THE EQUIPMENT.

IN-1052R0

3



4

IN-1052R0


SECTION 2

UNPACKING, POWER LINE CONNECTION AND CABINET INSTALLATION The Generator is shipped in one box to facilitate transport and installation. Upon receipt of the X-ray unit and associated equipment, inspect all shipping containers for signs of damage. If damage is found, immediately notify the carrier or their respective agent.

It is recommended to install the U-Arm Positioner before than the Generator. (Refer to the Positioner Service Manual).

1.

Open the shipping box. Take out the Control Console (if provided), Interconnection Cables, Cabinet Cover and other furnished parts. Do not discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes or bags until all parts are accounted for as listed on the packing list.

2.

Remove the packing material from the pallet.

3.

Remove the Generator Cabinet from the shipping pallet, placing it near its chosen room position. This operation requires at least two people.

4.

When the equipment is unpacked, verify that all items on the customer order are present, and the hardware and internal wiring is secure.

5.

Check the part numbers / serial numbers of each component with its identification labels, and inspect all pieces for visible damage. If any damaged parts are found, repair or order replacements to prevent unnecessary delay in installation.

Illustration 2-1 Compact Generators

IN-1052R0

5


6.

Previous to install the Generator Cabinet on the upper side of the Positioner Control Box, it is recommended to perform the Power Line connection. KEEP IN MIND THE GENERAL CAUTIONS FOR LINE POWERED GENERATORS INDICATED IN SECTION 1.3. DO NOT POWER ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED IN THIS SERVICE MANUAL.

7.

Note

The power supply line should conform with the Generator model defined in the “Pre-Installation” document. Wire sizes indicated in this document are relative to the power supply line and wire length. Verify that the power line voltage and phase of the Generator coincides with the one for Room Electrical Cabinet. As indicated in the Pre-Installation document, 16 mm 2 (AWG 6) may be used from the Room Electrical Cabinet to the Generator Cabinet provided that the length does not exceed 6 m (20 ft).

. 8.

Route the Power Line Cables and the Ground wires to the Input Line Fuses and Ground Studs in the Cabinet Frame (Ground Studs are above the input fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer). These cables can be secured to the Fastening Bar of the Cabinet and routed internally along the rear side of the Cabinet (always apply Local Codes for cable routing). (Refer to Illustration 2-2.)

Illustration 2-2 Cable Routing in the Line Powered Generator

Fastening Bar

Input Transformer 6T2

Power Line Cables

Ground Terminals

Input Line Fuses

6

IN-1052R0


9.

For Single Phase Generators, connect the Power wires L1 and N (L2) to the Fuse Holders of F3 and F4 (right side of the Cabinet), and the Ground wire to the Ground stud in the Cabinet Frame (above these fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer).

SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS ARE FACTORY DELIVERED TO OPERATE ON PHASE AND NEUTRAL. IN CASE OF CONNECTING THE EQUIPMENT TO A TWO-PHASE LINE, REPLACE THE NEUTRAL CARTRIDGE WITH THE FUSE SUPPLIED WITH THE GENERATOR.

10.

For Three Phase Generators, connect the Power wires L1, L2 and L3 to the Fuse Holders of F3, F4 and F5 (right side of the Cabinet), and the Ground wire to the Ground Studs in the Cabinet Frame (located above these fuses or close to the right side of the HV Transformer). Three Phase Generators do not need Neutral (N) wire connection from the Line. If the unit is provided with the optional Fuse Module, connect the Neutral (N) wire from the Line to the Neutral Stud below F3 Fuse Holder.

Illustration 2-3 Power Line connections

Input Transf. 6T2 GND Studs

GND Stud L1 Input Line L2 Input Line L3 Input Line Neutral Stud (optional)

IN-1052R0

7


For 80 kW Generators, the power supply line must be 480 VAC (or 530 VAC). If the Generator is supplied with an external step-up autotransformer, it will include the cables to connect the autotransformer to the Generator Cabinet. Power line should be connected to the autotransformer terminals according to the line. 480 V (or 530 V) 415 V 400 V 380 V

SEP-UP TRANSFORMER Input: 380 VAC / 400 VAC / 415 VAC, Three-Phase.

380 V 400 V 415 V

Output: 480 VAC / 530 VAC, Three-Phase. Max Power Output: 80 kW, 10% duty cicle (approx. 5 seconds / minute)

380 V 400 V 415 V

Rising Temperature: 40oC

11.

480 V (or 530 V)

480 V (or 530 V)

The whole System (Tables, Spot Film Devices, etc.) can be switched ON/OFF when the Generator is switched ON/OFF. For this, power the System through the output terminals of the Line Contactor 6K5 (upper contactor close to the Input Transformer). These terminals are located underneath the Line Contactor 6K5.

Illustration 2-4 Line Contactor 6K5

Line Contactor 6K5 Input Transformer 6T2

Output Terminals

8

IN-1052R0


12.

Three-Phase Generators can be provided with an optional Fuse Module mounted on Module-12, for switching ON/OFF the whole system when the Generator is turned ON/OFF. For this, connect the Neutral (N) wire from the Line to the Neutral Stud below F3 Fuse Holder. Power the System through the Output Terminals 12TS4 (U, V, W, N, GND) close to Fuses F14, F15, F16.

Illustration 2-5 Power Line connections in the optional Fuse Module GND Studs

Input Transf. 6T2

GND Stud L1 Input Line L2 Input Line

Terminals 12TS4

L3 Input Line Neutral Stud

13.

Note

.

According to the nominal voltage of the line, verify or connect the wire “:” to the indicated terminal (TB) of Transformer 6T2. This wire is factory connected to 230 VAC (for 1-Phase), 400 VAC (for 3-Phase) or 480 VAC / 530 VAC (for 80 kW 3-Phase Generators). (Refer to Schematic 543020XX). For 220 VAC power line, connect the wire “:” to the 230 VAC terminals. For 380 VAC power line, connect the wire “:” to the 400 VAC terminals. 6T2 Terminal Strip

6T2

IN-1052R0

9


14.

After connecting the Power Line Cables, secure them to the Fastening Bar using cable ties if they are routed over the Fastening Bar, or using a suitable clamp if they are routed through the Round Cable Outlet on the Rear Cover of the Cabinet (always apply Local Codes).

15.

The Generator Cabinet is installed on the upper side of the Positioner Control Box as follows.

BACK COVER

690 (27.16”)

Upper Cable Entrance (HV Cables, Stator Cable)

462 (18.18”)

65 2.55”

65 2.55”

R9.5

CONTROL BOX

50 28 21

600 (23.62”)

213 8.38”

21 37 52

COMPACT GENERATOR

Lateral Cable Entrance

Anchoring Holes

These steps are also described in the Positioner Service Manual. a.

Place the Control Box on its final position of the room, keep in mind: G

the length of the Column Harness (approx. 1.5 m) that goes from the Column of the Positioner to the Control Box,

G

the length of the High Voltage Cables (X-Ray Tube -- HV Transformer in the Generator Cabinet),

G

the Swivel Arm movements.

(Refer to Room Layout illustrations in the Positioner Service Manual)

10

IN-1052R0


b.

Level the Control Box using the Adjustable Leveling Legs. Keep the Base at the maximum distance from the floor. Seismic areas and other conditions require to secure firmly the Control Box to the floor through the mounting holes at its base. In this case, place the four spacers (provided) under the base and secure them to the floor. Keep the four Leveling Legs at the same height than the spacers.

Cable Access

Spacer for using in Seismic Areas Adjustable Leveling Legs

c.

Assemble the supplied Back Cover for the Generator Cabinet to the upper side of the Control Box using two M6x20 screws (supplied).

Back Cover Fixing Screws

Control Box

d.

IN-1052R0

Remove the four Adjustable Leveling Legs from the base of the Generator Cabinet.

11


e.

Hang the Generator Cabinet on the Back Cover and secure it to the Control Box using four M6x20 screws (supplied). At least two people are required for this operation. Fix the two screws that join the rear side of the Cabinet to the Back Cover. Generator Cabinet Back Cover

Hook Fixing Screws

Control Box

f. P2--Shield

P1

P3

J1 Ground Wire / GND Stud

In some cases, due to transport safety requirements, the HV Transformer is shipped out of the Generator Cabinet. Install the HV Transformer inside the Cabinet (upper area) and secure it with the respective anchors or plates, then connect the following cables from the Power Module to the corresponding terminals on the HV Transformer: G

P2-Shield (2 thin wires), P1 and P3. Connect these cables to the stud-brass terminals using two wrenches to tighten the nuts (one to hold the base nut in place and the other to tighten the nut over the cable) and avoiding twisting the studs. Ensure that the connection is secure and properly tightened.

G

Ground wire to Ground stud.

G

Connector J1.

THE HV TRANSFORMER HAS TO BE SECURED WITH ITS ANCHORS OR PLATES INSIDE THE CABINET. OTHERWISE P1, P2 AND P3 STUDS MAY BE IN CONTACT WITH THE CABINET FRAME AND PRODUCE A SHORT-CIRCUIT.

12

IN-1052R0


g.

Leave a working area around the Generator Cabinet until its final installation.

Cable Access to the Generator Cabinet (HV Cables, Stator / Thermostat, AEC, ...)

Emergency Switch-Off Button ON / OFF Button

IN-1052R0

16.

Verify that the power supply line is “OFF” in the Room Electrical Cabinet. Verify that the power line to the Generator is cut when the Emergency Switch(es) is(are) activated.

17.

Cut the cables to the appropriate length and remove insulation from both ends of the power and ground wires. Connect them to the respective terminals in the Room Electrical Cabinet.

18.

Install the Control Console as indicated in Section 2.1.

13


2.1

CONTROL CONSOLE INSTALLATION (OPTIONAL) 1.

Control Console can be freestanding, wall supported or mounted on an optional Pedestal. Console is provided with several mounting holes on the bottom for anchoring to the Pedestal or another support. Console CPU Boards and AEC Control Board can be located inside the Console (standard) or inside the Generator Cabinet (for Serial communication).

14

2.

When a Pedestal is used, secure the Pedestal to the floor through the anchoring holes on its base and place the base cover. Attach the Console to the Pedestal using the mounting holes on the bottom of the Console.

3.

When the Console is wall supported, secure the support to the wall and attach the Console to the support using the mounting holes on the bottom of the Console.

4.

Leave a sufficient working area around the equipment until its final assembly.

IN-1052R0


SECTION 3

CABLE CONNECTIONS This section provides the information necessary to connect the Generator Cables with the system and options.

Note

.

For more information about electrical requirements and cable connections, refer to the “Pre-Installation” document and Section 5 “System Interconnections” at the end of this document.

Note

.

Identification of some terminal connections (TB, TS), boards, etc... along with this document (text and schematics) may have a prefix number which indicates the module number in the equipment. (a.e. TS2 as 4TS2, 10TS2 or 11TS2). Some safety devices such as the Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning Light, and Door Interlock Switch are supplied and installed by the customer. Verify that safety devices have been properly installed and routed during the Pre-Installation procedure.

3.1 3.1.1

CABLE ROUTING INSIDE GENERATOR CABINET GENERAL CABLE ROUTING 1.

Before connecting the Interconnection cables within the Generator Cabinet, cables must be first connected to each Device (Positioner, Tables, Buckys, etc.) and routed through the raceways. Remove the ferrite blocks of the cables (factory clamped) when it is required to carry out a correct routing, then re-install the ferrite blocks where they originally were around cables.

Cables Entrance (upper side of Wall Support

2.

IN-1052R0

Inside the Generator Cabinet, all Interconnection cables must be routed over the Fastening Bar (upper rear bar) of the Cabinet Frame minding the upper Cable Outlet at the rear side of the Cabinet Cover. (Refer to Illustration 3-1).

15


Illustration 3-1 Cable Routing in Compact Generator Fastening Bar

Stator & Interconnections Cables Outlet (rear side) Cable Ties

Stator & Interconnections Cables Entrance Cable Ties

Fastening Bar

Input Transformer Power Line Cables Ground Terminals Input Line Fuses

HV Cables

Stator & Interconnections Cables

Power Line Cable Entrance

Input Transformer Stator & Interconnections Cable Entrance

Power Line Cable Entrance

Input Line Fuses

16

IN-1052R0


3.

For Generators with the Low or High Speed Starter located on a shelf (Module 10 or 11), Stator and Interconnections Cables have to be routed internally through the Cabinet close to the HV Transformer.

In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly recommended to fold and fasten close to the Generator Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see picture below). Never wrap in circles.

YES

3.2

NO

4.

Connect all cables as indicated in Section 3 “Cable Connections”.

5.

Secure all cables to the Fastening Bar using cable ties after all cable / wire connections are complete.

HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES CONNECTION

FOR GENERATORS WITH A HV TRANSFORMER WITH DOUBLE X-RAY TUBE RECEPTACLES (ANODE / CATHODE TO CONNECT TWO TUBES): CONNECTIONS OF THE FILAMENT LEADS “FIL-1 RTN” (J4-15) AND “FIL-2 RTN” (J4-16) ON THE INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD HAVE BEEN INVERTED. THESE CONNECTIONS ARE FACTORY SET. (REFER TO SCHEMATIC 543020XX).

3.2.1

X-RAY TUBES WITH METALLIC INSERT ENVELOPE In case of X-ray Tubes with a Metallic Insert Envelope, it is required to connect the wire from the Metallic Insert Envelope to the Black Banana Plug connection on the HV Transformer to obtain a correct mA measures. For these X-ray Tubes the part number of the HV Transformer has to be coded in revision A or higher (a.e. A6094--16A). (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Map 54302035).

IN-1052R0

17


3.2.2

HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES Connect the HV Cables in the HV Transformer (Generator). These cables must enter into the Generator through the cable outlet on the upper side of the Cabinet and then attached to the fastening bar (upper rear bar) of the Cabinet frame minding the upper cable outlet at the rear side of the Cabinet cover. The Terminal Pins of the High Voltage cables are extremely delicate and easily damaged. Therefore they must be handled carefully. Make sure that they are straight and that the splits in the pins are open (parallel to sides). 1.

The mounting accessories of each termination plug are factory assembled. For extended information refer to the HV Cable manufacturer’s instructions located inside the HV Cable package. Do not install the Silicone washer supplied with the HV Cables.

2.

Unscrew the grub screw of the ring nut. (Refer to the illustration below.) Nipple

Contact Pins

Termination Plug

Ring Nut

Grub Screw Contact

18

3.

Prepare the high voltage terminals that will be installed in the HV Transformer. Put approximately 1 cm (0.5”) of HV Oil in the HV Transformer receptacles (included in the HV cables package). If HV Oil is not available, fill the receptacles using silicone paste provided with the X-ray Tube.

4.

Carefully insert the anode and cathode termination plug into the respective receptacle socket (watch the nipple on the plug to ensure correct positioning of the contact pins).

5.

Hand tighten the ring nut. It must be secure. Tighten the grub screw.

IN-1052R0


3.3 3.3.1

X-RAY TUBE CONNECTION STATOR CABLE X-ray Tubes are equipped with the Stator cable installed. A LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotatory Anode Controller) is required for High Speed X-ray Tubes. Connections between LV-DRAC and Power Module are factory made. Route the Stator cable together with the HV cables to the Generator Cabinet. Connect the Stator cable terminals to the indicated Terminal Block TS2:

STATOR WIRES

TERMINAL TS2 TUBE-1

TUBE-2

MAIN

TS2-1

TS2-9

AUX (Shift)

TS2-2

TS2-10

COMMON

TS2-3

TS2-11

Note

.

Terminal Block TS2 may be marked as 10TS2 or 11TS2 depending on the Generator model.

Note

.

For Philips or Siemens X-ray Tubes refer to Interconnection Maps I/F-021 or I/F-024. IN GENERATORS EQUIPPED WITH LV-DRAC: THE LV-DRAC OUTPUT CAN BE AS HIGH AS 1000 Vrms. FOR SAFETY REASONS (TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCKS), THE STATOR CABLE MUST BE SHIELDED AND BOTH ENDS OF THE SHIELD MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND. DUE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMC) PROBLEMS, THE IGBT’s HEATSINK IS NOT GROUNDED. IT IS CONNECTED TO THE NEGATIVE TERMINAL OF THE INPUT RECTIFIER. TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, BE SURE THAT THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE CAPACITOR BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED BEFORE MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC. MAKE SURE THAT STATOR WIRES ARE PROPERLY CONNECTED. BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURE, CHECK THAT THE ANODE ROTATES CORRECTLY.

IN-1052R0

19


FANS Wires from fans should be routed with the Stator Cables, and connected to the indicated terminal of the Generator Cabinet. Depending on the model of X-ray Tube, the fans are powered at 115 VAC or 220 VAC. Make the following connections to select the fan voltage. For Compact Generators with the Low Speed Starter LF-RAC located on a shelf at the bottom of the Generator (module-10), connect wires from fans to:

TUBE CONNECTION

GENERATOR WITH LOW SPEED STARTER WIRES FROM FANS

115 VAC

220 VAC

AS TUBE-1

10TS2-6 and 10TS2-7 on the Generator Cabinet

TB4-T1 with TB1-22 or TB1-23 on the LF-RAC Board


AS TUBE-2

10TS2-14 and 10TS2-15 on the Generator Cabinet



For Compact Generators with the High Speed Starter LV-DRAC located on a shelf at the bottom of the Generator (module-11), connect wires from fans to:

TUBE CONNECTION

20

GENERATOR WITH HIGH SPEED STARTER WIRES TO FANS

115 VAC

220 VAC

AS TUBE-1

11TS2-6 and 11TS2-7 on the LV-DRAC Module

wire marked “T1” with 11TS2-17 on the LV-DRAC Module


AS TUBE-2

11TS2-14 and 11TS2-15 on the LV-DRAC Module



IN-1052R0


THERMOSTAT OR PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL If the X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65oC) or Pressure Switch (must be NC Contact), the two wires should be routed to the Terminal Block TS2 in the Generator Cabinet and connected to the following Terminals. In case that the X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65oC) and a Pressure Switch (both must be NC Contacts), connect them in series before routing, connecting both wire-ends to their respective Terminals in TS2.

Note

.

THERMOSTAT WIRES

TUBE-1

TUBE-2

THERMOSTAT SIGNAL

TS2-4

TS2-12

THERMOSTAT COMMON

TS2-5

TS2-13

Terminal Block TS2 may be marked as 10TS2 or 11TS2 depending on the Generator model.

If an X-ray Tube is not provided with Thermostat signal, jump both connections in the Terminal Block TS2 (refer to above table).

GND AND/OR SHIELD The connection of the GND and/or Shield wire of the Stator cables depend on the Generator model. GENERATOR MODEL

CONNECTION OF GND and/or SHIELD WIRE

Number of X-ray Tubes

Starter type and Location

1 or 2 Tubes

LF-RAC (Low Speed) Lower Cabinet Shelf (Module 10)

10TS2--8 or 10TS2--16

1 or 2 Tubes

LV-DRAC (High Speed) Lower Cabinet Shelf (Module 11)

11TS2--8 (for Tube-1) 11TS2--16 (for Tube-2)

IN-1052R0

21


3.3.2

TUBE SELECTION SIGNALS

Note

.

This section only applies to Generators with two X-ray Tubes.

The Tube Selection signals are available through two contacts free of voltage located on the starter. TUBE-1 SELECTION

TUBE-2 SELECTION

SELECTION COMMON

on the LF-RAC Board

J1-10

J1-11

J1-12

on the LV-DRAC Module

11KT1-84

11KT1-72

11KT1-83 and 11KT1-71 (connect both)

3.4

INTERCONNECTION CABLES This section identifies the cables and runs needed for Generator and System Interconnection. Route and connect the interconnection cables from each component installed in the system to the Generator Cabinet as indicated in Illustration 3-2 and Section 5.2 -- Interconnection Maps “543010XX”.

Interconnection cables should not be routed into the same conduit or cable raceway as the Power or High Voltage cables.

22

IN-1052R0


Illustration 3-2 Interconnection Cables

GENERATOR CABINET ATP CONSOLE CPU POWER CABLE (factory supplied)

J1

COMMUNICATION CABLE (factory supplied)

J3 J14

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

(factory supplied)

J2 J3 J5

J7 or J8

TS1

INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)

J2

AEC INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)

J5 J13

TOMO INTERFACE CABLE (factory supplied)

SERIAL COMMUNICATION

ROOM DOOR CABLE (customer supplied) ROOM LIGHT CABLE (customer supplied)

TS1

CABLES FROM BUCKY 1 & 2 (ONLY FOR SYSTEMS WITH 1 OR 2 BUCKY) (field supplied)

TS2

STATOR, FAN & THERMOSTAT FROM TUBES (field supplied)

TS3

COMPATIBILITIES ADAPTATIONS

L1 / L2 / L3 / N / GND

ION CHAMBERS, TOMO DEVICES BUCKY 3 & 4, IMAGE SYSTEMS (customer supplied) POWER LINE & GND FOR LINE POWERED GENERATORS (customer supplied)

GND CABLES (factory supplied)

Note

IN-1052R0

.

For Serial Generators (RS232 / RS422): Console CPUs are located inside the Generator Cabinet and Interconnections are factory made. Only one cable (serial communication) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet should be connected to the Control Box, or PC Interface Box, or Serial Console.

23


3.4.1

SERIAL INTERCONNECTION RS232 / RS422

GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN (TPC) USING A POSITIONER WITHOUT TOUCH SCREEN For Generator using a TPC, perform the following connections: (Refer to Illustration 3-3)

Note

24

.

1.

Connect the AC Supply Cable (A7059--xx) from “AC Supply” connector of the TPC to the respective terminals in TS1 of the Generator Cabinet.

2.

Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from “COM1 (Generator)” of the TPC to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.

3.

Connect the Handswitch Cable to the Handswitch connector of the TPC.

4.

The TPC includes extra connectors for the Mouse and the Keyboard. Connect them as indicated in the illustration below. In some cases, these communication ports are used to interface the TPC with other devices.

For futher information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052 and A6188--03 at the end of this Document.

IN-1052R0


Illustration 3-3 Connection of the Generator Touch Screen (TPC) using a Positioner without Touch Screen

GENERATOR

TPC

HANDSWITCH

HANDSWITCH TS1 J5

AC SUPPLY CABLE (A7059--xx) SERIAL CABLE (A7067--xx)

AC SUPPLY COM 1 (GENERATOR) COM 2

TOUCH SCREEN

(INTERNAL)

COM 3 COM 4 M (MOUSE) KB (KEYBOARD)

Label of Operating System Licence Serial Interconnection Cable (COM1)

OPTIONAL MOUSE OPTIONAL KEYBOARD

AC Supply Cable Handswitch

Other Connections (keyboard, etc.)

IN-1052R0

25


GENERATOR TOUCH SCREEN (TPC) USING A POSITIONER WITH TOUCH SCREEN For Generator using a TPC, perform the following connections: (Refer to Illustration 3-4)

Note

26

.

1.

Connect the AC Supply Cable (A7059--xx) from “AC Supply” connector of the TPC to the respective terminals in TS1 of the Generator Cabinet.

2.

Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--xx) from “COM1 (Generator)” of the TPC to J2 “Console” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box.

3.

Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from J1 “Generator” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.

4.

Connect the Handswitch Cable to the Handswitch connector of the TPC.

5.

The TPC includes extra connectors for the Mouse and the Keyboard. Connect them as indicated in the illustration below. In some cases, these communication ports are used to interface the TPC with other devices.

For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052 and A6188--03 at the end of this Document, and refer to the respective Positioner Service Manual.

IN-1052R0


Illustration 3-4 Connection of the Generator Touch Screen (TPC) using a Positioner with Touch Screen

GENERATOR

TPC

HANDSWITCH

HANDSWITCH TS1

AC SUPPLY CABLE (A7059--xx)

AC SUPPLY COM 1 (GENERATOR)

POSITIONER CONTROL BOX J1 (GENERATOR)

SERIAL CABLE (A3352--xx)


J5

COM 2

TOUCH SCREEN

(INTERNAL)

COM 3 COM 4 M (MOUSE)

J2 (CONSOLE)

KB (KEYBOARD)

J6 (REMOTE ON)

ON

OPTIONAL MOUSE OPTIONAL KEYBOARD

REMOTE ON CABLE (A9611--xx)

Label of Operating System Licence Serial Interconnection Cable (COM1)

AC Supply Cable Handswitch

Other Connections (keyboard, etc.)

IN-1052R0

27


VIRTUAL CONSOLE (PC) USING A POSITIONER WITHOUT TOUCH SCREEN Systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC usually must have a PC Interface Box installed between the PC and Generator. (Refer to Illustration 3-5) Perform the following connections:

Note

Note

1.

Remove the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.

2.

Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J1 of the PC Interface Box to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.

3.

Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the PC Interface Box.

4.

Connect the Interface Box--Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the PC Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1 (Communication) and J1 (Auto ON/OFF) of the Computer connectors.

.

.

J1 connector is only available in Computers provided with Auto ON/OFF Board inside (factory installed). 5.

Re-install the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.

6.

Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable for the Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.

For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052, A6188--03 and I/F-036 at the end of this Document.

Illustration 3-5 Connection of the Virtual Console (PC) using a Positioner without Touch Screen

GENERATOR CABINET

J5

PC INTERFACE BOX SERIAL CABLE (A3352--01)

J1

PC (COMPUTER)

PC BOX / PC CABLE (A3363--01)

J2 HANDSWITCH

J1 COM1

J3 POWER LINE CABLE TO 110 / 230 VAC SOCKET

28

IN-1052R0


VIRTUAL CONSOLE (PC) USING A POSITIONER WITH TOUCH SCREEN Systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC usually must have a PC Interface Box installed between the PC and Generator. (Refer to Illustration 3-5) Perform the following connections:

Note

Note

1.

Remove the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.

2.

Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J1 of the PC Interface Box to J2 “Console” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box.

3.

Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A7067--xx) from J1 “Generator” of the System Interface Panel in the Control Box to J5 of the Generator Cabinet.

4.

Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the PC Interface Box.

5.

Connect the Interface Box--Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the PC Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1 (Communication) and J1 (Auto ON/OFF) of the Computer connectors.

.

J1 connector is only available in Computers provided with Auto ON/OFF Board inside (factory installed). 6.

Re-install the Back Cover of the PC Interface Box.

7.

Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable for the Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.

.

For further information, refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052, A6188--03 and I/F-036, and refer to the respective Positioner Service Manual.

Illustration 3-6 Connection of the Virtual Console (PC) using a Positioner with Touch Screen CONTROL BOX

GENERATOR CABINET

J2 J5


PC INTERFACE BOX SERIAL CABLE (A3352--01)

J1

PC (COMPUTER)

PC BOX / PC CABLE (A3363--01)

J2 J1

HANDSWITCH

J1 COM1

J3 POWER LINE CABLE TO 110 / 230 VAC SOCKET

IN-1052R0

29


GENERATOR SERIAL CONSOLE For systems using a Serial Console, only a Serial Interconnection Cable (A7066--xx) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet must be connected to the J1 of the Serial Console. (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Maps 54301052, A6188--03).

3.4.2

COLLIMATOR ERROR SIGNAL (OPTIONAL) This option must be requested on the customer order. For systems using an Automatic Collimator, the X-ray exposure can be inhibited due to a Collimator Error. This signal can be used only for one Automatic Collimator in the system, special interconnection should be required when two Collimators are present. Connect two wires from the Collimator to Terminal Block 4TS3-20 (Collimator Error signal) and 3TS1-18 (or another GND in this Terminal Block). Collimator Error signal goes (through the Interface Cable) from 4TS3-20 in the Generator Cabinet to terminal J2-6 in Connector J2 of the ATP Console CPU Board. If the system is not provided with Automatic Collimator connect 4TS3--20 to GND (3TS1--18).

3.4.3

DOOR INTERLOCK SIGNAL Connect two wires from the Room Door Interlock Switch(es) to Terminal Block 3TS1-22 (Door signal) and 3TS1-23 (Door Rtn - gnd). If the X-ray Room is not provided with a Door signal, place a jumper between both connections in Terminal Block 3TS1.

At this point, proceed to perform the complete Configuration and the Calibration procedures except for AEC. Once Configuration and Calibration tasks have been performed, proceed with the rest of the Installation and Calibration tasks.

30

IN-1052R0


3.4.4

WARNING LIGHT SIGNAL Room Warning Lamp(s) can be externally powered, or internally by the Terminal Block 3TS1. Room Lamp(s) must be connected through the Terminal Block 3TS1-47 and 3TS1-48 (internal relay on Interface Control Board) to enable the Generator switches On/Off the Room Warning Lamps. (Refer to Section 5.2 -I/F-008).

3.4.5

COLLIMATOR LAMP AND SYSTEM LOCKS The Generator can supply power to the Manual Collimator Lamp and System Locks (Table, Vertical Bucky, etc.) Connect wires from the Collimator Lamp to Terminal Block TB7-3 (24 VAC) and TB7-4 (0 VAC) of the Lock Board. Connect wires from the Locks to Terminal Block TB7-5 (+24 VDC) and TB7-6 (0 VDC) of the Lock Board.

Lock Board

Note

IN-1052R0

.

When required, voltages (VAC and VDC) on TB7 can be changed by connecting their respective wires to the other available terminals on the Input Transformer 6T2. (Refer to Schematics 543020XX).

31


3.4.6

BUCKYS (OPTIONAL) Connect the Bucky as indicated in the Section 5.2 (Interconnections Maps for Buckys), and test them before connecting the Ion Chambers. The following table represents the standard Bucky cable connections: SYSTEM

CABLE FROM BUCKY IS CONNECTED TO

Systems with 1 or 2 Bucky

Terminal Block 3TS1 of the Generator Cabinet (Refer to Section 5.2 -- Bucky)

Systems with 3 or 4 Bucky

Terminal Block TB2 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, located in the Generator Cabinet (Refer to “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” and Section 5.2 -- Buckys).

The Bucky of a RAD only Table with Tomo Device

Terminal Block TB1 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, located in the Generator Cabinet (Refer to “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” and Section 5.2 -- Buckys).

Note

.

Optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” is required to install more than two Buckys in the System. (Refer to the “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” and the Manual for the Bucky). If the “Bucky Start” signal enters the Bucky through a relay or another inductive device (a.e. a motor), it is mandatory to add the supplied R2--C2 close to each Bucky, so they have to be connected on the terminal output of the Bucky assembly. The R-Cs are attached to the Generator harness in a bag. If “Bucky Start” signal enters the Bucky through an optocoupler, do not add the supplied R2--C2 for the Bucky.

Note

3.4.7

.

The operations described above will prevent noises and uncontrolled Bucky movements that can cause exposure cutting or console blocking.

TOMO DEVICE (OPTIONAL) RAD Only Table The Tomo cable (A3083-01) from connector J13 of the “ATP Console CPU Board” has to be connected to the Terminal Blocks TB1 and TB2 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, located in the Generator Cabinet. The cables from the Tomo Device are also connected to the Terminal Blocks TB1 and TB2 of the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”. Refer to the “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” for more detailed information and interface. (Refer also to the Manuals of the Tomo Device).

Note

32

.

RAD only Table requires the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”.

IN-1052R0


3.4.8

ION CHAMBERS (OPTIONAL) The “AEC Control Board” (A3012-XX) must be installed on the ATP Console CPU Board before installing the Ion Chamber(s). The “AEC Adaptation Board” (A3263-03) is also required. (Refer to the “Ion Chamber” Service Manuals). Perform the following tasks in the order described:

Note

.

The Generator is only compatible with Ion Chambers that output a positive ramp.

1.

If an Ion Chamber requires High Voltage (200 to 500 VDC), the Generator must include an Interface Control Board (version A3009-09/12) that supplies this voltage. The Interface Control Board must have Jumpers from W3 to W8 in “A” position. This High Voltage is supplied through Terminal Block 3TS1-39 “PT SPLY” of the Generator Cabinet and sent with a wire to TB1-9 of the “AEC Adaptation Board”. ION CHAMBERS WITH HIGH VOLTAGE

GE

BVM CGR BVM-CGR

300 VDC

230 VDC

PHILIPS AMPLIMAT AMP-Phenolic Connector

DB 15 Connector

500 VDC

400 VDC

Notes: -- If the System included both GE and BVM-CGR Ion Chambers, Terminal TB1-9 must supply 270 VDC. -- Philips Amplimat Ion Chambers can not be installed with GE or BVM-CGR Ion Chambers.

DO NOT CONNECT ANY ION CHAMBER TO THE GENERATOR CABINET UNTIL HIGH VOLTAGE IS EITHER VERIFIED OR ADJUSTED TO THE VALUES REQUIRED. OTHER VOLTAGE COULD DAMAGE THE ION CHAMBERS.

Turn the Generator ON and verify voltage in TB1-9 according to the Ion Chambers to be installed. If necessary, adjust the High Voltage at Potentiometer R20 of the Interface Control Board. Turn the Generator OFF after adjustment.

IN-1052R0

33


2.

Connect each Ion Chamber cable to J1 (IC1), J2 (IC2), J3 (IC3) or J5 (IC4) of the “AEC Adaptation Board”. The code for the Ion Chamber cable supplied by the Generator manufacturer is A3253--01.

Note

.

Same Ion Chamber types have to be installed in consecutive order starting at J1 (IC1). In the case of using four Ion Chambers, IC3 and IC4 must have the same film/cassette combination.

Note

.

The Vacutec, AID or similar Ion Chamber type is directly connected to the “AEC Adaptation Board”. For Comet Ion Chambers, cable connection has to be made previously through the Comet Preamplifier PA-021 and then directly to the “AEC Adaptation Board”. For other cases, a cable adapter is required. The Generator manufacturer has the following cable adapters available: GE (A3082--01), CGR-BVM (A3081--01), Philips Amplimat (A3080--01/02 with DB-15 or A6727-01/02 with Phenolic connector) and MEDYS (A6715--01).

34

IN-1052R0


Illustration 3-7 Four Ion Chamber Connection * Connections free of voltage IC Adaptation Cables

GENERATOR AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03) J1 TS1

POWER INTERFACE Cable

ION CHAMBER Cable

IC 1 PREAMPLIFIER

TB1 J2

ION CHAMBER Cable

IC 2 PREAMPLIFIER

ATP CONSOLE BOARD J5

J3

AEC INTERFACE Cable

J4

J5

ION CHAMBER Cable

ION CHAMBER Cable

POWER INTERFACE CABLE

IC 4 PREAMPLIFIER

* Connections with IC Adaptation Cables

AEC ADAPTATION PCB

TS1 (Generator Cabinet)

IC 3 PREAMPLIFIER

TB1

ADAPTATION CABLE* ION CHAMBER 1 (field supplied)

J1 ADAPTATION CABLE*

TB1--9

ION CHAMBER 2 (field supplied)




J5

AEC INTERFACE CABLE

3.

ION CHAMBER TYPE


J5

ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD

J4

Configure Jumpers from JP1 to JP8 and from JP13 to JP16 according to the group of Ion Chamber type: JUMPERS POSITION JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8

JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6

JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16

IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4

B

B

B

IC1 = IC2 = IC3

B

B

A

IC1 = IC2

B

A

A

IC1 ≠ IC2 ≠ IC3 ≠ IC4

A

A

A

IN-1052R0

35


4.

Each type of Ion Chamber requires a specified reference voltage for “Area Selections” and “AEC Reset” signals: G

Vacutec, AID and Comet Ion Chambers require GND (TB1-10).

G

MEDYS, CGR-BVM, GE and Philips Amplimat Ion Chambers require +24 VDC (TB1-4).

The reference voltage is provided from: TB1-7 “Relay 1” for IC1; TB1-6 “Relay 2” for IC2; TB1-5 “Relay 3” for IC3; and TB1-8 “Relay 4” for IC4. For each group of Ion Chambers of the same type, connect a wire between each of the above mentioned terminals to TB1-10 (GND), TB1-4 (+24 VDC) or TB1-3 (+12 VDC) depending on the voltage required (examples: for four MEDYS Ion Chambers add only a wire-jumper between TB1-7 and TB1-4; or for one MEDYS Ion Chamber as IC-1 and one COMET Ion Chamber as IC-2 add a wire-jumper between TB1-7 and TB1-4, and another wire between TB1-6 and TB1-10).

DO NOT TURN ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL THE INPUT SIGNALS OF ALL THE ION CHAMBERS ARE CONNECTED TO THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE. OTHER VOLTAGE MIGHT DAMAGE THE ION CHAMBERS.

5.

Ion Chambers output must be 0 VDC when there is no-radiation (No-Offset adjustment). If an Ion Chamber output has an offset, it must be adjusted to 0 VDC with the respective Potentiometer. Configure Jumpers from JP9 to JP12 and turn ON the Generator only to adjust the following Potentiometers (if needed) according to the Ion Chamber output:

ION CHAMBER OUTPUT

36

JUMPERS POSITION JP9 (IC1)

JP10 (IC2)

JP11 (IC3)

JP12 (IC4)

NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

A

A

A

A

OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

B

B

B

B

TEST POINT AND POTENTIOMETER (ONLY IF JUMPER IS IN “B” POSITION)

TP1 -- R11

TP2 -- R8

TP4 -- R2

TP12 -- R5

IN-1052R0


SECTION 4

4.1

FINAL INSTALLATION AND CHECKS

HV TRANSFORMER

This point does not apply to the hermetic HV Transformers (black aluminium HV Transformers). Ventilation Screw

The HV Transformer contains “Shell Diala AX” oil. Check that there is no oil leakage. If leakage is found, remove the oil fill plug from the top of the HV Transformer and verify that the oil level is within 20 mm (3/4”) from the top of the HV Transformer. Add “Shell Diala AX” oil if necessary. Unscrew the Ventilation Screw from the top of the HV Transformer.

4.2

CABLE FASTENING AND COVERS Note

.

Before re-installing cabinet covers, perform the rest of the required Calibration procedures (a.e. AEC). Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure. Cables should be correctly routed. (Refer to Section 3.1) In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly recommended to fold and fasten close to the Generator Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see picture below). Never wrap in circles.

YES

NO

Re-install the Cabinet covers and connect its internal ground wires. Power line, High Voltage and Interconnections cables must go through the cover cable outlet.

IN-1052R0

37



38

IN-1052R0


SECTION 5

5.1

SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS

SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION SIGNALS All input signals are active low. This means the inputs must be pulled to ground (chassis ground of the Generator) thru relay contacts, by a transistor or other switching device. The current requirement of the switch is less than 10 mA. Do not apply 115 / 220 VAC logic signals to any of the logic inputs. If 115 / 220 VAC logic signals are used in the X-ray table, these signals must be converted to a contact closure by a relay. The outputs signals from the Generator to the subsystem devices are usually active low (switched to chassis ground of the Generator). The outputs are open collector transistor drivers with a maximum current of 0.5 Amperes.

Table 5-1 System Interconnection Signals SIGNAL NAME

SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

AUX BUCKY SPLY

External voltage supply required for the Bucky motion, when this voltage is not +24 VDC.

--BUCKY 1 DR CMD

A low signal to the Interface Control Board as a command to output a Bucky-1 (normally the Table Bucky) drive signal.

--BUCKY 1 MOTION

This low going signal from Bucky-1 indicates Bucky-1 motion, and therefore the exposure is enabled.

BUCKY 1 DR

This signal is originated from the Bucky supply of the Power Module when an exposure order. It starts the Bucky.

--BUCKY 2 DR CMD

A low signal to the Interface Control Board as a command to output a Bucky-2 (normally the Vertical Bucky Stand) drive signal.

--BUCKY 2 MOTION

This low going signal from Bucky-2 indicates Bucky-2 in motion, and therefore the exposure is enabled.

BUCKY 2 DR

This signal is originated from the Bucky supply of the Power Module when an exposure order. It starts the Bucky.

--BUCKY EXP

This low going (0 volts) signal starts the Bucky exposure. The signal originates on the Interface Board

BUCKY SPLY

Voltage supply required for the Bucky drive command.

C--HT CLK

Serial data clock to the HT Control Board. This clock synchronizes the C--HT DATA signal.

C--HT DATA

Serial data to the HT Control Board. This data is synchronous with the C--HT CLK signal.

--COLLIMATOR --DOOR

IN-1052R0

This active low signal indicates that NO EXPOSURE HOLD condition exists at the Collimator. This input is read only when the Radiographic Tube is selected. This low signal is the interlock for the Door of the X-ray room.

39


Table 5-1 (cont.) System Interconnection Signals SIGNAL NAME --FLD1 DR

A low signal to select the right field in the Ion Chamber.

--FLD2 DR

A low signal to select the left field in the Ion Chamber.

--FLD3 DR

A low signal to select the center field in the Ion Chamber.

HT--C CLK

Serial data clock from the HT Control Board. This clock synchronizes the HT--C DATA signal.

HT--C DAT

Serial data from the HT Control Board. This data is synchronous with the HT--C CLK signal.

--HT INL

This signal is low when the switch in the high voltage transformer is in the RAD position. This is a safety interlock which prevents an exposure if the high voltage switch (in the HV Transformer) is in the wrong position.

HV PT CRL

This analogic signal (originates in the optional AEC Control Board) controls the output of the HV Power Supply on the Interface Control Board. +5 volts programs the output to be 0 volts, and 0 volts programs the output to approximately --1200 volts.

IC GND

GND for the IC SPLY.

IC1 INPUT

This input is the output of the Bucky 1 Ion Chamber (normally the Table Ion Chamber).

IC2 INPUT

This input is the output of the Bucky 2 Ion Chamber (normally the Vertical Bucky Stand Ion Chamber).

IC3 INPUT

This input is the output of the Spot Film Ion Chamber.

IC SPLY --LINE CONT

Power supply for the Ion Chamber. This output should be within the range of 500 to 800 volts. A low signal energizes the main line contactor K5 in the Power Module.

--PREP

Commands to the HT Control Board to boost X-ray Tube Filament to the value of mA selected and to start the X-ray Tube Rotor is RAD Tube is selected.

--READY

This low going signal indicates the system is ready to make an exposure (Prep cycle complete). This signal is used to interface to certain peripheral devices such as Film Changers, etc.

--ROOM LIGHT

This low going signal indicates the X-ray preparation or exposure. This signal is used to interface to the Room X-ray warning light.

--STRT DR

40

SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

A low signal to indicate the start of an exposure to the Ion Chamber.

--THERMOSTAT-1

This signal from X-ray Tube indicates the overheat of the Tube-1.

--THERMOSTAT-2

This signal from X-ray Tube indicates the overheat of the Tube-2.

IN-1052R0


5.2

SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION MAPS Refer to the following maps for details of the wire connections. SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION •

Compact / Compact-ESM Generators. System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54301045

•

Serial Communication to Generator. System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54301052

•

RS-232/422/485 Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A6188--03

•

PC / Serial Interface Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/F-036

•

Metallic Case X-ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54302035

•

Earthing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/F-103

STATOR INTERFACE •

Philips Tubes -- Stator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/F-021

•

Siemens Tubes -- Stator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/F-024

ROOM LAMPS •

Room Warning Light Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/F-008

BUCKYS • •

Table Bucky Interface (Liebel / Midwest / Ultravit / Dong-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/F-001

Vertical Bucky Interface (Liebel / Midwest / Ultravit / Dong-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/F-002

AEC -- ION CHAMBERS • •

IN-1052R0

AEC -- VACUTEC / AID / COMET Compatibility for more than one Ion Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I/M-015

AEC Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A3263--03

41



42

IN-1052R0

FLUORO CPU BOARD

CONNECTOR J4 SIGNAL C--FL DAT GND --CAM FL EXP C--FL CLK FL--C DAT GND FL--C CLK CAM SYNC +12V ISO N.U.

TERMINAL BLOCK 3TS1 PIN I/O SIGNAL 1 O SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) 2 O BUCKY SPLY 1 3 O 0 VAC (BUCKY 1) 4 O BUCKY 1 DR 5 I --BUCKY 1 MOT 6 I BUCKY 1 MOT RTN 7 O GND 8 O SUPPLY (BUCKY 2) 9 O BUCKY SPLY 2 10 O 0 VAC (BUCKY 2) 11 O BUCKY 2 DR --BUCKY 2 MOT 12 I 13 I BUCKY 2 MOT RTN 14 O GND 15 O +12V 16 O --12V 17 O +24V UNR 18 O GND 22 I --DOOR 23 O DOOR RTN 24 O --ROOM LIGHT 26 O 220 VAC SW 27 O 115 VAC SW 36 O --SF PREP 37 O --FL EXP 39 O PT SPLY 42 O IC GND 47 O ROOM LIGHT SUP 48 O ROOM LIGHT SW 51 I PT INPUT 52 O --ALOE 53 O --READY 54 O 220 VAC SPLY

CONNECTOR J1 / J10

I/O I I/O O I O I/O O O I

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SIGNAL --4 IN SEL --9 IN SEL +12 VDC V SYNC --FT SW CMD FL START --CAM FL EXP N.U. --ABS --6 IN SEL BEEP GND --MEM EN --MEM GATE N.U.

I/O O O O I I O O O O O O O O

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

FLUORO CABLE ADAPTATIONS BOARDS

ATP CONSOLE BOARD FLUORO

A.E.C.

CONNECTOR J4 SIGNAL I/O PIN C--FL DAT O 1 I 2 --CAM FL EXP I 3 FL--C DAT I 4 FL--C CLK +12V ISO 5 I I/O 6 GND 7 I C--FL CLK I/O 8 GND O 9 CAM SYNC

CONNECTOR J5 SIGNAL I/O PIN 1 IC1 INPUT I I 2 IC3 INPUT O 3 --FLD1 DR O 4 --FLD3 DR GND 5 O 6 I IC2 INPUT 7 I IC4 INPUT 8 O --FLD2 DR 9 O --STRT DR

AEC CABLE

COMPACT GENERATOR CABINET FOR GENERATORS LINE POWERED

L3 only for Three Phase

FOR GENERATORS BATTERIES POWERED 1TB1--LINE L N GND

CONNECTOR J13 SIGNAL TIME1 TIME2 TIME3 TIME4 --PS (DSI) SEL --CINE (DSA) SEL --HCF SEL SPARE IN --TOMO PREP --TOMO EXP TOMO ON EXT REF GND EXP STOP --FS

I/O I I I I I I I I O O O I I/O I O

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

POWER CONNECTOR J1 SIGNAL I/O PIN 1 GND UNR I I 2 +12V UNR I 3 +12VDC O --PWR OFF 4 --PWR ON O 5 6 I GND UNR 7 I GND 8 I +12V UNR 9 I --12VDC

CONNECTOR J2 I/O SIGNAL O --GEN OK O --SFD SEL I --THERMOSTAT 1 I --SF PREP GND (THERM. COM) I/O I --COLLIMATOR TABLE ERR(COMP) I O --ROOM LIGHT O --READY O EXP OK O ABC OUT/--LEFT O --DIRECT SEL I PT INPUT EXT SYNC (FL DSI) I I SPARE IN2 I --SFC (--PT SEL) I --FL EXP GND (DOOR RTN) I/O I --DOOR I --THERMOSTAT 2 --AUTO OFF O SPARE IN1 I O ALOE O --ALOE O --ACT EXP

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

INTERFACE CABLE

The ROTOR TUBE connections are made to TS2 on the DRAC TERMINAL BLOCK 4TS2 / 10TS2 / 11TS2 SIGNAL I/O MAIN T1 O AUX T1 O COM T1 O --THERMOSTAT 1 I THERMOST. COMM. I FAN 1 O 0 VAC O GND O MAIN T2 O AUX T2 O COM T2 O --THERMOSTAT 2 I THERMOST. COMM. I FAN 2 O 0 VAC O GND O

CONNECTOR J3 SIGNAL I/O PIN --EXP O 1 O 2 C--HT DAT I 3 HT--C DAT O 4 --PREP O 5 C--HT CLK HT--C CLK I 6 O 7 HV PT CRL --KV DWN O 8 I LINE SYNC 9 O 10 --LINE CONT --BUCKY 2 DR CMD O 11 --BUCKY EXP I 12 I --HT INL 13 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD O 14 O 15 --KV UP

COMMUNICATION CABLE

GND CABLE

HAND--SWITCH (or VET PEDAL SWITCH) CONNECTOR J15 SIGNAL I/O PIN COM O 1 I 2 PREP I 3 EXP N.U. 4

HAND--SWITCH (or VET PEDAL SWITCH) GND STUD

GND STUD

CONNECTOR 6J2 SIGNAL PIN I/O GND 1 O 2 O +12V UNR 3 O +12VDC 4 --PWR OFF I 5 I --PWR ON 6 O GND 7 O GND +12V UNR 8 O --12VDC 9 O

CONNECTOR 6J3 SIGNAL PIN I/O --EXP O 1 C--HT DAT O 2 I 3 HT--C DAT --PREP O 4 C--HT CLK O 5 HT--C CLK I 6 HV PT CRL O 7 --KV DWN O 8 LINE SYNC I 9 --LINE CONT O 10 O --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 11 --BUCKY EXP I 12 --HT INL I 13 O --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 14 --KV UP O 15 16 O GND

F

Adaptation Boards

F. GARCIA

01/09/06

NAME

DATE

E

CN 04/032

F. GARCIA

26/04/04

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

04/04/99

REVISED

A. DIAZ

28/01/00

D

New interface

F. GARCIA

08/01/02

C

New interface

F. GARCIA

02/02/01

B

CN 00/211

F. GARCIA

04/01/01

A

New interface

F. GARCIA

05/05/00

REV DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

SEDECAL

TO ROTOR TUBE

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

NOTE : TS2--6 is GND when TS2 only has 6 terminals.

POWER CABLE

COMMUNICATION

TO SOCKET } (Line Voltage)

1 2 3

NOTE.-- For Generator with DRAC :

TERMINAL BLOCK 4TS3 PIN I/O SIGNAL 1 I --THERMOSTAT 1 2 I --THERMOSTAT 2 3 I THERM. COMM 5 I TABLE ERROR 7 I --SFC (--PT SEL) 8 O ALOE 10 O --GEN OK 11 O --SFD SEL 12 O --DIRECT SEL 15 O EXP OK 16 O --ACT EXP O --AUTO OFF 17 18 I ABC OUT / --LEFT 19 I EXT SYNC(FL DSI) 20 I --COLLIMATOR A I Foot Switch Cmd. GND B C O Prep/Rdy Acq Rad D I Boost Fluoro I Digital Exposure E

NOTE : Signal for Thermostats go to 4TS3 and then to TS2 or go directly to TS2 depending on Generator model

INTERFACE

TO EARTH GROUND

GND

TOMO CABLE TOMO

TO LINE

} VOLTAGE BREAKER

L1 L2/N L3

NOTE -- For Serial Cabinet : -- the Interface cable connections are factory made to 3TS1, TS2 and 4TS3 terminal blocks. -- 6J2 is not supplied, Power cable is directly connected in factory to J1 of the ATP Console. -- 6J3 is not supplied, Power cable is directly connected in factory to J3 of the ATP Console. LOCKS BOARD TERMINAL BLOCK TB7 SIGNAL I/O PIN 24 VAC LAMP O 3 0 VAC LAMP O 4 +24 VDC LOCKS O 5 0 VDC LOCKS O 6 +24 VDC LOCKS O 7 0 VDC LOCKS O 8

SHEET / OF 1/2

} COLLIMATOR LAMP LOCKS (Table & Tube Stand)

54301045

DWG: F

E

D

C

B

A

REV

COMPACT / COMPACT-ESM GENERATORS SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION

NOTE.-- The Adaptation Boards are optional

GENERATOR CABINET GENERATOR CABINET

AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03)

to J5 of ATP Console Board

3TS1 16 15 17 18

J4

TB1

--12V +12V +24V UNR GND

39

J2

to Ion Chamber #2

J3

to Ion Chamber #3

HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY (if required)

RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04)

2 3

TB1

TB1

--12V

3 10

to Ion Chamber #1

J2

to Ion Chamber #2

J3

to Ion Chamber #3

J5

to Ion Chamber #4

3

+24V UNR

5

NOTE Depending on the Ion Chamber, make jumpers configuration and interface as specific schematic IM-xxx

2

+12V

4

to Ion Chamber #4

J1

9

4

J5

J4

3TS1

to Ion Chamber #1

J1

to J5 of ATP Console Board


GND

2

4 10

NOTE Depending on the Ion Chamber, make jumpers configuration and interface as specific schematic IM-xxx

TOMO / BUCKY ADAPTATION BOARD (A3261--03/05)

TOMO / BUCKY ADAPTATION BOARD (A3261--03/05)

TB1 12

TB1

13

12 13

NOTE Depending on the Tomo Device, make jumpers configuration and interface as specific schematic IM-xxx

NOTE Depending on the Tomo Device, make jumpers configuration and interface as specific schematic IM-xxx

Interconnection of Adaptation Boards for a Generator with RF Adaptation Board

Interconnection of Adaptation Boards for a Generator without RF Adaptation Board F

Adaptation Boards

F. GARCIA

01/09/06

E D

CN 04/032 New interface

F. GARCIA F. GARCIA

26/04/04 08/01/02

C

New interface

F. GARCIA

02/02/01

B

CN 00/211

F. GARCIA

04/01/01

A

New interface

F. GARCIA

05/05/00

REV DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

04/04/99

REVISED

A. DIAZ

28/01/00

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 2/2

54301045

DWG: F

E

D

C

B

A

COMPACT GENERATORS SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION

REV

SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE Board

GENERATOR CABINET J1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

+24 VDC UNR PWR GND CHASSIS GND SPARE RXD PREP/EXP COMM EXP ORDER POWER ON

+24 VDC UNR PWR GND CHASSIS GND SPARE TXD PREP ORDER POWER COMM POWER OFF

J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

NOTE: FOR GENERAL INTERCONNECTIONS REFER TO SCHEMATIC 54301045 (COMPACT / COMPACT-ESM GENERATORS)

SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR SERIAL CONSOLE (A7066--xx or A3149--01) PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

NOTES: RXD ON GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO TXD ON SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE TXD ON GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO RXD ON SERIAL OPERATOR CONSOLE

TPC or PC INTERFACE BOX CONNECTOR J1 SIGNAL I/O CTS ( RXD-- ) I I RXD ( RXD+ ) TXD ( TXD+ ) O RTS ( TXD-- ) O SPARE PIN 5 ACT EXP O O LOGIC GND CHASSIS GND O CHASSIS GND O +12 VDC --ALOE PWR GND O PWR GND O PREP/EXP COMM O EXP ORDER I PREP ORDER I POWER COMM I/O I POWER OFF POWER ON I SPARE PIN 20 SPARE PIN 21 DOOR DOOR RTN +24 VDC UNR O +24 VDC UNR O

PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

CONNECTOR J5 I/O SIGNAL I CTS ( RXD-- ) I RXD ( RXD+ ) O TXD ( TXD+ ) O RTS ( TXD-- ) SPARE PIN 5 O ACT EXP O LOGIC GND O CHASSIS GND O CHASSIS GND +12 VDC --ALOE O PWR GND O PWR GND O PREP/EXP COMM EXP ORDER I PREP ORDER I I/O POWER COMM I POWER OFF I POWER ON SPARE PIN 20 SPARE PIN 21 DOOR DOOR RTN O +24 VDC UNR O +24 VDC UNR

NOTE: REFER TO SCHEMATIC A6188--02 FOR RS--232/422/485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION

SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR TPC (A7067--xx or A3352--01) SERIAL INTERCONNECTION CABLE FOR INTERFACE BOX (A3352--01)

NOTES: RXD AND TXD ARE INTERNALLY REVERSED IN TPC OR PC INTERFACE BOX REFER TO SCHEMATICS I/F--036 FOR OTHER PC INTERFACE BOX CONNECTIONS

C

NC 03 / 050

B

New schematic

F. GARCIA

08/01/02

A

Connections

F. GARCIA

02/02/01

REV DESCRIPTION

F. GARCIA

ISSUED BY

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

07/07/99

REVISED

A. DIAZ

24/01/00

SHEET / OF 1/1

DWG:

54301052 C

B

A

REV

08/03/03

DATE

SEDECAL

SERIAL COMMUNICATION TO GENERATOR SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION

ATP CONSOLE BD. ( Multilayer ) J2 GND +12V UNR +12V OFF ON GND GND +12V UNR --12V

POWER CABLE

J1

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

9

9

J3

COMMUNICATION CABLE

PREP/EXP COMM +12V UNR

EXP ORDER

+12V

POWER OFF

OFF

POWER ON

J5

1

14

PREP/EXP COMM

2

16

PREP ORDER

3

15

EXP ORDER

4

18

POWER OFF

5

19

POWER ON

6

17

POWER COMM

GND

TS1

GND +12V UNR

15

10

--12V

52

11

-- ALOE

12 18

PWR GND

13

PWR GND

17

24

+24 VDC UNR

GND

J3

--EXP

--EXP

C--HT DAT

2

2

C--HT DAT

HT--C DAT

3

3

HT--C DAT

--PREP

4

4

--PREP

C--HT CLK

5

5

C--HT CLK

HT--C CLK

6

6

HT--C CLK

HV PT CRL

7

7

HV PT CRL

8

8

--KV DWN

LINE SYNC

9

9

LINE SYNC

--LINE CONT

10

10

--LINE CONT

--BUCKY 2 DR CMD

11

11

--BUCKY 2 DR CMD

12

12 13

--BUCKY EXP

13

--BUCKY 1 DR CMD

14

14

--KV UP

15

15

--HT INL

POWER COMM

ON

1

--BUCKY EXP

PREP ORDER

GND

1

--KV DWN

J5 HARNESS J14

+24V UNR

25 22 RS--xxx J8 ACT EXP RXD+ TXD+ +5V GND TXD-RXD--

--HT INL

22

23

23

51

21

ACT EXP

2

3

RXD+ ( RXD )

3

4

TXD+ ( TXD )

20

5

7

6

5

7

4

8

1

9

8

J7

GND

See Note

LOGIC GND TXD-RXD-CHASSIS GND CHASSIS GND

/////

RS--232

DTR

PT INPUT

2

9

TXD

DOOR RTN

6

--KV UP

RXD

+24 VDC UNR DOOR

1

--BUCKY 1 DR CMD

ACT EXP

+12 VDC

Note.-- Signals between ( ) when RS--232 Serial Communication

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A

CN 04/148

REV DESCRIPTION

F. GARCIA ISSUED BY

09/09/04 DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

04/04/04

REVISED

A. DIAZ

04/04/04

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 1/1

DWG:

A6188--03 A

REV

RS--232/422/485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION

PC INTERFACE BOX (A6509--01) HAND--SWITCH J1

J2

14

1

16

2

15

3

25

+24V UNR

13

PWR GND

19 18 17

5

PREP/EXP COMM PREP ORDER EXP ORDER

COMPUTER

LAMP

CONNECTION TO GENERATOR INTERFACE BOX CABLE (A3352--01)

HANDSWITCH CABLE (A3223--05)

J3

POWER ON

INTERFACE BOX--COMPUTER CABLE (A3363--01)

AUTO ON/OFF (A3179--01/02) J1/J2

4

4

1

1

6

6

POWER OFF

J2 1

POWER COMM

+12V

2

GND

COM 1

N.U.

RS232

2

TxD

3

3

3

RxD

2

2

7

GND

5

5

9 21

PT INPUT

10

+12 VDC

11

--ALOE

22

DOOR

23

DOOR RTN

C B A

CN 03/050

F. GARCIA

09/05/03

CN 00/148

F. GARCIA

07/07/00

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

CN 04/148

F. GARCIA

////

GND STUD

for external connection

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

30/03/00

REVISED

A. DIAZ

30/03/00

SHEET / OF 1/1

I/F--036 C

B

A

10/09/04

SEDECAL

PC/SERIAL INTERFACE

REV

5

4

3

2

1

D

D

Anode supply

Black

X-ray Tube

mA mA Red

C

C

Shunt

Shunt

mA +

B

B

Cathode supply

A

A

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. Díaz

11/02/03

REVISED

A. Díaz

11/02/03

SEDECAL REV 5

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY 4

SHEET / OF

54302035

1/1

REV

METALLIC CASE X-RAY TUBE CONN.

DATE 3

2

1

GENERATOR CABINET

(5) (6)

ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET

(4)

(7)

(3)

(1)

GND cable

(2)

( yellow/green, AWG #10 )

(12)

Central Ground

(2)

GND Stud

(3)

Cabinet Cover GND

(4)

Back Panel GND

(5)

Front Panel GND

(6)

Filter LF1 Cover GND

(7)

Adaptations Panel GND

(8)

Console GND (Bottom Panel)

(9)

Console Support GND

(10)

Pedestal Tube GND

(11)

Pedestal Cover GND

(12)

GND STUD

Note.-- (9) applicable only for metallical Box Console

GND

OPERATOR CONSOLE

(1)

HV TANK See Note (9)

(8)

PEDESTAL

GND cable ( yellow/green, AWG #10 )

(Option)

(10) (11) DRAWING REVISED

NAME

DATE

F. GARCIA

30/06/04

A. DIAZ

30/06/04

SEDECAL REV DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

SHEET / OF

I/F--103

1/1

REV

EARTHING DIAGRAM

STATOR ROTALIX 350/351 CONNECTIONS 200

100 AUXILIARY

MAIN

1

2

2

3

4

3

4

5

6

5

6

7

8

7

9

10 COMMON

STATOR SUPER ROTALIX 350 CONNECTIONS 200

100 AUXILIARY

MAIN

1

2

4

3

4

3

6

5

6

5

8

7

8

7

9

10 COMMON

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

09/09/98

REVISED

A. DIAZ

09/09/98

SHEET / OF

SEDECAL REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

1/1

Interconnection Interconexión

I/F--021 REV

PHILIPS TUBES--STATOR INTERFACE

STATOR 100 CONNECTIONS ( BIANGULIX and OPTILILIX TUBES )

Estator 100 BIANGULIX and OPTILIX ( SIEMENS )

Ib Make jumper

II MAIN

Make jumper

I AUXILIARY

Ia

0 COMMON

Output connector

NOTE CONNECT THE STATOR CABLE AS SHOWN. CHECK THE CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THE TUBE.

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

09/09/98

REVISED

A. DIAZ

09/09/98

SHEET / OF

SEDECAL REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

1/1

Interconnection Interconexión

I/F--024 REV

SIEMENS TUBES--STATOR INTERFACE

Interconnection 1.-- For Generator Interface with control relay and externally powered

POWER MODULE

X--RAY ROOM

TS1

ROOM LIGHT SUP

ROOM LIGHT SW

47

}

115 / 220 VAC

48 ROOM WARNING LIGHT

Interconnection 2.-- For Generator Interface with control relay and internally powered POWER MODULE

TS1 X--RAY ROOM

115 or 220 VAC SW

*

add jumper ROOM LIGHT SUP ROOM LIGHT SW 0 VAC (in TS1-3 or TS1-10)

ROOM WARNING LIGHT

47 48

* *

Select the power supply on TS1 according to the lamp voltage. Add jumper to TS1-26 for 220 VAC or to TS1-27 for 115 VAC.

Interconnection 3,-- Additional option to meet some Local Electrical Codes

POWER MODULE

TS1 ROOM LIGHT SUP

47

Contact 7A 1/6HP 125, 250 V AC 3A 30 V DC 48 ROOM LIGHT SW

E D C B A REV

I/F update

F. GARCIA

20/06/04

DRAWING

I/F update

F. GARCIA

02/02/02

REVISED

I/F changing

F. GARCIA

05/05/99

TS1 changing

F. GARCIA

24/05/96

EMC

F. GARCIA

29/03/96

ISSUED BY

DATE

DESCRIPTION

NAME

DATE

F. GARCIA

04/19/95

A. DIAZ

SHEET / OF

04/19/95

SEDECAL

1/1

I/F--008 E

D

C

B

A

REV

ROOM WARNING LIGHT INTERFACE INTERFAZ LAMPARA RAYOS--X SALA

TABLE

GENERATOR POWER MODULE

BUCKY LIEBEL (Semi--Automatic) BUCKY MIDWEST BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)

INTERFACE PANEL

Interface Control Board

Semi--Automatic Bucky

+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP B1

BUCKY 1 MOTION

TS1--5

BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN

TS1--6

J4--11 K5

EXP INT

B2

+24 VDC

(SEE NOTE 1)

K5 BUCKY START

TS1--4

BUCKY 1 DR

B3

J4--8

BUCKY 1 DR CMD

K5 (SEE NOTE 3)

J4--9

R2 C2

B8

TS1--3

0 VAC

0 VAC

ADD JUMPER

(SEE NOTE 2)

BUCKY SPLY TS1--2 TS1--1

115/220 VAC

B4

GND

ADD JUMPER TO

TS1--27 for 115 VAC { TS1--26 for 220 VAC

NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is not connected to B3 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown. Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board.

NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal B2 no está conectado al B3. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra. Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.

8 7

Interf. board revised

REV

DESCRIPTION

Innomed added

F. GARCIA

14/03/08

F. GARCIA

09/09/02

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

15/03/95

REVISED

A. DIAZ

15/03/95

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 1/4

Interconnection Cable Cable de Inerconexión

I/F--001 8

7

TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY MESA

REV

TABLE


BUCKY LIEBEL (Automatic) BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)

INTERFACE PANEL


Automatic Bucky


BUCKY 1 MOTION

TS1--5

BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN

TS1--6

J4--11 K5

EXP INT

B2

+24 VDC

(SEE NOTE 1)

K5 BUCKY START

TS1--4

BUCKY 1 DR

B3

J4--8

BUCKY 1 DR CMD

K5 J4--9

ADD JUMPER B8 (SEE NOTE 3)

(SEE NOTE 2)

TS1--3

R2

0 VAC

ADD JUMPER BUCKY SPLY

C2

TS1--2 TS1--1

115/220 VAC

B4

GND

ADD JUMPER TO


NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is not connected to B3 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown. Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board. NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal B2 no está conectado al B3. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra. Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.

8 7 REV

Interf. board revised Innomed added DESCRIPTION

F. GARCIA

14/03/08

F. GARCIA ISSUED BY

09/09/02 DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

15/03/95

REVISED

A. DIAZ

15/03/95

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 2/4


I/F--001 8

7


REV

TABLE


BUCKY ULTRAVIT

INTERFACE PANEL


BUCKY

+24 VDC K3 BUCKY EXP 1

BUCKY 1 MOTION

TS1--5

BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN

TS1--6

J4--11 K5

EXP INT

2

+24 VDC

(SEE NOTE 1)

K5 TS1--4

BUCKY 1 DR

4

BUCKY START

J4--8 J4--9

R2 C2

7

BUCKY 1 DR CMD

K5

(SEE NOTE 3)

TS1--3

0 VAC

0 VAC

ADD JUMPER (SEE NOTE 2)

BUCKY SPLY TS1--2

5 8

ADD JUMPER

TS1--1

115/220 VAC GND

{

ADD JUMPER TO TS1--27 for 115 VAC TS1--26 for 220 VAC

NOTE 1: Be sure that 2 terminal is not connected to 4 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown.

NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal 2 no está conectado al 4. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra.

8 7

Interf. board revised

F. GARCIA

14/03/08

Innomed added

F. GARCIA

09/09/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

15/03/95

REVISED

A. DIAZ

15/03/95

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 3/4


I/F--001 8

7


REV

TABLE


BUCKY DONG--A

INTERFACE PANEL


BUCKY


BUCKY 1 MOTION

TS1--5

BUCKY 1 MOTION RTN

TS1--6

J4--11 K5

EXP INT

6

+24 VDC

(SEE NOTE 1) BUCKY START

K5 TS1--4

BUCKY 1 DR

4

J4--8

BUCKY 1 DR CMD

K5

(SEE NOTE 3)

J4--9

R2 C2

TS1--3

0 VAC

2

0 VAC

ADD JUMPER (SEE NOTE 2)

BUCKY SPLY TS1--2

3 1

ADD JUMPER

TS1--1

115/220 VAC

7

GND

ADD JUMPER TO




8 7 REV

Interf. board revised Innomed added DESCRIPTION

F. GARCIA

14/03/08

F. GARCIA ISSUED BY

09/09/02 DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

15/03/95

REVISED

A. DIAZ

15/03/95

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 4/4


I/F--001 8

7


REV

VERTICAL BUCKY


BUCKY LIEBEL (Semi--Automatic) BUCKY MIDWEST BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)

INTERFACE PANEL


Semi--Automatic Bucky


BUCKY 2 MOTION

TS1--12

BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN

TS1--13

J4--10 K4

EXP INT

B2

+24 VDC

(SEE NOTE 1)

K4 BUCKY START

TS1--11

BUCKY 2 DR

B3

J4--7

BUCKY 2 DR CMD

K4

(SEE NOTE 3)

J4--9

R2 TS1--10

0 VAC

C2

B8

0 VAC

ADD JUMPER

(SEE NOTE 2)

BUCKY SPLY TS1--9 TS1--8

115/220 VAC

B4

GND

ADD JUMPER TO


NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is not connected to B3 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown. Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board.

NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal B2 no está conectado al B3. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra. Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.

8 7

Interf board revised

F. GARCIA

14/03/08

Innomed added

09/09/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

F. GARCIA ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

15/03/95

REVISED

A. DIAZ

15/03/95

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 1/4


I/F--002 8

7

VERTICAL BUCKY INTERFACE INTERFAZ BUCKY VERTICAL

REV

VERTICAL BUCKY


BUCKY LIEBEL (Automatic) BUCKY INNOMED (IBC 430)

INTERFACE PANEL


Automatic Bucky


BUCKY 2 MOTION

TS1--12

BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN

TS1--13

J4--10 K4

EXP INT

B2

+24 VDC

(SEE NOTE 1)

K4 BUCKY START

TS1--11

BUCKY 2 DR

B3

J4--7

BUCKY 2 DR CMD

K4 J4--9

ADD JUMPER B8 TS1--10

(SEE NOTE 3)

(SEE NOTE 2)

0 VAC

ADD JUMPER

R2

BUCKY SPLY TS1--9

C2

TS1--8

115/220 VAC

B4

GND

ADD JUMPER TO


NOTE 1: Be sure that B2 terminal is not connected to B3 terminal. NOTE 2: Select correct voltage in the bucky according to AC input NOTE 3: In the case of noise due to Bucky, add R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%; and C2=470 nF, 250 VAC as shown. Don’t add that R2--C2 for Liebel--Flarsheim 8000 Series Bucky, and remove resistor R36 and R37 in the INTERFACE CONTROL board. NOTA 1: Asegurarse que el terminal B2 no está conectado al B3. NOTA 2: Seleccionar la tensión del bucky según la entrada AC NOTA 3: En caso de ruidos debido al Bucky, añadir R2=22 ohm, 1/2w, 5%, y C2=470 nF, 250 VAC según se muestra. Para Bucky Liebel--Flarsheim Series 8000, no añadir esa R2--C2, y quitar las resistencias R36 y R37 en la tarjeta INTERFACE CONTROL.

8 7


F. GARCIA

14/03/08

Innomed added

F. GARCIA

09/09/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

15/03/95

REVISED

A. DIAZ

15/03/95

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 2/4


I/F--002 8

7


REV

VERTICAL BUCKY


BUCKY ULTRAVIT

INTERFACE PANEL


BUCKY


BUCKY 2 MOTION

TS1--12

BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN

TS1--13

J4--10 K4

EXP INT

2

+24 VDC

(SEE NOTE 1)

K4 BUCKY START

TS1--11

BUCKY 2 DR

4

J4--7 J4--9

R2 C2

7

BUCKY 2 DR CMD

K4

(SEE NOTE 3)

TS1--10

0 VAC

0 VAC

ADD JUMPER

(SEE NOTE 2)

BUCKY SPLY TS1--9

5 8

ADD JUMPER

TS1--8

115/220 VAC GND

ADD JUMPER TO




8 7


F. GARCIA

14/03/08

Innomed added

09/09/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

F. GARCIA ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

15/03/95

REVISED

A. DIAZ

15/03/95

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 3/4


I/F--002 8

7


REV

VERTICAL BUCKY


BUCKY DONG--A

INTERFACE PANEL


BUCKY


BUCKY 2 MOTION

TS1--12

BUCKY 2 MOTION RTN

TS1--13

J4--10 K4

EXP INT

6

+24 VDC

(SEE NOTE 1)

K4 BUCKY START

TS1--11

BUCKY 2 DR

4

J4--7 J4--9

R2 C2

2

BUCKY 2 DR CMD

K4

(SEE NOTE 3)

TS1--10

0 VAC

0 VAC

ADD JUMPER

(SEE NOTE 2)

BUCKY SPLY TS1--9

3 1

ADD JUMPER

TS1--8

115/220 VAC

7

GND

ADD JUMPER TO




8 7


F. GARCIA

14/03/08

Innomed added

F. GARCIA

09/09/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

15/03/95

REVISED

A. DIAZ

15/03/95

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 4/4


I/F--002 8

7


REV


TB1

TS1

POWER INTERFACE Cable

AEC ADAPTATION BD. ( A3263–03 )

9

ION CHAMBER Cable

IC GND

1

1

16

–12 VDC

2

7

–12 VDC

7

15

+12 VDC

3

8

+12 VDC

8

17

+24 VDC

4

9

GND

9

18

GND

8

IC1 OUT

5

+12 VDC

FLD2–IC1

6 7 jumper

10

TP6 IC4

CONSOLE

ION CHAMBER #1

J1

42

J5

AEC INTERFACE Cable

5 7

GND

5

IC4 INPUT

7

IC1 INPUT

1

6

IC2 INPUT

6

2

IC3 INPUT

2

–FLD 2 DR

8

3

–FLD 1 DR

3

4

–FLD 3 DR

4

9

– 6

R4 1K J4

1

8

RP1 10K 5 6

7 C8 0.1 uF

B

U1 LF347 + 5 7 8

JP12 A

+12 VDC R6 RP2 3K01 10K R5 6 5 1K RP2 10K 7 8 RP1 10K IC4 OUT

IC1

+12 VDC R12 RP3 3K01 10K R11 –9 R10 6 5 1K U1 1K RP3 LF347 8 10K 10 C10 + 7 7 8 0.1 uF RP4 8 10K JP9 IC1 OUT B A

TP1

RP4 10K 5 6

+12 VDC R7 RP3 3K01 10K R8 – 13 R9 2 1 1K U1 1K RP3 LF347 14 10K 12 C9 + 3 3 4 0.1 uF RP4 4 10K JP10 IC2 OUT B A

TP2

IC2

RP4 10K 1 2

– 4 U1 LF347 +

FLD1–IC1 FLD3–IC1 STRT–IC1

11

TP4 1

– 2 U1 LF347 + 3 3

1 C7 0.1 uF

B

JP11 A

IC1 OUTPUT

5

3

CENTER AREA

3

2

LEFT AREA

2

6

RIGHT AREA

6

4

RESET

4

Screen

TP5 GND

+12 VDC R1 3K01

RP1 10K 2

R3 1K

5

C4 100uF 35V

C2 0.1 uF

–12 VDC

IC3

C3 100uF 35V

C1 0.1 uF

4

RP2 10K 2 1 RP2 10K 3 4 RP1 10K

1 –12 VDC +12 VDC

FLD3–IC2

Shield C6 100uF 35V

CR2 1N4148

6

1

13

8

JP8 A

6

1

13

8

JP6 A

B

C5 0.1 uF 6

1

13

8

K2 6

1

13

8

JP14 A

B

FLD2–IC1

K11

CR3 1N4148

K6

JP4 A

FLD2–IC2

K7 6

1

13

8

JP2 A

B

7

8

+12 VDC

8

9

GND

9

5

IC1 OUTPUT

5

3

CENTER AREA

3

2

LEFT AREA

2

6

RIGHT AREA

6

4

RESET

4

FLD1–IC2

Screen 6

1

13

8

B FLD2–IC3

6

1

13

8

JP16 A

6

1

13

8

B FLD1–IC3

6 CR4 1N4148

JP7 A

1

K8 6

JP5 A

1

B 13

8

K4 6

JP15 A

1

B 13

FLD3–IC1

8

K13 6

FLD2–IC3 1

B 13

FLD3–IC2

8

13

FLD3–IC3

ION CHAMBER Cable

Preamplifier

1

K14

IC3 OUT K12

ION CHAMBER #3

J3 1

K3

B

FLD1–IC1

STRT–IC2

K15

Preamplifier

1

–12 VDC

FLD1–IC2 9

ION CHAMBER Cable

7

IC3 OUT IC2 OUT

K10

ION CHAMBER #2

J2

R2 1K

FLD2–IC2 –STRT DR

Preamplifier

1

8

7

–12 VDC

7

8

+12 VDC

8

9

GND

9

5

IC1 OUTPUT

5

3

CENTER AREA

3

2

LEFT AREA

2

6

RIGHT AREA

6

4

RESET

4

FLD1–IC3 FLD3–IC3 STRT–IC3

Screen TP3 ST

K9 6

R13 10K

CR1 1N4148

13

JP3 A B

1 8

STRT–IC1

K5 6

JP1 A

1

13

K1 6

JP13 A

1

B

8

13

STRT–IC2

K16 6

1

13

8

B 8

STRT–IC3

1

IC4 OUT

JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 POS. A – NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT POS. B – OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

Ion Chamber Type

Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16

IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4

B

B

B

IC1=IC2=IC3

B

B

A

IC1=IC2

B

A

A

/ / / IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4

A

A

A

Note.– Compatible interface with preamplifier for Ion Chamber types : – Expos–AID

ION CHAMBER #4

J5 ION CHAMBER Cable

Preamplifier

1

7

–12 VDC

7

8

+12 VDC

8

9

GND

9

5

IC1 OUTPUT

5

3

CENTER AREA

3

2

LEFT AREA

2

6

RIGHT AREA

6

4

RESET

4

Screen

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

07/08/96

REVISED

A. DIAZ

10/10/96

SHEET / OF 1/1

DWG:

IM–015 A

REV

– Vacutec 70145/70151 – Comet Ion Chambers with PA–021 Preamplifier A

Version 03

REV DESCRIPTION

F. GARCIA

10/10/99

ISSUED BY

DATE

SEDECAL

AEC – AID / VACUTEC / COMET COMPATIBILITY

--FIELD SEL 3 F COMM --12 VDC +12 VDC +24 VDC 4

E

TB1

C

B

RELAY 4

1

1

2

7

3

8

4

9

7

RELAY 1

9

IC4

10

GND

J4 5

GND

7

IC4 INPUT

1

IC1 INPUT

+12 VDC R6 RP2 3K01 5 6 10K 6 R5 -R4 6 5 1K U1 1K RP2 LF347 7 10K 5 + C8 7 7 8 0.1 uF RP1 8 10K JP12 IC4 OUT B A RP1 10K

TP6

TP1

+12 VDC

RP4 10K

IC1

6

5 R10 1K

-- 9

RP3 10K

5 RP3 10K 10 + 8 7 7 RP4 8 10K

U1 LF347

8

C10 0.1 uF JP9 B A

+

6

R12 3K01

TP2 1 R9 1K

14

IC1 OUT

+12 VDC

RP4 10K

IC2

R11 1K

C9 0.1 uF

B

6

IC2 INPUT

JP10 A

RP3 10K -- 13 2 1 U1 RP3 LF347 12 10K + 4 3 3 RP4 4 10K 2

R7 3K01 R8 1K

11

IC2 OUT

C3 100uF 35V

TP4

RP1 10K

IC3 1

2

-- 2

U1 LF347

1 C7 0.1 uF

+

JP11 B A

2

3 3 3 4 RP1 4 10K

TP5 GND

IC2 OUT

IC3 OUT

FLD2--IC2 FLD1--IC2 FLD3--IC2

4

--FLD 3 DR

STRT--IC2

9

--STRT DR

8 9

3

--FLD 1 DR

7

+12 VDC

--12 VDC +12 VDC GND IC1 OUTPUT

4

CENTER AREA LEFT AREA RIGHT AREA --RESET

5 3 2 6 4

COMM --12 VDC +12 VDC GND IC2 OUTPUT CENTER AREA LEFT AREA

3

RIGHT AREA --RESET

J3 K10

C6 100uF 35V

C5 0.1 uF

CR2 1N4148

JP8 A

1

6

8

13

B FLD2--IC1

K11 6 CR3 1N4148

K6

A

1

13

8

8

B

B

6

8

B

FLD2--IC3

K3 6

1

13

8

A

6

B 8

8 9 IC3 OUT FLD2--IC3

1

13

FLD1--IC3

7

K14

JP16 1

13

FLD1--IC2

6

B

JP2 A

A

8

1

K15

JP14 1

13

FLD2--IC2

1

13

FLD1--IC1

A

K7 6

K2

JP6

6

JP4 1

13

FLD1--IC3

8

FLD3--IC3 STRT--IC3

2

K12

CR4 1N4148

1

13

8

A B FLD3--IC1

JP5

K8

JP7

6

6

1

13

8

A B

K4 6

6

1

13

8

B 8

FLD3--IC3

3 2 6 4

K9

R13 10K

CR1 1N4148

JP3

6

1

13

8

A B STRT--IC1

JP1

K5 6

1

13

8

A B

K1 6

7

8

STRT--IC3

9

K16

A

6

1

13

8

B 13

STRT--IC2

IC4 OUT

5 3 2 6 4

JUMPERS JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12 POS. A -- NO OFFSET ADJUSTMENT POS. B -- OFFSET ADJUSTMENT Ion Chamber Type

B

B

B

IC1=IC2=IC3

B

B

A

IC1=IC2

B

A

A

/ / / IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4

A

A

A

F

E

GND IC3 OUTPUT CENTER AREA LEFT AREA RIGHT AREA --RESET

2

COMM --12 VDC +12 VDC GND IC4 OUTPUT CENTER AREA LEFT AREA RIGHT AREA --RESET

1

Note.-- Version 03 as CN 99/45

Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers JP3,JP4,JP7,JP8 JP1,JP2,JP5,JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16

IC1=IC2=IC3=IC4

--12 VDC +12 VDC

J5 1

JP13 1

COMM

K13

A

1

13

FLD3--IC2

JP15

5

8 TP3 ST

1

COMM

J2 1

--12 VDC

8

--FLD 2 DR

4

STRT--IC1

R2 1K

1 RP2 10K

6

FLD3--IC1

R1 3K01

RP2 10K

2

FLD1--IC1

C4 100uF 35V +12 VDC

C2 0.1 uF

--12 VDC

3

FLD2--IC1 C1 0.1 uF

R3 1K

2

IC3 INPUT

+12 VDC

4 -U1 LF347

6

RELAY 2

5

IC1 OUT

5

A

J1

8

RELAY 3

3

D

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

07/07/99

REVISED

A. DIAZ

07/07/99

SEDECAL D

REV DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

SHEET / OF 1/1

DWG:

A3263--03 REV

AEC ADAPTATION ADAPTACION AEC

Technical Publication DB-1004R4

Data Book HF Series Generators

HF Series Generators Data Book


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0

APR 1, 2001

First edition

1

FEB 10, 2003

Documentation update

2

JAN 25, 2005


3

NOV 2, 2004


4

OCT 26, 2006

Extended Memory Locations






Note

DB-1004R4

.



TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1

2


1

1.1

Installation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

1.2

Maintenance History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

DATA TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

DB-1004R4

i


ii

DB-1004R4


SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION This Data Book is the register of the Configuration and Calibration data of the Generator and the register of each Periodic Maintenance Service carried out. Keep this book always with the equipment for reference.

Note

.

Enter the data with a pencil in order to modify them later due to future changes.

If the HT Controller Board or the ATP Console CPU Board are replaced, check specially that Extended Memory data have not been lost or modified with the Board change. Compare Extended Memory data displayed on the Console with the values noted in this document. Also, make some exposures using different techniques and Focal Spot and check that mA stations are calibrated correctly, if not perform Calibration procedures.

Note

1.1

.

Verify that “Configuration Control Sheet” and “Final Test Results” pages from factory have been included with the equipment.

INSTALLATION DATA Enter the following information.

HOSPITAL

INSTALLED AND TESTED BY

DB-1004R4

DATE

1


1.2

MAINTENANCE HISTORY Enter the following information after each data modification in this book or Periodic Maintenance Service.

DATE

2

PERFORMED BY

SERVICE NOTES

DB-1004R4


SECTION 2

DATA TABLES

Table 2-1 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board 3024SW1 POSITION

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

1 2 3 4

Table 2-2 3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board 3024SW2 POSITION 1 2 3 4

Table 2-3 3024SW3 and 3024SW4 - ATP Console CPU Board

Note

DB-1004R4

.

Dip switch 3024SW3 and 3024SW4 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be set in “Off” position.

3


Table 2-4 3000SW2 - HT Controller Board 3000SW2 POSITION

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 2-5 Workstations WORKSTATION PUSH PUSH-BUTTONS BUTTONS (Draw the push-buttons or combinations in the cells)

VALUE ON DISPLAYS kV (Tube)

mAs (Device-WM)

mA (AEC-IC)

ms (kV Tracking) (option)

AVAILABLE AEC AREAS

WS1

WS2

WS3

WS4

WS5

WS6

WS7

WS8

WS9

WS10

4

DB-1004R4


Table 2-6 Jumpers in other Generator Boards GENERATOR BOARDS

JUMPERS POSITION JP1 and JP2

HT CONTROLLER

JP3, JP5 and JP6 JP4

FILAMENT CONTROL

JP1 W1

INTERFACE CONTROL

W2 W3 to W10 JP1, JP2 and JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 Connector J8 configured for RS232 so: JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “A”. JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers position

ATP CONSOLE CPU

Connector J8 configured for RS422 so: JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “B”. JP21 and JP22 do not affect jumpers position JP12 JP13 JP14 JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18 JP19

DB-1004R4

5


Table 2-7 AEC Configuration JUMPERS POSITION AEC Control Board

A3012--_____

JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4

JUMPERS POSITION AEC Adaptation Board

A3263--03

JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8 JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16 JP9 (IC1) JP10 (IC2) JP11 (IC3) JP12 (IC4)

6

DB-1004R4


Table 2-8 Fluoro Configuration OPERATION MODE FIXED RATE PULSED FLUORO

VARIABLE RATE PULSED FLUORO

ABC

JUMPERS IN FLUORO CPU BOARD (A3213-XX)

INSERTED

REMOVED

W1 W2

Always inserted (installed)

JUMPERS IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024-XX) JP4

Always in “B” position -- Camera

JUMPERS POSITION RF Adaptation Board

A3514--_____

JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8, JP9, JP10, JP12, JP13, JP14 JP2 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP11 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP18 JP19 JP20 JP21 JP22 JP23 JP24

DB-1004R4

7


Table 2-9 Extended Memory Locations MEMORY LOCATION

VALUE

MEMORY LOCATION

E01

E17

E02

E18

E03

E19

E04

E20

E05

E21

E06

E22

E07

E23

E08

E24

E09

E25

E10

E26

E11

E27

E12

E28

E13

E29

E14

E30

E15

E31

E16

E32

MEMORY LOCATION (only for Capacitor Discharge Generator)

VALUE

VALUE

E67 E68 E69

8

DB-1004R4


Table 2-10 Rotor Acceleration Time Configuration 3000SW2-2

OPERATION MODE

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

Rotor Speed

Low Speed

High Speed

TUBE-1 ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME AND FILAMENT SETTING TIME

3000SW2-7

3000SW2-8

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

_____ seconds


3000SW2-5 OPEN (OFF)

3000SW2-6

CLOSED (ON)

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

_____ seconds 3000SW2-4

FLUORO ROTOR HOLD-OVER TIME

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

Status: ______

Table 2-11 LV-DRAC Configuration 3243SW1

3243SW2

3243SW3

3243SW4

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

7

8

8

8

8

DB-1004R4

9


Table 2-12 mA Calibration Numbers

TUBE-1 FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT mA A STATION 40

50

80

120

10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 64 (or 63 or 65) 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 640 (or 630 or 650) 800 1000 Note.-- The mA station values depend on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.

10

DB-1004R4


Table 2-12 (Cont.) mA Calibration Numbers

TUBE-2 FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kVp BREAK POINT mA A STATION 40

50

80

120

10 12.5 16 20 25 32 40 50 64 (or 63 or 65) 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 640 (or 630 or 650) 800 1000 Note.-- The mA station values depend on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.

DB-1004R4

11



12

DB-1004R4

Technical Publication CF-1018R3

Configuration HF Series Generators

HF Series Generators Configuration


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0

OCT 30, 2003

1

APR 1, 2005

Documentation upgrade

2

AUG 1, 2005

Anode Stator Configuration

3

OCT 10, 2005


First edition






Note

CF-1018R3

.



TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1

2

3

Page INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

1.1

Configuration and Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

1.1.1

3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

1.1.2


3

1.1.3


4

1.1.4


4

1.1.5

3000SW2 - HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

1.2

Basic Configuration of Generator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

1.3

AEC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

1.4

FLUORO Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

1.5

Generator Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

1.6

Exposure Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

1.7

Workstations Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

2.1

Extended Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

2.2

How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19

2.3

Limit of Maximum kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

X-RAY TUBE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

3.1

X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

3.2

Generators with LF-RAC (Low Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

3.2.1

Stator Voltage and Capacitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

3.2.1.1 3.2.1.2

24

3.2.2

CF-1018R3

Configuration for One or Two Tubes with Standard Stator Configuration for One or Two Tubes with the same Starting Voltage at 110 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1.3 Configuration for Two Tubes with Different Starting Voltage and Capacitor or One Tube with Starting Voltage at 330 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programming of Rotor Acceleration Time, RAD Filament Setting Time, FLUORO Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24 25 27

i


Section

Page 3.3

4

ii

Generators with LV-DRAC (High Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

3.3.1

Anode Stator Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

3.3.2

Programming of RAD Filament Setting Time and FLUORO Filament Hold-over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

3.4

Anode Rotation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

3.5

Focal Spots Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

X-RAY TUBE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35

CF-1018R3


SECTION 1

INITIAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE Configuration provides the initial settings for extended memory and checkout procedures that must be carried out before making X-ray exposures. Functional characteristics of this Generator are defined at the time of installation. Calibration and some configuration data are stored in a non-volatile memory chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board in the Power Cabinet. When the initial setup and checkout has been completed the Generator will be ready for Calibration.

Note

.

Record all the configuration settings in the Data Book.

DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER UNTIL SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER RETAIN A LARGE PORTION OF THEIR CHARGE FOR APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.

The Generator configuration is determined by: •

X-ray tube(s) number, model and use.

•

System requirements (Bucky, Tomo, AEC, ...)

•

Maximum kV, kW.

Specific versions of U24-EPROM on the ATP Console CPU Board and U5 on the HT Controller Board are based on the Generator configuration. (Refer to Illustration 1-1). The system configuration and test switches are: DIP SWITCH LOCATION 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board

System Configuration

3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board

Test

3024SW3 - ATP Console CPU Board

No used for Configuration

3000SW2 - HT Controller Board

CF-1018R3

FUNCTION

System Configuration and Test

1


Illustration 1-1 EPROM and Switch locations

J7

J8

3024SW2 3024SW3 U24

3024SW4

3024SW1

ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD -- A3024

3000SW2 U5

HT CONTROLLER -- A3000

INTERFACE CONTROL -- A3009

POWER SUPPLY

FILAMENT DRIVER A3004 POWER CABINET -- FRONT PANEL

2

CF-1018R3


1.1

CONFIGURATION AND TEST SWITCHES ATP Console Dip Switches must be configured with the Generator turned OFF, and they are read when the Generator is turned ON again.

1.1.1

3024SW1 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD Set dip switch 3024SW1 in accordance with the Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 System Configuration Dip Switch 3024SW1 on the ATP Console CPU Board 3024SW1 POSITION

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

1

60 Hz *1)

50 Hz *1)

2

--

Normal -- Application mode. Exposures are inhibited when Door Interlock Switch is opened.

3

Not used. Set in “OFF” position.

Not used.

4

Not used. Set in “OFF” position.

Not used.

Note.--

1.1.2

*1) This switch is related with the frequency of the Rotor Controller. For Generators with High Speed Starter (LV-DRAC) or Generators Powered through Batteries with Stand-Alone set always SW1-1 to 60 Hz, in the rest of Generators set SW1-1 in accordance with the Power Line Frequency.

3024SW2 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD Set dip switch 3024SW2 verifying that each position is set as Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Test Dip Switch 3024SW2 on the ATP Console CPU Board 3024SW2 POSITION

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

1

Skips reception with the HT Controller. Use only for display purposes, troubleshooting or Demo Consoles when there is no Power Module. Be sure that J3 connector is not plugged to the ATP Console CPU Board.

Normal -- Application mode.

2

Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is not emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.

Tick Sound (button / command acknowledge) is emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.

3

Normal -- Application mode.

Service Mode .

4

kV Log (Renard) Scale Mode for kV variation (kV changes in logarithmic steps) (if available).

kV Lineal Scale Mode for kV variation (Normal mode) (kV changes one by one).

CF-1018R3

3


1.1.3

3024SW3 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD Dip switch 3024SW3 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be set in “Off” position.

1.1.4

3024SW4 - ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD Dip Switch 3024SW4 is not used for configuration but all their switches must be set in “Off” position.

1.1.5

3000SW2 - HT CONTROLLER BOARD HT Controller Dip Switches can be configured while the Generator is ON except Dip Switch 3000SW2-1. Set dip switch 3000SW2 as indicated in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3 Test Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board in the Power Module 3000SW2 POSITION

OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

1

Normal.

Programming of Rotor Acceleration Time, RAD Filament Setting Time, Fluoro Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time *1) *2)

2

Normal.

Bypasses: Filament, Rotor Ready, Error E11. *1) *3)

3

Normal -- Not used.

Not used.

4

Normal -- Digital mA Loop Closed

Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant *1)

5

125 kV *4)

150 kV *4)

6

All Generators except Tube-2 for RAD

Generators with Tube-2 for RAD only.

7

Filament Boosting for Tube--1

No Filament Boosting for Tube--1 *5)

8

Filament Boosting for Tube--2

No Filament Boosting for Tube--2 *5)

Notes.-- *1) Set in Closed (On) position only for Calibration and Testing procedures when indicated in the Service Manual. *2) Note that SW2-1 in Closed (On) position is only set to program the Rotor Acceleration Time, Rad Filament Setting Time, Fluoro Rotor and Filament Hold-over Time, therefore it changes the functions of Switches SW2-2 and SW2-4 to SW2-8. Refer to Section 3. *3) This turns off the filaments so no radiation will be produced during the exposure. WARNING: THE kV OUTPUT OF THE HV TRANSFORMER WILL BE WHATEVER IS SET BY THE CONSOLE. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HV CABLES ARE NOT CONNECTED INTO THE HV TRANSFORMER, FILL COMPLETELY BOTH HV RECEPTACLES WITH HV OIL. *4) Set SW2-5 according to the Generator kV rating (refer to the Generator model and/or specifications). *5) Set to “No Filament Boosting” when using X-ray Tubes with Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6 .

4

CF-1018R3


1.2

BASIC CONFIGURATION OF GENERATOR BOARDS The following Jumpers are factory set or removed to configure the Generator Boards according to the customer order. Check the jumper positions in the Generator Boards.

GENERATOR BOARDS

JUMPERS POSITION JP1 and JP2 in “2”

HT CONTROLLER

FILAMENT CONTROL

JP3, JP5 and JP6 in “2” and JP4 in “1” : for Compact Generators. JP3, JP5 and JP6 in “1” and JP4 in “2” : for Vertical Generators. JP1 in “A” W1 in “2--3”

INTERFACE CONTROL

W2 in “1--2” W3 to W10 in “A” : for positive High Voltage supply for Ion Chamber W3 to W10 in “B” : for negative High Voltage supply for Photomultiplier Tube JP1, JP2 and JP3 in “B” (soldered) JP4 in “B” (Cam-Sync) JP5 in “B” : Standard JP5 in “C” : for R&F / DSI Generators with AEC Control Board A3012--02/05 JP6 in “A” (soldered)

ATP CONSOLE CPU

Connector J8 configured for RS232 so: JP9, JP10 and JP11 in “A”. JP7, JP8, JP21 and JP22 do not matter jumpers position JP12 removed JP13 installed (set) : if AEC Control Board A3012--xx is installed JP13 removed : if AEC Control Board A3012--xx is not installed JP14 installed (soldered) JP15, JP16, JP17 and JP18 removed JP19 in “A” (soldered)

CF-1018R3

5


1.3

AEC CONFIGURATION Configure the following Jumpers on the “AEC Control Board” (located over the “ATP Console CPU Board”) and on the “AEC Adaptation Board” when this option is installed in the Generator Cabinet.

AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--01/02/05) JUMPER

DESCRIPTION

JP1

A B C

FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG

JP2

A B

FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER

JP4

A B

FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER -- AEC FOR ION CHAMBER -- AEC & ATS--DIG

JP3

A B

FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY FOR LOW SENSITIVITY

NOTE:

A3012-05: A3012 05: JP1 JP1-C, C JP2-A JP2 A AND JP4 JP4-B B FOR FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG ATS DIG A3012-02: JP1-A, JP2-A AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA A3012-01: JP1-B,, JP2-B AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER

JP3-A FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH HIGH SENSITIVITY JP3-B FOR AEC WHEN USING ION CHAMBER WITH LOW SENSITIVITY

HIGH SENSITIVITY IS > 2 V / mR (> 0.223 V / μGy) (a.e. Vacutec Ion Chamber) LOW SENSITIVITY IS < 2 V / mR (< 0.223 V / μGy) (refer to Ion Chamber documentation)

AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--06/07/09) JUMPER JP1

A B C

FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER EXTERNAL kV CONTROL

JP1-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA JP1-B FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER JP1-C FOR ABC WITH EXTERNAL kV UP & DOWN CONTROL

JP2

A B



JP3

B

FOR NORMAL OPERATION

JP3-B FOR NORMAL OPERATION

JP4

A


JP4-A FOR NORMAL OPERATION (Only in A3012-06)

NOTE:

6

DESCRIPTION


CF-1018R3


AEC ADAPTATION BOARD (A3263--03) JUMPERS POSITION

ION CHAMBER TYPE

JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8

JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6

JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16

IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4 (Default)

B

B

B

IC1 = IC2 = IC3

B

B

A

IC1 = IC2

B

A

A

IC1 ≠ IC2 ≠ IC3 ≠ IC4

A

A

A

JUMPERS POSITION

ION CHAMBER OUTPUT

1.4

JP9 (IC1)

JP10 (IC2)

JP11 (IC3)

JP12 (IC4)

NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT (Default)

A

A

A

A

OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

B

B

B

B


TP1 -- R11

TP2 -- R8

TP4 -- R2

TP12 -- R5

FLUORO CONFIGURATION Fluoro configuration depends on position of jumpers W1 and W2 in the “Fluoro CPU Board” and jumper JP4 in the “Console CPU Board”, as indicated below:

JUMPERS IN FLUORO CPU BOARD (A3213-XX)

INSERTED

REMOVED

W1

ABC not enable

ABC enable

W2

Always inserted (installed)

JUMPERS IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD (A3024-XX) JP4

CF-1018R3

Always in “B” position -- Camera

7


Also, configure the following Jumpers on the optional “RF Adaptation Board”. RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04) JUMPER

POSITION Set all jumpers

JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8, JP9, JP10, JP12, JP13, JP14

JP2

JP5

JP6

JP7

JP11

JP15

JP16

JP17

JP18

JP19

JP20

JP21

JP22

JP23

JP24

8

Remove all jumpers Set only JP1, JP8 and JP12 Set

FUNCTION +24 VDC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER 230 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER 115 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER Generator +24 VDC for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER

Removed

External supply for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER

A

ZOOM 1 output selected from Generator (--9 IN SEL)

B

ZOOM 1 output selected from Table or external control

A


B


A


B


A

LIH output through a N.O. contact

B

LIH output through a N.C. contact

A

LIH output selected from an external enable signal

B

LIH output selected for Last Image Hold function

A

EXP ON/END output active for only RAD exposure

B

EXP ON/END output active for Fluoro and RAD exposure

A

For EXP ON output active along the RAD exposure

B

For EXP END output active about 50 ms pulse at the end of the RAD exposure

A

For ABC Window adjustment

B

For normal operation

A

Pulsed Fluoro sync. activated with the negative edge of Exp. Sync+

B

Pulsed Fluoro sync. from composite video signal (video in)

C

Pulsed Fluoro sync. activated with the positive edge of Exp. Sync+

A

For ABC OUT signal from composite video signal (video in)

B

For ABC OUT signal from a negative external ABC signal

C

For ABC OUT signal from a positive external ABC signal

A

ABC OUT signal generated from composite video signal or external ABC signal

B

ABC OUT signal coming directly from the Image System

Set Removed Set Removed

ABC OUT signal generated from composite video signal or external ABC signal ABC OUT signal coming directly from the Image System Normal position (composite video signal referenced to the Generator ground) To reduce noise (composite video signal isolate from Generator ground)

A

Normal position (Fluoro order from the Table sent directly to the Generator)

B

For Fluoro order enable (Fluoro order from the Table sent to the Image System)

CF-1018R3


1.5

GENERATOR SERVICE MODE The Generator Service Mode (GSM) program allows the access to the service screens for Reading the Exposure Counters, Configuration and Calibration procedures. Start the GSM program by clicking on the “TechService” icon in the path: “StartMenu / Programs / Tech Service / TechService”. (This is the path by default after installing the program from the CD-Rom). After accessing to the GSM program, a black Information Area appears at the lower right corner of the screen to show some messages related with the process (a.e. “Power Up the Generator”). If after pressing the “Configuration”, “Calibration” or Auto Calibration” buttons, the GSM program prompts an error message: “Please check calibration dip switch and toggle with power off”; it means that these functions are disabled because position of dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the “ATP Console CPU Board” is not in “Service Mode Allowed”. Turn OFF the generator, change the dip switch 3024SW2-3 to Closed (ON) position, turn ON the generator and start the GSM program again.

Illustration 1-2 GSM Menu

CF-1018R3

9


The screens to “Read Exposure Counters”, to enter in “Configuration”, “Manual Calibration” or “Auto Calibration” are displayed after selecting the respective button on the right side. Press again the selected button (in yellow on the right side) to return to the GSM menu. The “Cancel” button can also be used to return to the GSM menu, specially if the others buttons are disable.

Note

.

Whenever the “Configuration” menu is closed (by pressing any of “Configuration” or “Cancel” buttons) a double-beep will sound confirming the storage of the values set for each workstation. During operation of the GSM program the color of the selected buttons changes to yellow when they are selected. Press the “Close” button to exit from the GSM program. Exposure status indicators for “Ready” and “X-ray On” are located on the upper right area of the GSM screens. The “Information Area” displays data related to the service mode, remaining heat units, working mode, errors indicators, etc. When an error code or message is displayed on the GSM program press the “Reset Error” button to reset the error indication.

Illustration 1-3 Status and Error Indicators Workstation Selected

Exposure Indicators

Cancel Button

Button of Menu Selected

Reset Error Button Error Indicator

Information Areas

10

CF-1018R3


1.6

EXPOSURE COUNTERS The Exposure Counters display the number of Rad exposures made with any of the X-ray Tubes and the accumulated Fluoro exposure time (in hours and minutes) made with the Tube-2.

1.

Enter in the GSM program and select the “Read Exposure Counters” button.

2.

This screen shows the Exposure Counters.

3.

Exit from this screen by pressing the “Read Exposure Counters” button or the “Cancel” button again.

Illustration 1-4 Exposure Counters

CF-1018R3

11


1.7

WORKSTATIONS CONFIGURATION This screen is used to view the configuration of the Workstations (Tube, WM, Ion Chamber, etc.) and the AEC Areas selected by default for each Workstation in the system (optional). The workstations can be configured according to the customer preferences or default. If a workstation is configured with the value “Tube -- 0”, its button can not be selected during operation. CUSTOMIZED CONFIGURATION

Note

Note

.

.

This procedure has to be performed always that “ATP Console CPU Board” is replaced by a new one. 1.

Enter in the GSM program and select the “Configuration” button.

2.

Once in Configuration mode, if the Generator has installed the “Fluoro CPU Board” the program has to indicate “RF” on the RAD/RF window. This means that Fluoro functions are enabled. If the Fluoro functions are not enabled (“RF” does not appear) the Fluoro Display and functions will be deactivated after selecting a workstation for Tube-2. In this case, exit, check connection between the Fluoro CPU and ATP Console CPU Board and enter in Configuration again until the “RF” indication appears.

Illustration 1-5 Configuration

12

CF-1018R3


3.

DISPLAY

1st Value

2nd Value

3rd Value

4th Value

Select the first workstation to be configured, by pressing the respective button (only the icon of the selected workstation has different color). The console shows one of the following values:

FUNCTION

VALUE

TUBES

DEVICES -WORKING MODE

ION CHAMBERS

kV TRACKING (OPTIONAL)

DESCRIPTION

0

No-configured workstation

1

Tube-1

2

Tube-2

0 -- Direct

Direct (No Bucky)

1 -- Bucky 1

Bucky-1

2 -- Bucky 2

Bucky-2

3 -- STD Tomo

Standard Tomo *1)

4 -- STD RF

Standard RF (Spot Film Device)

5 -- DSI

Digital RAD and Fluoro *2)

6 -- Cine

Cine *2)

7 -- DSA

DSA *2) 0

No AEC

1

Ion Chamber-1 (IC-1)

2


3


4


5

Photomultiplier (PT-INPUT)

1

Formula-1

2

Formula-2

3

Formula-3

4

Formula-4

5

Formula-5

6

Formula-6

7

Formula-7

8

Formula-8

Notes: -- Some of listed values are not configurable depending on the Generator model . *1) Only when the Tomo is controlled from the Generator. In this case, the workstation has to be configured as Tube “1” or “2”, Device “STD Tomo” and Ion Chamber “0”. If the Tomo is controlled from the Table, the workstation has to be configured as Tube “2”, Device “STD RF” and Ion Chamber “0”. *2) These Devices are only available for Generators provide with interface option for Digital Systems. These workstations has to be configured as Tube “2”.

CF-1018R3

13


Note

.

4.

Set the new value by pressing the corresponding “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons. Value on “KV Tracking” (optional) assigns by default one Formula for “Zero Point” operation mode to the selected RF workstation. Set also the selected AEC Areas by default for each Workstation in the system (optional).

5.

Select the next workstations to be configured and set the respective values of each one.

6.

Exit from configuration mode by pressing the “Configuration” button, then a double-bip will sound confirming the process.

7.

Exposures made from workstations configured with: G

Device “Direct (No Bucky), Bucky-1, Bucky-2 and Standard Tomo” are only enabled with the internal “Preparation” and “Exposure” signals controlled by the Handswitch or Rad Footswitch.

G

Device “Standard RF” and “DSI” are only enabled with the external signals for “Preparation”, “RAD Exposure” and “Fluoro Exposure”. Fluoro can only be made from this Device selection.

G

Device “Infimed: DSI, Cine, DSA” are only enabled with the external “Digital Preparation” and “Exposure” signals connected to Terminal Block 4TS3 of the Generator Cabinet.

1) Optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board” (in the Power Cabinet) is required to configure more than two Buckys or one Tomo Device in the system. For system without the optional “Tomo / Bucky Adaptation Board”, it can only work directly with two Buckys, and the value assigned to them must be “1” and “2” in the second value. 2) TOMO must be always related to Bucky-1. Only one TOMO can be used in the system, so only one of the workstations should be configured with the value “3” in the second value. 3) Optional “AEC Control Board” (connected to the Console CPU Board) is required to work with AEC. Optional “AEC Adaptation Board” is required to configure any no-standard or more than one Ion Chambers in the system.

14

CF-1018R3


DEFAULT CONFIGURATION Default configuration sets some default values to each workstation. It only should be used to re-initialize the workstation configuration when the complete configuration has been lost or it is not possible to select any workstation.

CF-1018R3

1.

Enter in the GSM program and select the “Configuration” button.

2.

Press the “Default Configuration” button.

3.

Exit from configuration mode by pressing the “Configuration” button, then a double-bip will sound confirming the process.

4.

It is recommended to perform a proper configuration of each workstation in the system after a default configuration.

15



16

CF-1018R3


SECTION 2

2.1

EXTENDED MEMORY SETTING

EXTENDED MEMORY LOCATIONS Miscellaneous configuration and calibration data are stored in the Extended Memory Locations. It is recommended to note the values factory stored in each Memory Location. (Refer to Table 2-1)

Note

.

For generators with only one Radiographic X-ray Tube, this tube have to be configured, calibrated and used as Tube-1.

Note

.

For generators with a Fluoroscopic X-ray Tube or DSI (Digital RAD), this tube have to be configured, calibrated and used as Tube-2. For these generators, the value of the E17 Memory Location is not readable as “Tube-2 -- Filament stand-by (Autocalibrated)”.

Note

CF-1018R3

.

Generators with a single X-ray Tube for Fluoroscopy / Spot Film / DSI (Digital RAD) require to store the respective values of the Memory Locations: -- E17: Tube-2 -- Fluoro filament setting. -- E18: Tube-2 -- Fluoro tube type. -- E29 and E31: Tube-2 -- Exposure Time adjustments. -- Other required Memory Locations.

17


Table 2-1 Extended Memory Locations MEMORY LOCATION

FUNCTION

E01

TUBE-1 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable)

E02

TUBE-1 -- RAD tube type

E03

Low Digital mA Loop Closed (from 10 mA to 80 mA)

E04

AEC-1 calibration

E05

High Digital mA Loop Closed (from 100 mA)

E06

kV Loop

E07

Maximum kW (Factory set. Only field changeable to lower value)

E08

AEC-1 tracking

E09

AEC-2 calibration

E10

AEC-2 tracking

E11

Not used.

E12

AEC Density Scale

E13

TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay

E14

Not used.

E15

TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV

E16

Not used.

E17*

VALUE

TUBE-2 -- RAD filament stand-by (Autocalibrated. Not field changeable) TUBE-2 -- FLUORO filament setting

E18

TUBE-2 -- RAD or FLUORO tube type

E19

Maximum FLUORO kV

E20

AEC-3 calibration

E21

Not used.

E22

Not used.

E23

AEC-4 calibration / Photomultiplier AEC calibration (SF camera)

E24

AEC-3 tracking / AEC-4 tracking (equal value for both)

E25

FLUORO mA display calibration at 50 kV

E26


E27


E28

Not used.

E29

TUBE-2 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay

E30

Not used.

E31

TUBE-2 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV

E32

Not used.

* Note.-- For Fluoroscopic use, value in E17 means “Fluoro filament setting” and must be manually set

18

CF-1018R3


2.2

HOW TO ENTER AND STORE DATA IN THE EXTENDED MEMORY The Extended Memory data are entered from the Console when the unit is in service mode. Access to memory locations as indicated below:

Note

1.

Turn the Generator OFF and set the Test dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “On” position to permit the service mode.

2.

Power ON the System and select the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM program.

3.

Select the needed Workstation (WS) using the “Up” and “Down” buttons, then press the “OK” button to enter in calibration mode.

.

In calibration mode, only the kV and mA parameters can be modified, values for Time and mAs are factory programmed.

4.

Increase the mA value beyond the maximum mA position. The mA Display will show the first Extended Memory location (E01), they will continue sequentially as the “Increase mA” button is pressed. The values stored in each location are shown on the “Calibration Value” Display after pressing the “Read” button or after pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons of this panel. Since these buttons are also used to increase or decrease the stored values, one number should be added or subtracted from the reading, to obtain the current stored value.

Note

CF-1018R3

5.

Select the new value by pressing the “Increase” and “Decrease” buttons. Each time these buttons are pressed the value displayed on the calibration panel is increased or decreased one step.

6.

Store the new value by pressing the “Store” button (Check-summ function).

.

If the “Store” button is not pressed after a new value is selected, no modified data will be retained.

7.

Exit from calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button again.

8.

Turn the Generator OFF and set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “Off” position to place the Generator in normal mode.

19


Illustration 2-1 Calibration

Calibration Value Panel

20

CF-1018R3


2.3

LIMIT OF MAXIMUM kW The Maximum kW of the Generator is factory set according to the Generator performance. Generator kW can be limited to a lower value.

Note

Note

CF-1018R3

.

.

This limit can be set to a lower value to match the maximum Generator power to the Line power, due to a high line impedance (refer to Pre-installation document).

1.

Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS) and press the “OK” button.

2.

Select the E07 Memory Location (memory location is shown on the mA Display).

3.

Set the new limit of Maximum kW by pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” calibration buttons and store the value by pressing the “Store” button.

4.

Exit from calibration mode.

Record configuration data for E07 in the Data Book.

21



22

CF-1018R3


SECTION 3

3.1

X-RAY TUBE SELECTION

X-RAY TUBE INSERT PROTECTION CURVES In order to properly select the X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves for the Tubes connected to the Generator, perform the following procedure:

Note

CF-1018R3

.

1.

Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM program. Select one of the workstation (WS) related to the X-ray Tube to be configured. Then press the “OK” button.

2.

Select the respective memory location, E02 for Tube-1 or E18 for Tube-2 (memory location is shown on the mA Display).

3.

Identify in Section 4 “X-ray Tube Data”, the X-ray tube that is being installed and note its tube type number.

4.

Set the tube number by pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” calibration buttons until the correct number is showed on the “Calibration Value” panel.

5.

Store the value by pressing the “Store” button.

6.

Verify that the tube code (ID) shown in the mAs Display is the same of the tube code listed in Section 4 “X-ray Tube Data”. The tube code (ID) can be only read for the selected X-ray Tube after pressing the “Store” button.

7.

If required, repeat this procedure for the other X-ray Tube.

8.


Record configuration data for E02 and E18 in the Data Book.

23


3.2 3.2.1

GENERATORS WITH LF-RAC (LOW SPEED STARTER) STATOR VOLTAGE AND CAPACITOR SELECTION Check that the capacitor value of the Low Speed Starter corresponds to the value recommended by the X-ray Tube manufacturer. If needed replace the capacitor. Also, the Rotor speed must be indicated by the manufacturer. The DC Brake of the Low Speed Starter (LF-RAC) can be removed by desoldering CR6 on the LF-RAC Board (refer to schematic 543020xx). In this case, the Tube will remain coasting after releasing the “Prep” or the “Fluoro” order.

3.2.1.1

CONFIGURATION FOR ONE OR TWO TUBES WITH STANDARD STATOR Voltage and capacitor is factory set to 220 VAC, 30 μF. In all cases, refer to X-ray Tube Product Data.

3.2.1.2

CONFIGURATION FOR ONE OR TWO TUBES WITH THE SAME STARTING VOLTAGE AT 110 VAC When the stator requires a starting voltage of 110 VAC (a.e. X-ray Tube Toshiba E7239 / E7240 / E7242 / E7252 / E7299 / E7813 / E7865) perform the following modifications: •

If the Power Input Transformer 6T2 is for using with power lines up to 240 VAC (part number 50509030), remove the wire labelled as “4” that is connected to Terminal 4 (230 VAC RTR) and connect it to Terminal 3 or 8 (110 VAC).

•

If the Power Input Transformer 6T2 is for using with power lines up to 530 VAC (part number 50509029), remove the wire labelled as “4” that is connected to Terminal 4 (230 VAC RTR) and connect it to Terminal 40 (110 VAC).

•

For X-ray Tube Toshiba E7252 or E7813 (or when it is required) replace also the Fuse F1 (6A) on the LF-RAC Board by another fuse of 10 A. These changes affect to all the Tubes connected to Generator.

24

CF-1018R3


3.2.1.3

CONFIGURATION FOR TWO TUBES WITH DIFFERENT STARTING VOLTAGE AND CAPACITOR OR ONE TUBE WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 330 VAC For Generators equipped with a LF-RAC module for two X-ray Tubes, with possible selection of voltage and capacitor jumpers on the LF-RAC Board, set jumpers according to the respective X-ray Tube(s) as indicated below.

TWO TUBES WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 220 VAC AND 330 VAC OR ONE TUBE WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 330 VAC (A “Kit of 330 VAC” is required with this configuration).

VOLTAGE

TUBE-1

TUBE-2

220 VAC

TB2-T1 with TB1-5 or TB1-6


330 VAC


TB2-T2 with TB1-8 or TB1--9

30 μF



15 μF



CAPACITOR

10C5--1 15uF NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and 10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator

10C5--2 30uF

10R4--1 1 Mohm, 2w

10R4--2 1 Mohm, 2w

10J8 230 VAC RTR

( S1, 2--D2 )

60 VAC RTR 0 VAC RTR

TB1

TB1 1

1 2

KACC K1--1

10RC1

10T3

330V

100 nF 1 KV 10LF2 2

4

1

3

10K1 2

7

TB2

8

T1

9

Tube 1

220V

1 0V

6

TB2

5

T2

4

T2

F1 T 6A

3 47 2w

12 13

TB3

2

3

10

30uF 11

14

KCT K2--3

Tube 2

KCT K2--1

15 16

TB3 T1 Tube 1

LF--RAC BOARD 10A1

Tube 2

T1/T2 COMM (to 10TS2)

CF-1018R3

25


TWO TUBES WITH STARTING VOLTAGE AT 220 VAC AND 110 VAC (A “Kit of 110 VAC” is required with this configuration).

VOLTAGE

TUBE-1

TUBE-2

220 VAC



150 VAC


TB2-T2 with TB1-8 or TB1--9

30 μF



15 μF



CAPACITOR

10C5--1 15uF 10C5--2 30uF

10R4--1 1 Mohm, 2w

10R4--2 1 Mohm, 2w

10J8 230 VAC RTR

( S1, 2--D2 )

60 VAC RTR 0 VAC RTR

TB1

TB1 1

1 2

KACC K1--1

10RC1

10T3

220V

100 nF 1 KV 10LF2 2

4

1

3

10K1 2

7

TB2

8

T1

9

Tube 1

150 V

1 0V

6

TB2

5

T2

4

12 13

T2

F1 T 6A

3 47 2w

30uF 11

TB3

2

3

10

14

KCT K2--3

Tube 2

KCT K2--1

15 16

TB3 T1 Tube 1

LF--RAC BOARD 10A1

Tube 2

T1/T2 COMM (to 10TS2)

26

CF-1018R3


3.2.2

PROGRAMMING OF ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME, RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME, FLUORO ROTOR AND FILAMENT HOLD-OVER TIME

Rotor Acceleration Time is determined by the X-ray Tube and Rotor characteristics and it must be considered when the Generator is about to be configured. X-ray Tube could be permanently damaged unless the required RPM are reached before an exposure. (Refer to technical information of the X-ray Tube).

Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program: •

Rotor Acceleration Time. That depends on stator voltage, stator frequency, stator type, quality of X-ray tube bearings, and X-ray tube anode size. A reed tachometer or a stroboscope can be used to determine the anode RPM. Be sure that the Rotor Acceleration Times meet all requirements for anticipated customer applications. This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7 seconds. After this time the Rotor is hold running in maintaining mode as long as “Prep” is active.

Note

•

Rad Filament Setting Time. This parameter has the same configuration value than the Rotor Acceleration Time. Sometimes, if it is required to increase the Rad Filament Setting Time to the next value, configure the respective switches again. This adjustment avoids Error-12.

•

Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time. This value can be programmed to run for 1 minute or not at all, after releasing the Fluoro Pedal.

.

The Rotor Acceleration Time and Rad Filament Setting Time is factory set to 1.8 seconds. The Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time is factory set to 1 minute. Maintain this value when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube documentation.

1.

Note

CF-1018R3

.

Turn the Generator OFF and note current settings of the dip switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board.

Configuration of these times are only allowed when dip switch 3000SW2-1 is in “Closed” (On) position after power the Generator OFF and back ON again.

27


2.

3.

Set dip switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in order to enable the selection of times with the Low Speed Starter. Dip switch3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator powered OFF. 3000SW2-1 (selection enable)

3000SW2-2 (Low Speed Starter)

ON

OFF

Configure the Rotor and Filament Times by setting the dip switches 3000SW2-4 through 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Low Speed: Configuration of Rotor and Filament Times 3000SW2-7


OPEN (OFF)

3000SW2-8

CLOSED (ON)

0.8 seconds

OPEN (OFF)

-

1.2 seconds

-

-

-

1.8 seconds

-

2.7 seconds

-

-

3000SW2-5


OPEN (OFF)

3000SW2-6

CLOSED (ON)

0.8 seconds

OPEN (OFF)

-

-

1.8 seconds

-

2.7 seconds

-

FLUORO ROTOR AND FILAMENT HOLD-OVER HOLD OVER TIME


After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, the Rotor stops and the Filament Current goes back to stand-by. After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, 1 minutes passes before the Rotor stops and the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.

28

CLOSED (ON)

-

1.2 seconds

Note

CLOSED (ON)

.

CLOSED (ON) -

-

Record the switch configuration in the Data Book. 4.

To validate previous configuration, turn the Generator ON, wait until Error--01 (E01) appears on the Console and turn the Generator OFF.

5.

Set dip switch 3000SW2 to the original settings as noted in step-1. (Refer to Section 1.1.5 for the normal settings of Dip Switch 3000SW2).

CF-1018R3


3.3

3.3.1

GENERATORS WITH LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)

ANODE STATOR SELECTION For Generators with High Speed Starter, configure NOW the X-ray Tube Family (anode stator + insert) by setting the respective dip switches 3243SW1 (pos. 4 to 8) and / or 3243SW2 (pos. 4 to 8) on the Control DRAC Board. (Refer to “LV-DRAC - Digital Rotating Anode Controller” document). Configuration of these dip switches automatically determines the appropriate Starting and Running Stator Voltage and Rotor Acceleration Time of the selected Tube Family.

3.3.2

PROGRAMMING OF RAD FILAMENT SETTING TIME AND FLUORO FILAMENT HOLD-OVER TIME

Note

.

With High Speed operation: -- Rotor Acceleration Time is related to the X-ray Tube Family configured on the Control DRAC Board (LV-DRAC). -- Fluoro and Spot Film Rotor Hold-over Times are configured on the Control DRAC Board (LV-DRAC). -- Rad Filament Setting Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time are configured with dip switch 3000SW2 per this instruction.

CF-1018R3

29


Dip Switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board is used to program: •

Rad Filament Setting Time. This value is programmable from 0.8 to 2.7 seconds. It can be initially set as the same value assigned for the Rotor Acceleration Time (refer to technical information of the X-ray Tube) Sometimes, if it is required to increase the Rad Filament Setting Time to the next value, configure the respective switches again. This adjustment avoids Error-12.

•

Note

.

The Rad Filament Setting Time is factory set to 1.8 seconds. The Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time is factory set to 1 minute. Maintain this value when it is unknown or not provided with the X-ray Tube documentation.

1.

Note

.

Turn the Generator OFF and note current settings of the dip switch 3000SW2 on the HT Controller Board.

Configuration of these times are only allowed when dip switch 3000SW2-1 is in “Closed” (On) position after power the Generator OFF and back ON again.

2.

30

Fluoro Rotor Hold-over Time and Fluoro Filament Hold-over Time. This value can be programmed to run for 1 minute or not at all, after releasing the Fluoro Pedal.

Set dip switches 3000SW2-1 and 3000SW2-2 as indicated below, in order to enable the selection of times with the High Speed Starter. Dip switch3000SW2-1 has to be switched ONLY with the Generator powered OFF. 3000SW2-1 (selection enable)

3000SW2-2 (High Speed Starter)

ON

ON

CF-1018R3


3.

Configure the Filament Setting Times by setting the dip switches 3000SW2-4 through 3000SW2-8 per Table 3-2. The Filament Setting Time should be configured in accordance to Rotor Acceleration Time of the X-ray Tube.

Table 3-2 High Speed: Configuration of Filament Setting Time 3000SW2-7

TUBE-1 FILAMENT SETTING TIME

OPEN (OFF)

3000SW2-8

CLOSED (ON)

0.8 seconds

OPEN (OFF)

-

1.2 seconds

-

-

-

1.8 seconds

-

2.7 seconds

-

-

3000SW2-5

TUBE-2 FILAMENT SETTING TIME

OPEN (OFF)

3000SW2-6

CLOSED (ON)

0.8 seconds

OPEN (OFF)

-

-

1.8 seconds

-

2.7 seconds

-

FLUORO FILAMENT HOLD-OVER HOLD OVER TIME


After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, the Filament Current goes back to stand-by. After releasing the Fluoro Pedal, 1 minutes passes before the Filament Current goes back to stand-by.

CF-1018R3

CLOSED (ON)

-

1.2 seconds

Note

CLOSED (ON)

.

CLOSED (ON) -

-

Record the switch configuration in the Data Book.

4.

To validate previous configuration, turn the Generator ON, wait until Error--01 (E01) appears on the Console and turn the Generator OFF.

5.

Set dip switch 3000SW2 to the original settings as noted in step-1. (Refer to Section 1.1.5 for the normal settings of Dip Switch 3000SW2).

31


3.4

ANODE ROTATION TEST Perform the following tests for each X-ray Tube in the installation, checking the low and high speed when it is required.

Note

.

Two people are needed for these tests, one at the Console and the service engineer looking at the anode of the X-ray Tube. These tests also can be done by hearing the sound of the anode rotating.

NEVER MAKE EXPOSURES DURING THE TESTS, THE PERSON CLOSE TO THE X-RAY TUBE WILL BE EXPOSED.

1.

With the switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “On” position (service mode), turn the Console ON and select the corresponding X-ray Tube.

2.

Select a low value for kVp and mAs for checking the Anode Rotation at Low Speed.

3.

Press the “Prep” push-button and visually check that the Tube anode rotates in the proper way. (Refer to the X-ray Tube documentation).

4.

Hold pressed the “Prep” push-button and check that the rotation speed of the Tube anode is in compliance with the X-ray Tube specifications. For this test is recommended to turn off the Tube filaments (switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller in “On” position) and use a stroboscope to measure the anode speed.

32

5.

Release the “Prep” push-button.

6.

For Generators with LV-DRAC, select a high value for kVp and mAs for checking the Anode Rotation at High Speed. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5.

7.

If required for the second Tube, repeat this procedure.

CF-1018R3


3.5

FOCAL SPOTS CONFIGURATION This configuration determines which mA station will be the smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot. It is possible to configure all the mA stations for the Small Focal Spot or for the Large Focal Spot. The smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot must be selected according to the Tube ratings for the Small Filament and the customer preference.

IF THE mA STATION FOR FOCAL SPOT CHANGE IS NOT CONFIGURED ACCORDING TO THE X-RAY TUBE RATINGS, THE TUBE FILAMENTS MAY BE PERMANENTLY DAMAGED.

Note

1.

With the generator OFF, set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “On” position to permit the service mode.

2.

Power ON the System. Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS) of the corresponding X-ray Tube and press the “OK” button.

3.

Select the smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot using the “Increase” or “Decrease” mA buttons. When is required to configure all mA stations for the Small Focal Spot, select “E01” Memory Location.

.

Default value is factory set at 200 mA except when using X-ray Tubes with Small Focal Spot smaller than 0.6 .

4.

Press the “Toggle” button to store the select mA station and then press the “Confirm” or “Dismiss” buttons to confirm or cancel the process. When it is confirmed, the ATP Console CPU Board emits a “double-beep”.

IF THE FOCAL SPOT SWITCH-OVER POINT IS CHANGED AFTER mA CALIBRATION, THE mA STATIONS AFFECTED MUST BE RE-CALIBRATED.

5.

CF-1018R3


33


Perform the following test (it is not mandatory).

Note

.

The test described only applies to RAD Tubes. In case of a R&F Tube (Tube-2) both filament are always ON (lit). Select a “Direct” workstation and a mA station for the Small Filament. Press “Prep” for RAD and observe through the X-ray Tube window that the Small Filament lights more than the Large Filament.

1.

Select the highest mA station for the Small Focal Spot. Verify that effectively the Small Filament is ON (lighted) and the Large Filament is OFF. Observe filaments through the X-ray tube window.

2.

Select the lowest mA station for the Large Focal Spot. Verify that effectively the Large Filament is ON (lighted) and the Small Filament is OFF. Observe filaments through the X-ray tube window.

3.

If required for the second tube, repeat this procedure.

Illustration 3-1 Focal Spots Configuration

34

CF-1018R3


SECTION 4

X-RAY TUBE DATA The following table lists several common X-ray tubes and their corresponding number. If a specific tube is not listed, tube specifications are given to enable you chose a similar tube type. If none of the listed tubes are satisfactory, contact your generator supplier to obtain special software.

Table 4-1 X-ray Tube Numbers TUBE NUMBER

TUBE CODE

001

139

002

POWER RATINGS

FOCAL SPOT

LS (kW)

HS (kW)

TOSHIBA E7239X

1.0 / 2.0

22 / 45

--

133

201

TOSHIBA E7240X

0.6 / 1.2

15 / 30

--

140

003

140

TOSHIBA E7242X

0.6 / 1.5

18 / 49

--

187

004

090

TOSHIBA E7252X

0.6 / 1.2

15 / 42

26 / 73

300

005

377

TOSHIBA E7254FX

0.6 / 1.2

25 / 66

39 / 100

400

006

274

TOSHIBA E7255FX

0.6 / 1.2

23 / 60

39 / 101

300

007

310

TOSHIBA E7843X

0.6 / 1.2

22 / 49

--

150

008

344

TOSHIBA E7865X

0.3 / 1.0

3 / 40

--

140

009

351

TOSHIBA E7100X

0.6 / 1.2

24 / 59

40 / 100

300

010

260

IAE RTM 101 HS

0.6 / 1.2

22 / 55

37 / 99

400

011

273

IAE RTM 101 HS

0.6 / 1.5

24 / 76

40 / 136

400

012

233

VARIAN RAD 8

1.0 / 2.0

25 / 47

--

150

013

244

VARIAN RAD 14

0.6 / 1.2

16 / 44

27 / 72

300

014

161

VARIAN RAD 21

0.6 / 1.2

21 / 64

36 / 100

300

015

265

VARIAN RAD 60

0.6 / 1.2

26 / 67

39 / 100

400

016

238

VARIAN RAD 74

0.6 / 1.5

20 / 52

--

200

017

252

VARIAN RAD 92

0.6 / 1.2

26 / 62

40 / 99

600

018

092

VARIAN A-192

0.6 / 1.2

25 / 63

40 / 96

300

019

309

VARIAN A196

0.6 / 1.0

20 / 47

32 / 72

350

020

094

VARIAN A-292

0.6 / 1.2

25 / 62

39 / 96

400

021

208

VARIAN G 292

0.6 / 1.2

25 / 63

39 / 95

600

022

051

GE-CGR MN 640

1.0 / 1.8

23 / 46

--

150

023

064

GE MAXIRAY-75

0.6 / 1.5

12 / 37

21 / 62

300

024

062

GE MAXIRAY-100

0.6 / 1.25

18 / 55

31 / 100

350

025

261

SIEMENS DR 154/30/50

1.2 / 1.8

31 / 53

--

200

MODEL

(ID)

KHU

026 027 Note .-- Power Ratings are for 60 Hz. To calculate Power Ratings for 50 Hz multiply the values by 0.91

TB47



36

CF-1018R3

Technical Publication DR-1004R8

LV-DRAC Low Voltage - Digital Rotating Anode Controller HF Series Generators

HF Series Generators LV-DRAC


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

4

SEP 15, 2005

Tube selection (V10Rx)

5

JUL 26, 2006

New Tubes in Table-2

6

MAR 1, 2007

New Tubes in Table-2 (soft V10R2.04)

7

MAY 16, 2007


8

OCT 16, 2007



ADVISORY SYMBOLS The following advisory symbols will be used throughout this manual. Their application and meaning are described below. DANGERS ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED WILL CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. ADVISE OF CONDITIONS OR SITUATIONS THAT IF NOT HEEDED OR AVOIDED COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, OR CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE OF EQUIPMENT OR DATA. Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could cause personal injury or damage to equipment or data.

Note

DR-1004R8

.



TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1

2

Page CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

1.1

LV-DRAC Status Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

1.2

Self-running Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

DR-1004R8

i


ii

DR-1004R8


SECTION 1 Note

.

CONFIGURATION This document ONLY applies to High Speed Generators supplied with the LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotating Anode Controller). The LV-DRAC is a High Speed Rotor Controller located on the Generator Cabinet. Its configuration is made through dip switches 3243SW1 to 3243SW4 on the Control DRAC Board. BEFORE MANIPULATING THE LV-DRAC, MAKE SURE THAT THE INPUT LINE IS DISCONNECTED AND THE CAPACITOR BANK IS PROPERLY DISCHARGED. WAIT UNTIL LEDS DL7 AND DL8 ON THE CONTROL DRAC BOARD ARE OFF. The Function of these switches is the following: 3243SW1-x

FUNCTION

1 2

MINIMUM TIME FOR READY ((DELAY))

3 4 5 6

TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-1 (Also refer to switch position 3243SW3-5)

7 8

3243SW2-x

FUNCTION

1 2

FLUORO HOLD-OVER TIME

3 4 5 6

TUBE TYPE SELECTION FOR TUBE-2 (Also refer to switch position 3243SW4-5)

7 8

DR-1004R8

1


3243SW3-x

FUNCTION

1

LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE

2

NOT USED*

3

SPOT FILM HIGH SPEED START

4

NOT USED*

5

ON =

WHEN THE TUBE CONFIGURED AS TUBE-1 IS LISTED ON TUBE TABLE-1

OFF =


6 7

NOT USED*

8 * Note: Set switches not used in “ON” position.

3243SW4-x

FUNCTION

1 2 3

SPOT FILM HOLD TIME

4

5

6

ON =


OFF =


ON = SELF RUNNING ENABLED (Refer to section 1.2) OFF = SELF RUNNING DISABLED (Refer to section 1.2)

7

PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS

8

DC BRAKE

* Note: Set switches not used in “ON” position.

Note

2

.

Set dip switches in accordance with the following tables.

DR-1004R8


TUBE SELECTION -- TUBE TABLE-1 (Switch 3243SW3-5 = ON for Tube-1 )

P Pos

TUBE FAMILY (Stator - ∅ Anode)

(Switch 3243SW4-5 = ON for Tube-2)

3243SW1-x (TUBE-1)

3243SW2-x (TUBE-2)

4

5

6

7

8

4

5

6

7

8

0

GE MAXIRAY 75

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

GE MAXIRAY 100

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

2

VARIAN G-1582

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

3

EUREKA RAD-XX (with Insert 3”) VARIAN RAD-XX (with Insert 3”) / A132

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

4

EUREKA RAD-XX (with Insert 4”) VARIAN RAD-XX (with Insert 4”) / A256 / A282 / A292 TOSHIBA 7254X / 7255X

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

5

CGR STATORIX M50

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

6

SIEMENS 100 L BIANGULIX SIEMENS 100 L OPTILIX

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

7

PHILIPS SUPEROTALIX

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

8

DUNLEE PX-1302

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

9

CGR STATORIX 260 / RSN 742

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

10

CGR STATORIX 550 / RSN 722 / MSN 722 IAE RTC 600

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

11

SIEMENS 100 G

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

12

SIEMENS RH 150/100

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

13

COMET DO-10 (with Insert 4”)

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

14

COMET DO-9 (with Insert 4”)

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

15

CGR STATORIX 240

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

16

PICKER PX-307

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

17

HANGZHOU XD-52-30, 50/150

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

18

DUNLEE PX-1312

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

19

DUNLEE PX-1456 / PX-1436 / PX-1400 (Stator Q)

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

20

COMET DX-1000

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

21

COMET DX-81 / COMET XSTAR-14

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

22

PHILIPS ROTALIX 350/351

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

23

COMET MOS-50 (MAMMO)

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

24

VARIAN B110 / B112 / B115

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

25

VARIAN B160 / B165

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

26

TOSHIBA E7252 (stator XS-AL)

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

27

COMET DX 700 HS

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

28

VARIAN B130 + A192 / A196 / A197

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

29

VARIAN G 1592

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

30

PICKER PX400P + PX457P

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

31

JUGORENDGEN RX 150/30--50

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

DR-1004R8

3


TUBE SELECTION -- TUBE TABLE-2 (Switch 3243SW3-5 = OFF for Tube-1 )

Pos

TUBE FAMILY (Stator - ∅ Anode)

3243SW1-x (TUBE-1)

3243SW2-x (TUBE-2)

4

5

6

7

8

4

5

6

7

8

0

VARIAN GS-20711 + Housing B220H (Stator R)

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

SIEMENS 100 L--W

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

2

SIEMENS SV 125/15/82

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

3

IAE RTM90+ Housing C55

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

4

IAE RTM101HS + Housing C100 IAE RTM102HS + Housing C100

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

5

DUNLEE DA 1036 -- DU 404

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

6

DUNLEE DA 1094 -- DU 694

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

7

DUNLEE DR 1825 (High Impedance Stator) DUNLEE DR 1817 (High Impedance Stator)

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

8

CGR STATORIX 240, MSN 740, MSN 742

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

9

IAE RTC 700 HS + Housing C52 SUPER

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

10

VARIAN GS 30711

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

11

VARIAN BI 130+G292 / G294

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

12

IAE RTM102HS + Housing C52S

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

13

IAE RTC1000HS + Housing C52S

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

14

TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7100X

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

15

DUNLEE DA 1083 / PX 1483 -- DU 404 / DA 10 (Stator C)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

16

VARIAN A277 / A278 + Housing B150H (Stator R)

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

17

VARIAN G1092 + Housing B160 / B165 (Stator R)

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

18

DUNLEE PX1473Q -- DU 604

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

19

TOSHIBA E7260DX

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

20

VARIAN HE100 + Housing B180 / B185 (Stator R)

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

21

IAE RTC 137 + Housing CT 180

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

22

VARIAN A102 + Housing B100

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

23

IAE X40 + Housing C352 (only Low Speed) IAE RTM78HS + Housing C352

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

24 25

TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7867X / E7869X

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

26

TOSHIBA ROTANODE E7240X

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

27 28

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

30

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

31

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

29

4

(Switch 3243SW4-5 = OFF for Tube-2)

TOSHIBA E7252X (Stator XS--R)

DR-1004R8


MINIMUM TIME FOR READY (DELAY) 3243SW1-x

MINIMUM TIME (SECONDS)

1

2

3

0*

ON

ON

ON

0.6

OFF

ON

ON

0.8

ON

OFF

ON

1.0

OFF

OFF

ON

1.2

ON

ON

OFF

1.5

OFF

ON

OFF

2.0

ON

OFF

OFF

3.0

OFF

OFF

OFF

* Note: It is recommended to set these switches at “0 seconds”.

FLUORO HOLD TIME

DR-1004R8

3243SW2-x

FLUORO HOLD TIME (SECONDS)

1

2

3

0

ON

ON

ON

10

OFF

ON

ON

20

ON

OFF

ON

30

OFF

OFF

ON

40

ON

ON

OFF

60

OFF

ON

OFF

90

ON

OFF

OFF

120

OFF

OFF

OFF

5


SPOT FILM HOLD TIME 3243SW4-x

SPOT FILM HOLD TIME

SECONDS

MINUTES

1

2

3

4

0

ON

ON

ON

ON

5

OFF

ON

ON

ON

10

ON

OFF

ON

ON

15

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

20

ON

ON

OFF

ON

30

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

45

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

60

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

2

ON

ON

ON

OFF

5

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

10

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

15

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

20

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

25

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

30

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

40

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

SPOT FILM HIGH SPEED START

6

SPOT FILM START MODE

3243SW3-3

SPOT FILM ALWAYS STARTS IN HIGH SPEED (10000 RPM)

ON

SPOT FILM STARTS AT REQUIRED SPEED

OFF

DR-1004R8


LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE LOW SPEED ROTATION BRAKE MODE (3300 RPM TO 0 RPM)

3243SW3-1

INHIBITED

ON

ACTIVATED

OFF

DC BRAKE (FOR LOW AND HIGH SPEED) DC BRAKE

3243SW4-8

ACTIVATED

ON

INHIBITED

OFF

PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS PROTECTIONS -- ERRORS

3243SW4-7

INHIBITED (LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is always illuminated)

ON

ACTIVATED (Normal Operation mode) (LED DL1 on the Control DRAC Board is non-illuminated indicating that the DRAC is working properly).

OFF

Note: The Error Codes are shown on the Console Display preceded by the letter “E” (a.e. E51) (For Error Codes refer to the Troubleshooting document).

WHEN SWITCH 3243SW4-7 IS IN THE “ON” POSITION, THE ERROR PROTECTIONS OF THE LV-DRAC ARE INHIBITED.

DR-1004R8

7


1.1

LV-DRAC STATUS DIAGRAM

CHANGE OF TUBE

ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM

ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM

STAND-BY

RUNNING AT 3300 RPM

RUNNING AT 10000 RPM

BRAKING FROM 3300 RPM

1.2

BRAKING FROM 10000 RPM

SELF-RUNNING MODE

SELF-RUNNING MODE The continuous starting and braking of the anode produces an overheating in the X-ray Tube Stator (a.e. during calibration procedure). The “Self-running mode” avoids this overheating. In the “Self-running mode” (switch 3243SW4-6 in the “ON” position), the anode remains running for approximately 1 minute when rotates at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm. The LV-DRAC enters in the “Self-running mode” when “Preparation” is selected three consecutive times only from the Console buttons or Handswitch, and the time between two of the consecutive accelerations is shorter than 30 seconds (refer to illustration below).

PREPARATION SIGNALS t < 30 s

t < 30 s

t < 30 s

t > 30 s

t < 30 s

t < 30 s

t < tsr

ANODE ROTATION tsr

tsr

Self-running mode

Self-running mode

tsr (time for self-running mode) = approx. 1 minute at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm.

8

DR-1004R8


SECTION 2

Sch. No.

SCHEMATICS

Scheme LV-DRAC MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM

A3243--04

CONTROL DRAC PCB

A3240--05

INTERFACE DRAC PCB

A3109--01

CLAMPING PCB

DR-1004R8

9



10

DR-1004R8

LV-DRAC MODULE INTERFACE CONTROL DRAC PCB

HV INVERTER MODULE

PTR1 3PH - IGBT INVERTERS

U2

F3 INPUT RECTIFIER PCB

Filter

DC BUS

M

Ferrites

C

A

240 VAC SW

LV DC Power Supply

(C) COMM

Acc

Run Com

J1

U16

Control Drac Power Supply

OUTPUT

LOGIC CONTROL

CONTROL

U11 A -- D CURRENT LIMIT

Contactors Acceleration / Running Voltage

U15 (ADC) J3

I AUX I MAIN

D A

OC DRIVER

OUTPUT COMMANDS

(A) AUX

(M) MAIN

F4

Ribbon Cable

MAINS

U3

MAIN / AUX TRANSFORMERS

AC / DC CONVERTERS U4B, C & D

DC Brake

U1C, D & A

I COMMON

U12A, B & U1B

Tube Selection

OP1-- OP2 OPTO COUPLERS

U17

Common

μC

Main / Aux

Stator Tube 1

RL2 READY

ERROR DRAC

Serial Link

SW1 to SW4

DL2

CONTROL DRAC PCB

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SWITCHES

Open Collector Driver

LV-DRAC Module Block Diagram

Common Main / Aux

Stator Tube 2

F AR1

E

SW1

4

100nF 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19

CS3

AR2

8

SW2

3

1 19

2

8 X 10K

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

8

1 19

1

1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G

PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0

U17 87C54 +5 VDC 31 C43 33 pF

19

X1 12MHz

18

EA/VP X1 X2

9 RESET 29 PSEN 30 ALE/P

RSTuP ALE

U18 HCT244 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A0 A1 A2 RAW ENuP AUTO RD WR R86

+5 VDC

+15 VDC

P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 VSS 20

10K2

1 19

1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G

U19 HCT244 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

C22

6

2K21

18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3


39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 P3.6 P3.7

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

P11

P12

PWM PWMC C1 C2 MODP1 MODP2 MODA1 MODA2

P21

P22

T2 T3 ST HS FL SF SPARE 1 SPARE 2

Q9 2N4403

R112 1K5

2K21

R68 475

VS2

7 U10A TC4426

A22

C

CN 04/135

F. GARCIA

07/04/05

B

CN 04/135

F. GARCIA

16/07/04

A

CN 02/174

F. GARCIA

07/11/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

5 4

TF2 C68 220nF

6

7 U7A TC4426

1

6 5

TP10

4

TF6 C64 220nF

1

6 5

TP7 3

D58 R123 BAT49 1K D60 BAT49 D59 BAT49 D61 BAT49


4

TF3 C67 220nF


C14 100nF 7 U8A TC4426

1

5 3

3 U8B TC4426

4

TF4 C66 220nF


C11 100nF 6

7 U5A TC4426

1

6 5

TP5 3

3 U5B TC4426

4

TF1 C69 220nF

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

10/10/97

REVISED

A. DIAZ

10/10/97


SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 1/3

3

R29 33.2

R30 2K21

D21 BAT49

4

4

C59 10uF D10 1N5819 D63 1N4148 D62 1N4148

D11 BAT49

Q2 BC640

R122 1K

9

R23 33.2

R24 2K21

D12 BAT49

10

C62 10uF D22 1N5819 D39 1N4148 D38 1N4148

D23 BAT49

Q6 BC640

R114 1K

R32 2K21

1

R31 33.2

3

D24 BAT49

2

C58 10uF D13 1N5819 D57 1N4148 D56 1N4148

R120 1K

D14 BAT49

Q3 BC640

7

R25 33.2

R26 2K21

D15 BAT49

8

C61 10uF D16 1N5819 D51 1N4148 D50 1N4148

R118 1K

D17 BAT49

2

Q4 BC640 R28 2K21

5

R27 33.2 D18 BAT49

6

C60 10uF Q16 BC640

5

4

R116 1K

Q13 BC640 6

TP8

5

4

D44 1N4148

PTR1

D20 BAT49

Q5 BC640

Q14 BC640

5

6

D45 1N4148

Q11 BC640

3

3 U7B TC4426

2

6

TP6

D19 1N5819

Q15 BC640

C13 100nF

4

2

1

5 3 U10B TC4426

VS2 A21

R17 1K5

DZ2 12V

D

6

VS1 A11

TF5 C65 220nF

C16 100nF

4

2

4

3

3 U6B TC4426

2

5

TP9

5

4

VS2

A12

VS1

DZ3 12V

GND 10 E


P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7

R2 R111 475

7 U6A TC4426

VS1

+15 VDC

Q10 2N4403

R113 20 VCC

2

6


C12 100nF

VS2 C21

1

3

3 U9B TC4426

A Q12 BC640

5

10 uF

40 VCC

C44 33 pF

C40

2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17

F

18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3

GND 10

100nF

CS0

1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

7 U9A TC4426

4

C47

U14 HCT244

GND 10

20 VCC

C12


+5 VDC

X 10K

+5 VDC

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

20 VCC

6

+5 VDC

+5 VDC

C39

2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17

AR4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1G 2G

100nF

CS1

SW4

1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4

2

AR6 8 X 4K7

+5 VDC

+5 VDC

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

C11


C30

2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17

AR3

1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3

GND 10

100nF 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CS2

SW3

1G 2G

B C15 100nF

VS1

U13 HCT244

+5 VDC

X 10K

+5 VDC

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4

20 VCC

C

PD ( 0......7 )

C29

+5 VDC

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D

+5 VDC

8 X 10K

D7 1N5819 D69 1N4148

D68 1N4148

R124 1K

D8 BAT49

Q1 BC640 R22 2K21

11

R21 33.2 D9 BAT49

12

1

C63 10uF DWG:

A3243--04 C

B

A

CONTROL DRAC

REV

F

V

4

E

P+

COM SHL

2

1

V--

R37

R33

150K--2w

150K--2w

DL7 HLMP1700

DL8 HLMP1700

C19

C17

100 uF 450V

100 uF 450V

R34

R35

R36

R75

1M

1M

1M

1M

604K

R40

R39

R38

R76

R64

1M

1M

1M

1M

D26

D25

U12C LF347

R65 9

--

13 R67

8

10 +

--

14

12 + C31 100nF

U2 CSNH151 100nF 3

1--7 J1 1

V+

8--14

C4

221K R8

R7

R10

R4

12K1

12K1

12K1

12K1

R9 100

9

--

8

13 -D3 1N4148

2 14

12 +

10 + D2 1N4148

U1C LF347

--15 VDC

R3

--

D32 1N4148

221K U1D LF347

C1 1uF

2

J1 4

AUX

1--7

R12

OP C7

R14

12K1 R11 100

R15

12K1 13

--

12K1 14

D5 1N4148

12 +

100nF

D4 1N4148

U4D LF347

--15 VDC

R19 12K1 9

--

6 8

10 +

R16

--

U4C LF347

R13

C35 100nF

R5 10K2

7

5 +

3 R53 12K1

R18

R54 12K1

--

1

+

3

7

8

10

12

N -F

E

+

R59 221K

7

C24 1uF

U12B LF347

2

C8 C3 +15 VDC

+15 VDC 100nF

100nF 2

4 U1 LF347

4 -U4 3 + LF347 11

11 C26

--15 VDC

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

10/10/97

REVISED

A. DIAZ

10/10/97

W

11

5

--

C2

1

C9

--15 VCD

--15 VDC 100nF

1

100nF

6

V

9

6

D71 1N4148

4 U12 LF347 11

I. AUX LIMIT

5

D70 1N4148

100nF

I. PRINC LIMIT

4

U

5

R58 12K1

C28

SKM 40GD 123D

2

+ U1B

C34 100nF

+15 VDC

PTR1

1

D72 1N4148

R62 10K2

6

R56 12K1

100nF 1

U12A LF347

--

7

R57 12K1

R55 12K1

D6 1N4148

1K5 D33 1N4148 R20 10K2

C10 1uF

R61 1K5

C25 100nF

3

D73 1N4148

1K5

12K1

P+

TP36

+5 VDC

U4B LF347

221K

R60 221K +5 VDC

2

221K

TP3

CS4 RD WR

+5 VDC C27 100nF

4


7

R89

100nF

V--

10

I. AUX TP16

C6

V+

6

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 9 2 1 19 18

R1

1

+15 VDC

8--14

5

D1 1N4148

12K1

U3 CSNH151

C36 100nF

+5 VDC

U1A LF347

3 +

R6

W

4

PD ( 0......7 )

20 10 uF VCC DB0 CH1 DB1 CH2 DB2 CH3 DB3 DB4 CH4 DB5 DB6 VREF DB7 CS RD WR INT GND

R88

100nF

PTR1

3

I. PRINC TP17

1V<>8.26A TP1

OP

V--

R74

8

--15 VDC C5

U15 ADC0844

R72 22K1

+15 VDC

U

C37

D29 1N4148

1K5 D31 1N4148 R73 10K2

604K

604K

+5 VDC

+5 VDC

U12D LF347

22K1

D27

100nF

PTR1

PRIN

604K

R66 D28

A

R63

4 X 1N4148

470 nF--1000V

J2 V+

B VBUS (4V<>724VDC) TP18

+15 VDC

C18

2

C

N --

PTR1

J1 3

D

D

C

CN 04/135

F. GARCIA

07/04/05

B

CN 04/135

F. GARCIA

16/07/04

A

CN 02/174

F. GARCIA

07/11/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 2/3

DWG:

A3243--04 C

B

A

CONTROL DRAC

REV

F

R50

I. PRINC Limit

4

+15 VDC

--15 VDC

E

4

1K5

C22 1 nF

5

R90 23K7

C32 100nF

R126 10K2

10

R127 23K7

11

C33 100nF

R45 10K2 R47

I. AUX Limit

6

1K5

C21 1 nF

7

8 NOTE : 4.5 V < > 37 Amp. pick for I.PRINC or I.AUX

9

D V

U11A LM339 --

+5 VDC DZ1 15V

2

+

13

Q7 2N4403

2K21

+ U11C LM339 --

R83 221K

TP29

+

+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC V UNR V UNR PRECH IF PRECH IF +5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

TP25

TP24

R51

AUTO

TP21 TP20

N.U.

TP26 TP22 TP23

ALE

V

UNR

R87

R85 3K3

22

R81 3K3

+5 VDC R84 22 R80 22 R78 22

T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation T2 IF: Not Used T3 IF: Break Control

2K21 R107 2K21 R108

DL4 R79 3K3

A1

2K21 R109

A2

2K21 C48 22 uF U20 ULN2803 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

OUT8 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1

COM

IN8 IN7 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

GND 9

C53 1nF C54 1nF

C11

14

C12

13

12

P22 A11

10

A21

3 30 29

A22 CS4 CS3

28

16

CS1 CS0

14

12

15

10

TP30

TP31

OP2B TLP621--4

4 OP2C TLP621--4

5 6

OP2D TLP621--4

7 8

R43 HLMP1700

3K3

R94

1

11

750

12 R98

SPARE1 SPARE1 RTN

13

SF

2K2

R97 2K2

14 R96

SF RTN

15

FL

2K2

R95 2K2

16 R102

FL RTN

17 18

R100

HS RTN

19

ST

2K2

R99 2K2

20 R106

ST RTN

21

T3

2K2

R105 2K2

22 R104

T3 RTN

23

T2

2K2

R103 2K2

24

T2 RTN

6

RL2 PRME15002

RDY1

7 5

10

8

2

+15 VDC

4

R46

3

HS

2K2

R101 2K2

RDY1 RTN RDY1 OUT

3

+5 VDC R42

2

10

35

SPARE2 RTN

2K2

R91 2K2

R44

R41 HLMP1700

10 R92

82

R77 750

4 SPARE2

2K2

R93 2K2

DL2 37

9

+15 VDC +15 VDC

+5 VDC ERROR DL1 HLMP1700

3

TP32 TP34 DL3

40 39 57 38 36 43 42 41

1 2

9

TP28 TP33 TP35

TP27

16

7 8

OP2A TLP621--4

11

HS ST T3 T2

14

5 6

OP1D TLP621--4

13

SPARE2 SPARE1 SF FL

3 4

OP1C TLP621--4

15

CS2

27 4

OP1B TLP621--4

9

A12

1 2

11

P21

2

J4

OP1A TLP621--4

15

C55 1nF

8 ERROR CODE 7 RDY1 6 DISCH 5 PRECH BRAKE 4 3 T3 2 T2 T1 1

+5 VDC 16

C22 P11 P12

55 C56 1nF

8 X 4K7

C21

R110

+5 VDC

+15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC 4 X HLMP1700 DL5

53

25 46

A0

DL6

68

59

RAW

TP37

9 10 11

17 19 47

TP15

C49 470 uF

23

26

MODP2 MODA1 MODA2

C50 470 uF

8

34

MODP1

TP2 TP4 TP12 TP13 TP19

C51 470 uF

24

AR5 PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7

45 6 7

C52 10 nF

221

R48 221

U16 EP1810 20 21 22 48 49 50 51 54 5 32

33

C1 C2

+5 VDC

A PD ( 0......7 )

44

PWMC

TP14

100nF

R82 10K2

C46 1 uF

PWM J3

52

56

ENuP 14

18

+5 VDC

D30 1N4148

I. LIM TP11

R49 1K

R52

1

100nF RSTuP

Q8 2N4401

+5 VDC

--

B

C45

12

+ U11B LM339

C38

R71 1K5

R70 1K

3

2

C57 100nF

R69 1K5

U11D LM339 --

C +5 VDC

UNR

ERROR DRAC

1

1

GND

C23 +15 VDC 100nF

1

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

10/10/97

REVISED

A. DIAZ

10/10/97

3

U11 LM339 12 C20

C

CN 04/135

F. GARCIA

07/04/05

B

CN 04/135

F. GARCIA

16/07/04

100nF

A

CN 02/174

F. GARCIA

07/11/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

--15 VDC F

E

D

DATE

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 3/3

DWG:

A3243--04 C

B

A

CONTROL DRAC

REV

F

E

D

C

B

A J1

+15 VDC

VUNR CR5 1N4007

1

CR6 1N4007

2 3

REG1 7815

4 J3 220 VAC SW

1

IN

TR1

F1 T 0.5 A

CR1 1N4007

CR2 1N4007

OUT COM

IN

4

+5 VDC

5

+5 VDC

OUT COM

6 7

C3 10 uF 35 V

C1 2200 uF 35 V

15 VAC

REG2 7805

+

C4 10 uF 35 V

+

8 9 10

220 VAC

11 C2 2200 uF 35 V

15 VAC

0 VAC

2

F2 T 0.5 A CR3 1N4007

C5 10 uF 35 V

CR4 1N4007 IN

3

R2 150K, 2w

J2 --DC IN

+DC IN GND +DC OUT 2

--DC OUT

12

+15 VDC

13 14

--15 VDC

15

VUNR

COM OUT

16

--15 VDC

REG3 7915

R1 150K, 2w DS1 HLMP1700

+

F3 T 15 A

2

F4 T 15 A

+5 VDC +5 VDC

4

GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC VUNR VUNR

3

18 19

+5 VDC

20 21

FILT1 5 6 2 3

+5 VDC

17

CR7 1N4007

1

+5 VDC

22

9 CAR--DRAC 10 BUS 12 1 7 8 14 13

23 24

3

25

4

26

CR12 1N4007

5

+5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF

T1 IF: T1 to T2 Commutation T2 IF: Not Used T3 IF: Break Control

T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF

CR13 1N4007

2 CR14 1N4007 J4 1

J5 1 2 C6 220 nF 1000V

2 CR8 STTA1212DI

3

K1 KT2 K3

CR10 STTA1212DI 1

3

1

CR9 STTA1212DI

VR1 V480LA20A

4

F

CR11 STTA1212DI

E

D

E

CN 01/075

F. GARCIA

03/05/01

C, D

CN 98/090, 99/94

F. GARCIA

15/02/00

B

CN 98/025

F. GARCIA

09/02/98

A

CN 98/018

F. GARCIA

05/02/98

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

27/09/97

REVISED

A. DIAZ

27/09/97

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 1/1

DWG:

A3240--05 E

D

C

B

A

INTERFASE DRAC--HF

REV

F

E

D

C

B

A

4

4

R1 680 15w

ALL DIODES CL03--15

IN--1 CR1

CR2

CR3

3

CR4

C1 10 nF 12.5KV

R2 150K 15w

CR5

CR6

3

C2 10 nF 12.5KV

R3 150K 15w

IN--2

2

2

1

1

F

E

D

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

12/01/99

REVISED

A. DIAZ

16/03/99

SHEET / OF

SEDECAL INNERSCAN

1/1

DWG:

A3109--01 REV

CLAMPING

Technical Publication CA-1036R2

Calibration HF Series Generators

HF Series Generators Calibration


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0

JAN 23, 2004

First edition

1

APR 1, 2005


2

FEB 29, 2007

Calibration of optional 1000 mA station






Note

CA-1036R2

.



TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1

2


1

1.1

Generator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

1.1.1

Minimum Current Time Product (mAs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

1.1.2

Accuracy of Radiographic and Fluoroscopic Parameters . . . . . . . . . .

2

1.1.3

Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

CALIBRATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

2.1

Filament Stand-by Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

2.2

Exposure Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

2.3

kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

2.4

Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

2.5

Digital mA Loop Open (X-Ray Tube Calibration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

2.5.1

Autocalibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

2.5.2

Manual Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

AEC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

2.6.1

Previous Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28

2.6.2

Balance Adjustment for Three Field Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29

2.6.3

Optical Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32

2.6.4

kV Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39

2.6.5

Photomultiplier RAD-AEC (Digital RAD) Adjustment (Optional) . . . . .

42

2.6.6

AEC Optical Density Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44

2.7

Fluoro Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45

2.8

ABC Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49

2.8.1

ABC System with PhotoMultiplier Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49

2.8.2

ABC System with TV Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54

2.8.2.1 ABC System Adjustment with ABC Signal from TV Camera Compatible with the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56

2.8.2.2 ABC System Adjustment with ABC Signal from TV Camera not Compatible with the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58

2.8.2.3 ABC System Adjustment with no ABC Signal from TV Camera

60

2.6

2.9

CA-1036R2

Final Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

63

i


ii

CA-1036R2


SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION This Calibration document provides information and procedures to perform all the adjustments required to establish an optimal performance of this Generator.

Calibrate the Generator immediately after Configuration is completed.

DO NOT SUPPLY THE MAIN POWER UNTIL SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED TO DO SO IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER RETAIN A LARGE PORTION OF THEIR CHARGE FOR APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.

Calibration data is entered in digital form and stored in a non-volatile memory chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board, thus no battery back-up is required.

Note

CA-1036R2

.

Calibration procedures must be performed in the order listed in this document. Perform only the sections required to calibrate this unit.

1


1.1 1.1.1

1.1.2

GENERATOR SPECIFICATIONS MINIMUM CURRENT TIME PRODUCT (mAs) •

Minimum Current Time Product obtained at 0.1 s is 1 mAs.

•

Minimum Current Time Product within the specified ranges of compliance for linearity and constancy is 0.1 mAs.

ACCURACY OF RADIOGRAPHIC AND FLUOROSCOPIC PARAMETERS

Note

.

Specified accuracy does not include test equipment accuracy.

PARAMETERS

RAD

FLUORO

1.1.3

ACCURACY (with 12 BITS HT Controller)

kV

± (3% + 1 kV)

mA

± (4% + 1 mA)

Exposure Time

± (2% + 0.1 ms)

kV

± (3% + 1 kV)

mA

± 10%

Exposure Time

± (1% + 20 ms)

HV FREQUENCY The operating HV Frequency of this Generator is 25 kHz / 30 kHz.

1.1.4

DUTY CYCLE The Generator duty cycle is continuous, but limits should be set during installation depending on the capacity of the X-ray tube.

2

CA-1036R2


SECTION 2

Note

CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

.

Enter in GSM Program for Calibration procedures as described in the “Configuration” document. Enter and store calibration data in the Extended Memory Locations as described in Section 2.2 of the “Configuration” document. Record all the calibration data in the Data Book.

Before calibration, bear in mind that:

Note

•

For calibration and measure the kVp it is needed a Non-Invasive kVp Meter.

•

For calibration and measure mA or mAs it is needed a mAs Meter plugged to the banana connections on the HV Transformer (connect the mAs Meter for Digital mA Loops calibration).

.

Test points on the HT Controller Board can also be used to monitor the kV and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the unit. These test points must be checked with scope: - mA test point is TP-5 and the scale factor is: with HT Controller Board A3000- xx (except - 44) (<1000 mA Generator) - from 10 to 80 mA, 1 volt = 10 mA - from 100 mA, 1 volt = 100 mA with HT Controller Board A3000- 44 (1000 mA Generator) - from 10 to 80 mA, 1 volt = 20 mA - from 100 mA, 1 volt = 200 mA - kV test point is TP-7 and the scale factor is 1 volt = 33.3 kV (0.3 volt = 10 kV)

•

CA-1036R2

Verify that dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board is in “On” position to permit the service mode.

3


•

DIP SWITCH

Verify position of dip switches on the HT Controller Board during every calibration procedure: OPEN (OFF)

CLOSED (ON)

3000SW2-2

Position during operation -- Enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks

Disables Filament and Rotor Interlocks (this turns off the filament so no radiation will be produced during the exposure).

3000SW2-4

Position during operation -- Digital mA Loop Closed

Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant

Note

.

Only for Generators with Low Speed Starter (LF-RAC) (it does not apply to Generators with High Speed Starter - LV-DRAC): -- When the Digital mA Loop is open (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “On”), the rotor runs for two minutes after releasing the handswitch button from “Preparation” position. After this time the rotor will brake (unless DC Brake is removed). -- When the Digital mA Loop is closed (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “Off”), the rotor will brake after releasing the handswitch button from “Preparation” position (unless DC Brake is removed).

•

2.1

4

Be sure that X-ray Tubes configured in E02 and E18 Memory Locations correspond to X-ray Tubes installed (refer to Configuration document).

FILAMENT STAND-BY CURRENT

Note

.

For RAD Only Generators, the Filament Stand-by value is auto-calibrated by the Generator and automatically stored into the respective Memory Locations (E01 and E17). Filament Stand-by values are not field changeable.

Note

.

For RAD and Fluoro Generators, E17 Memory Location (”Fluoro Filament Setting”) sets maximum patient Entrance Skin Exposure Dose Rate. (Refer to Section 2.7 “Fluoro Calibration”).

CA-1036R2


2.2

EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT The values stored in these Extended Memory Locations only affect to Exposure Times for techniques below 20 ms. The Memory Locations which affect short exposure times are:

FUNCTION

MEMORY LOCATION TUBE-1

TUBE-2

EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT - DELAY

E13

E29

EXPOSURE TIME ADJUSTMENT - Ceq kV

E15

E31

The generator has been optimized at the factory to produce correct exposures at the lower times (<20 ms.) Therefore do not change the value factory set for E13 and E29 Memory Locations and only adjust the value for E15 and E31 Memory Location according to the HV Cables length. The Exposure Time adjustment is calibrated by performing the following steps:

CA-1036R2

1.

Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM Program. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the “OK” button.

2.

Select the E13 (or E29) Memory Location. Value in this Memory Location adjusts the time delay of the exposure. It is factory set for a value of 17, 18 or 19 (default value is “18”). Only read this value, do not change it.

3.

Select the E15 (or 31) Memory Location. Value in this Memory Location is set in relation to the length in meters of one of the HV Cables (1 ft = 0.3048 m). Verify the HV Cable length in meters and set the following value: HV CABLE LENGTH

VALUE TO SET IN MEMORY

4m

27

6m

31

9m

38

12 m

45

14 m

49

16 m

54

For another HV Cable length

value = (2.2711 x cables length) + 17.744

4.

Store the value of each Memory Location by pressing the “Store” button of the calibration panel.

5.

Exit from calibration mode and record the new values in the Data Book.

6.

Repeat the above calibration process for the second tube (memory locations E29 and E31).

5


2.3

KV LOOP Extended Memory Location E06 contains the calibration factor for kV Loop. Each number above or below of the indicated in the E06 memory location increases or decreases respectively the kV gain value.

Note

.

Value in E06 Memory Location is only related to the Generator performance (it is not related to the X-ray Tube(s) or another components installed), so value in this Memory Location is factory adjusted. Only perform this procedure if the HT Controller Board and/or HV Transformer have been replaced in the unit.

The kV Gain for kV Loop can be manually calibrated with a Non-Invasive kV Meter (recommended procedure) or Auto-calibrated with HV Bleeder.

Manual Calibration of E06 Memory Location 1.

6

With the Generator power OFF:

G

Set Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in “Off” position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).

G

Set Dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “On” position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).

G

Remove the link between the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer. Connect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections to measure mA or mAs.

G

Place and center a Non-Invasive kVp Meter on the X-ray Tube output at the required SID (refer to the Non-Invasive kVp Meter documentation).

2.

Enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM Program. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the “OK” button.

3.

Select the E06 Memory Location and read the calibration value by pressing the “Read” button. Enter the value “200” and store it by pressing the “Store” button.

CA-1036R2


4.

Calibrate manually the Filament Current Number for 80 kV / 200 mA combination, as indicated in the following steps (if it has not been previously calibrated). In calibration mode, Filament Current Numbers are shown on the calibration panel by pressing the “Read” button after selecting the respective kV / mA combination. They can be changed by pressing the “Increase” and “Decrease” buttons and stored by pressing the “Store” button of the calibration panel. Select 80 kV, 200 mA, Large Focus. Enter the value “344” as Filament Current Number (calibration value) and press the “Store” button. Make an exposure with these parameters. The mAs read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs displayed on the calibration screen with a tolerance of ±0.1 mAs (tolerance of the parameter and mAs Meter). If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high (or “Generator Overload” Error is shown), decrease the filament number. Press the “Store” button before making a new exposure. Repeat until the mAs read is correct and the mA station is calibrated.

CA-1036R2

7


5.

Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button.

6.

Select: RAD Menu, 80 kV, 200 mA, 100 ms and Large Focus. Make an exposure and note the kV value at the end of the exposure.

7.

If calibration of the kV Loop is correct (80 ±1 kV), record value “200” in the Data Book.

8.

If calibration of the kV Loop is not correct:

9.

8

a.

Exit from the “User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button. Select the E06 Memory Location. Press the “Read” button to read the value stored.

b.

Increase or decrease the value to increase or decrease the kV respectively. Enter the new value and store it by pressing the “Store” button.

c.

Exit calibration mode and repeat the exposure (steps 5 and 6) to determine if the new value has had the proper effect, if not repeat step-8.

d.

When it is correct, record the new value for E06 Memory Location in the Data Book.

After calibration of E06 Memory Location, remove the Non-Invasive kVp Meter.

CA-1036R2


Auto-Calibration of E06 Memory Location 1.

2.

With the Generator power OFF:

G

Set Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in “On” position (disables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).

G

Remove the HV Cables from the X-ray Tube and connect them to the HV Bleeder, then connect a short couple of HV Cables from the HV Bleeder to the X-ray Tube.

Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button on the GSM menu. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the “OK” button. Then, select the E06 Memory Location and press the “OK” button. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button (“Yes” or “No”) on the new screen.

CA-1036R2

9


Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration (second confirmation) by pressing the respective button (“Confirm” or “Dismiss”) on the calibration screen.

Auto-calibration is activated when the “Auto Calibration” button is lighted and the “Press Prep and Expose” message appears on the screen.

10

3.

Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at 100 kV, 200 mA and 32 ms and they can be shown when pressing the “Prep” button).

4.

Read the kVp measured with the HV Bleeder and enter this value on the kV Display by pressing the “kV Increase” or “kV Decrease” buttons.

5.

Exit from Auto-calibration mode pressing the “Auto Calibration” button. At this moment, the Generator will calculate and store the new value in E06 Memory Location. Auto-calibration is deactivated and the process is finished when the screen shows the GSM menu.

6.

Press the “Manual Calibration” button. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the “OK” button. Then, select the E06 Memory Location and read its new value on the Calibration Display. Record this value in the Data Book.

7.

Exit calibration mode.

8.

After calibration of E06 Memory Location: G

Switch the Generator power OFF.

G

Remove the HV Bleeder and connect the HV Cables from the Generator directly to the X-ray Tube.

CA-1036R2


2.4

DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED Extended Memory Locations E03 and E05 contain the calibration factor for Digital mA Loop Closed. Each number above or below the indicated in the Memory Locations increases or decreases respectively the mA gain value.

Note

.

Values in E03 and E05 Memory Locations are only related to the Generator performance (they are not related to the X-ray Tube installed), so values in these Memory Locations are factory adjusted. Only perform this procedure if the HT Controller Board and/or HV Transformer have been replaced in the unit.

The mA Gain for Digital mA Loop Closed is calibrated by performing the following steps: 1.

2.

With the Generator power OFF, set: G

Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in “Off” position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).

G

Dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “On” position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).

G


Calibration of E03 and E05 Memory Locations is performed by means of the “Auto Calibration” menu.

EACH TIME THAT AUTO-CALIBRATION IS ACTIVATED IN ONE OF THESE MEMORY LOCATIONS, CALIBRATION DATA STORED FOR THIS MEMORY LOCATION IS DELETED AND A NEW CALIBRATION FOR IT WILL BE REQUIRED.

CA-1036R2

11


3.

Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button on the GSM menu. Select an available workstation (WS) and press the “OK” button. Then, select the respective Memory Location (E03 or E05) and press the “OK” button. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button (“Yes” or “No”) on the new screen.


12

CA-1036R2


Auto-calibration is activated when the “Auto Calibration” button is lighted and the “Press Prep and Expose” message appears on the screen.

4.

CA-1036R2

Calibrate E03 and E05 Memory Locations as described in the following pages.

13


For Low mA stations (from 10 mA to 80 mA) (E03 Memory Location):

14

1.

Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button on the GSM menu and select the E03 Memory Location. Confirm all the following screens.

2.

When Auto-calibration is activated, “Auto Calibration” button is lighted and the “3.5 mAs” value is shown on the screen.

3.

Perform the following steps: a.

Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at 80 kV, 32 mA and 100 ms and they can be shown when pressing the “Prep” button).

b.

Read the mAs measured on the mAs Meter.

c.

Read the Filament Current Number shown on the calibration panel.

d.

Increase or decrease the Filament Current Number (by pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons) to determine the correction needed to obtain a value between 3.00 and 4.00 mAs in the mAs Meter after making a new exposure.

e.

Repeat the above steps until a proper mAs value is obtained in the mAs Meter.

4.

Enter the mAs value read in the mAs Meter (it must be a value between 3.00 and 4.00 mAs) in the mAs Display pressing the “mAs Increase” or “mAs Decrease” buttons.

5.


6.


7.


CA-1036R2


For High mA stations (from 100 mA) (E05 Memory Location):

CA-1036R2

1.

Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button on the GSM menu and select the E05 Memory Location. Confirm all the following screens.

2.

When Auto-calibration is activated, “Auto Calibration” button is lighted and the “7.75 mAs” value is shown on the screen.

3.

Perform the following steps: a.

Make an exposure (technique parameters are pre-programmed at 80 kV, 125 mA and 64 ms (or 63 ms or 65 ms depending on Generator) and they can be shown when pressing the “Prep” button).

b.

Read the mAs measured on the mAs Meter.

c.

Read the Filament Current Number shown on the calibration panel.

d.

Increase or decrease the Filament Current Number (by pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons) to determine the correction needed to obtain a value between 7.00 and 8.50 mAs in the mAs Meter after making a new exposure.

e.

Repeat the above steps until a proper mAs value is obtained in the mAs Meter.

4.

Enter the mAs value read in the mAs Meter (it must be a value between 7.00 and 8.50 mAs) in the mAs Display pressing the “mAs Increase” or “mAs Decrease” buttons.

5.


6.


7.


8.

After calibration of E03 and E05 Memory Locations: G


G

Disconnect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections.

G

Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer.

15


2.5

DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN (X-RAY TUBE CALIBRATION) To achieve the most accurate calibration, this procedure has to be automatically performed by the Generator (Auto-calibration). Calibration procedure will be manually performed by the field engineer only if Auto-calibration is not possible. Two different methods are described in this section: Auto-calibration and Manual Calibration. Digital mA Loop Open is calibrated by performing the following steps: 1.

2.5.1



G


2.

Turn the Generator ON.

3.

Perform the Auto-calibration procedure as described in Section 2.5.1 for each X-ray Tube in the system.

AUTO-CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN Auto-calibration of the Filament Current Numbers is divided in two separated procedures related to the mA stations configured for the Small or Large Focal Spots. It is recommended to start with the Small Focal Spot (first group) and continue with the Large Focal Spot (second group). EACH TIME THAT AUTO-CALIBRATION IS ACTIVATED IN A mA STATION (OR IN “E01” MEMORY LOCATION), ALL THE FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS OF THE SELECTED FOCAL SPOT ARE AUTOMATICALLY SET TO “344”. SO A NEW COMPLETE CALIBRATION OF THE FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS FOR THIS FOCAL SPOT WILL BE REQUIRED.

16

CA-1036R2


Auto-calibration starts with the minimum available mA station for the selected Focal Spot at 50 kV and follows with the other combinations of mA stations for the selected Focal Spot at 80 kV, 120 kV and 40 kV. 1.

Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button on the GSM menu.

2.

Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated and press the “OK” button. This workstation has to be one of the previously configured as “Direct”.

3.

Select the Small Focal Spot by pressing the “Small” button and then press the “OK” button. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button (“Yes” or “No”) on the new screen.

CA-1036R2

17


18

4.


5.

Auto-calibration is activated when the “Auto Calibration” button is lighted and the “Press Prep and Expose” message appears on the screen. At this moment, the Generator has checked the mA stations available for the Small Focal Spot.

CA-1036R2


6.

Check that the Heat Units capacity available for the X-ray Tube is 100% or nearly (HU 0% displayed on the screen).

BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURE IN AUTO-CALIBRATION, VERIFY THAT THE LINK BETWEEN THE BANANA PLUG CONNECTIONS ON THE HV TRANSFORMER IS INSTALLED.

7.

Note

.

Keep fully pressed the Handswitch button to perform continuous exposures.

In Auto-calibration mode, all technique parameters are factory pre-programmed and they can not be changed. Auto-calibration can be paused momentarily releasing the Handswitch button, whenever there is not an exposure in process. Do not exit from Auto-calibration before the procedure has been completed.

Note

.

Auto-calibration can be cancelled by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button. A message on the screen informs that Auto-calibration has been cancelled and after a while the screen shows the GSM menu.

If during Auto-calibration process, any error indication is shown momentarily (such as “Tube Overload”, etc.), it means that Generator can not calibrate in this moment the selected kV / mA combination (because anode overheated, space charge, Generator power limit, etc.). In this case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the following available kV / mA combinations for the selected Focal Spot. At the end of the process it will try to calibrate or calculate the combinations previously uncalibrated. If the Heat Units value displayed is more than 60%, exposures are inhibited momentarily and message “Tube too hot” is shown on the screen. This message will disappear and exposures can be made again when the X-ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Units capacity. At this point, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Units value displayed are close to the 20% before making any exposure.

CA-1036R2

19


Generator tries to calibrate each kV / mA combination for ten (10) attempts (maximum). If calibration is cancelled (after ten attempts), message “Auto calibration failure” is shown on the screen until press the “Auto Calibration” button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM menu. Calibration can be also cancelled due to space charge during calibration of the lowest kV at the highest mA stations for the Focal Spot selected, so message “Auto calibration failure” is also shown on the screen until press the “Auto Calibration” button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM menu.

ONLY IF AUTO-CALIBRATION IS CANCELLED DUE TO “AUTO CALIBRATION FAILURE”, CONTINUE THE AUTO-CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR THE OTHER FOCAL SPOT. CHECK AT THE END OF THE AUTO-CALIBRATION PROCEDURE WHICH kV / mA COMBINATIONS HAVE NOT BEEN AUTO-CALIBRATED FOR EACH FOCAL SPOT (THESE COMBINATIONS HAVE THE FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBER SET TO “344”). MANUALLY CALIBRATE THESE kV / mA COMBINATIONS AS EXPLAIN IN SECTION 2.5.2.

When Auto-calibration is successfully performed, message “Auto Calibration OK” is shown on the screen until press the “Auto Calibration” button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and go back to the GSM menu.

8.

Repeat the same procedure for the Large Focal Spot. Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the “Auto Calibration” button on the GSM menu. Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated and press the “OK” button. This workstation has to be one of the previously configured as “Direct”. Select the Large Focal Spot by pressing the “Large” button and then press the “OK” button. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button on each screen. Auto-calibration is activated when the “Auto Calibration” button is lighted. At this moment, the Generator has checked the mA stations available for the Large Focal Spot. Before starting the exposures, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Units value displayed are close to the 20%.

20

CA-1036R2


9.

After performing both procedures (for Small and Large Focal Spots), enter in “Manual Calibration” mode and select each combination of the available mA stations for each Focal Spot at the kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV). Press the “Read” button to read on the calibration panel the new value of the Filament Current Number stored for each combination and record the new values in the Data Book. Note that the highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.

2.5.2

10.


11.

Perform the Auto-calibration procedure for the second X-ray Tube.

12.

Turn the Generator power OFF and set Dip Switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).

MANUAL CALIBRATION OF DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN This procedure describes the Manual calibration of all the Filament Current Numbers. It has to be also used to calibrate the kV / mA combinations not performed during Auto-calibration procedure because it has not been completed. These combinations have the Filament Current Number set to “344”, so only these combinations have to be manually calibrated as described in this procedure. If Auto-calibration for one of the Focal Spots has been successful, it is only required to perform the manual calibration of the mA station do not calibrate for the other Focal Spot. Manual Calibration is initiated at the 80 kV break point by entering the appropriate Filament Current Number for the proper tube current at each selectable mA. Calibration at the other kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV) are obtained by adding or subtracting values as indicated in Table 2-1. Although the suggested values (Table 2-1) could change depending on the X-ray tube used, entering those values will approximate accurate calibration without making excessive exposures. In “Manual Calibration” mode, the Filament Current Numbers are shown on the calibration panel by pressing the “Read” button after selecting the respective kV / mA combination. The value can be changed by pressing the “Increase” or “Decrease” buttons of the calibration panel and stored by pressing the “Store” button. Note that in calibration mode, only the mA stations and kV (at the break points) can be selected.

CA-1036R2

21


Table 2-1 mA Calibration Numbers Change

FILAMENT CURRENT NUMBERS AT kV BREAK POINT mA A STATION 40

50

80

120

10

A1+7

A1+6

A1

A1 --5

12.5

A2+7

A2+6

A2

A2 --5

16

A3+7

A3+6

A3

A3 --5

20

A4+7

A4+6

A4

A4 --5

25

A5+7

A5+6

A5

A5 --5

32

A6+7

A6+6

A6

A6 --5

40

A7+7

A7+6

A7

A7 --5

50

A8+7

A8+6

A8

A8 --5

64 (or 63 or 65)

A9+7

A9+6

A9

A9 --5

80

A10+7

A10+6

A10

A10 --5

100

A11+10

A11+8

A11

A11 --7

125

A12+10

A12+8

A12

A12 --7

160

A13+10

A13+8

A13

A13 --7

200

A14+10

A14+8

A14

A14 --7

250

A15+10

A15+8

A15

A15 --7

320

A16+14

A16+11

A16

A16 --9

400

A17+14

A17+11

A17

A17 --9

500

A18+14

A18+11

A18

A18 --9

640 (or 630 or 650)

A19+14

A19+11

A19

A19 --9

800

A20+14

A20+11

A20

A20 --9

1000

A21+14

A21+11

A21

A21 --9

Note.-- The mA station values depends on the Generator model. Some models do not contain all the mA stations listed above.

22

CA-1036R2


1.



G


G


2.

Turn the Generator ON and enter in calibration mode by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button on the GSM menu.

3.

Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated and press the “OK” button. This workstation has to be one of the previously configured as “Direct”.

4.

Check that the Heat Units available for the X-ray Tube is 100% or nearly (HU 0% displayed on the screen).

5.

Accordingly to X-ray tube ratings or maximum Generator power, check which kV / mA combinations in Table 2-1 are allowed. If error “Tube Overload” is shown after selection of a kV / mA combination, it means this combination is not allowed for the selected X-ray Tube. In calibration mode, if Generator power is exceeded by a kV / mA combination selection, error “E-16” is shown after “Preparation”. Reset this error by pressing the “Reset Error” button. Note which combinations in Table 2-1 can not be calibrated by making exposures (combinations not allowed due to Tube rating, maximum Generator power, space charge, etc.) and the Exposure Time assigned to these combinations in calibration mode.

6.

CA-1036R2

Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button. Select the mA station and Exposure Time of each kV / mA combination not allowed. Increase or decrease the kV value as required to determine the kV value allowed nearest to the kV value of the combination. Note the kV value allowed in the respective cell of Table 2-1.

23


7.

Exit from the “User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button. Select 80 kV and lowest mA station available (first combination available). Enter a Filament Number of “344” for this combination.

8.

Make an exposure. The mAs read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs displayed on the calibration screen with a tolerance of ± 0.1 mAs (tolerance of the parameter and mAs Meter). If the mAs read is close to zero, increase the filament number in big steps (a.e. increase values in 40). As the mAs read is close to the mAs displayed on the Console, increase (or reduce) the filament number in smaller steps (a.e. increase value in 30, 20, 10, ...). If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high, decrease the filament number. Press the “Store” button before making a new exposure. Repeat until the mA station is calibrated.

Note

.

Press the “Store” button to store the new data (filament number) before selecting the next kV or mA stations.

Calibration data (presently in memory) may or may not be close to your requirements. If it is not close, the potential exists to damage the X-ray tube (i.e. too much mA). Thus, as you start the mA calibration procedure note how close or how far off the mA break points are. If a large adjustment (more than 40 points) is required at the low mA stations, make estimated adjustments to the high mA stations before those exposures are made.

9.

Select the next mA station at 80 kV. Before making any exposure, enter as filament number the value calibrated for the previous mA station increased in 10. If the mAs is low, increase the filament number. If the mA is high, decrease the filament number. Press the “Store” button before making a new exposure. Repeat until the mA station is calibrated.

24

CA-1036R2


10.

Complete the calibration process for all mA stations at 80 kV as described before. When select the first mA station for the Large Focal Spot, enter as a filament number the value calibrated for the first mA station for the Small Focal Spot. Note that the highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal. Press the “Read” button to read on the calibration panel the new value of the Filament Current Number stored for each mA station at 80 kV. Record the new values in the Data Book.

Note

.

When highest mA stations of the Generator can not be calibrated at 80 kV due to insufficient filament current (the filament current number has reached the maximum number (999)), replace on the Filament Board (A3004--09/10) the Resistor R11 for another resistor with 1.4 Ω / 5 W, and place Jumper JP1 in position “A”. Then rename the Filament Board as A3004--11. ATTENTION: After doing this modification reduce the value of all the filament current numbers (column for 80 kV) at the 25% and perform the calibration procedure again (from step-5).

Note

11.

Complete the calibration process for the remaining kV / mA combinations using Table 2-1 as a guide. It is not necessary to make exposures to do this. Compute the value for all the kV break points of each available mA station although the Generator power can not reach all the kV / mA combinations. Select the corresponding kV / mA combination and enter the computed value.

12.

Check calibration at all break points (making exposures) and correct any calibration points as needed.

.

If “Tube Overload” error is shown directly after selection of an allowed combination (refer to step-5.), wait until the X-ray tube anode cools down to permit the calibration of the mA station.

13.

CA-1036R2

Recalculate the values of the non-allowed combinations in accordance to the new values obtained by exposures. (Refer to Table 2-1).

25


14.

Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button. Select the mA station, Exposure Time and kV value noted for each kV / mA combination not allowed (refer to step-6.). Check calibration at these kV / mA combinations by making exposures. If needed, enter in calibration mode and correct the Filament Current Number of the respective kV / mA combination not allowed.

15.

Exit from the “User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button. In calibration mode, select each combination of the available mA stations at the kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV). Press the “Read” button to read on the kV Display the new value of the Filament Current Number stored for each combination. Record the new values in the Data Book. Note that the highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers larger than the lowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.

26

16.


17.

If required, perform the calibration procedure for the second X-ray Tube.

18.

After calibration of Filament Current Numbers: G


G

Disconnect the mAs Meter to the banana plug connections.

G

Re-install the link between the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer.

G

Set Dip Switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).

CA-1036R2


2.6

AEC CALIBRATION This section describes the adjustments needed to calibrate the AEC according to the customer input. Therefore, AEC exposures will be made during the calibration process in order to insure AEC functionality. The Optical Density is controlled by the values stored in the respective memory locations. These values are influenced by film speed, screen speed, dark room procedures and customer requirements. Use a homogeneous Phantom with enough density to produce an exposure of 100 ms, the AEC will be calibrated to produce a density of 1.0 (or the customer preference Optical Density) at 70 kV, and then AEC tracking will be adjusted to produce the same density at 55 kV, 90 kV and 110 kV.

Note

.

For AEC calibration, use the same Film and Cassettes used by the customer. AEC calibration must be performed using the Medium Film/Screen speed combination. The Medium Film/Screen speed has to be double of the Slow and half of the Fast (e.g. 200--Slow, 400--Medium, 800--Fast).

Note

.

When using CR (Computer Radiography) or DR (Digital Radiography) instead of measuring Optical Density: -- measure the Image Gray level by using the needed software tools inside each application (refer CR or DR documentation). -- or measure the Dose level: -- For CR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the Cassette and centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber. -- For DR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the Panel, centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber and with the Grid removed. The following table indicates the Memory Locations related to AEC Calibration. FUNCTION

CA-1036R2

MEMORY LOCATION

AEC-1 CALIBRATION

E04

AEC-1 TRACKING

E08

AEC-2 CALIBRATION

E09

AEC-2 TRACKING

E10

AEC-3 CALIBRATION

E20

AEC-4 CALIBRATION / PHOTOMULTIPLIER AEC CALIBRATION

E23

AEC-3 and AEC-4 TRACKING (equal value for both)

E24

AEC DENSITY SCALE

E12

27


Illustration 2-1 Automatic Exposure Control DAC Jumper Adjustment (Potentiomer)

ATP Console CPU Microprocessor

COMPARATOR

V ref V out

Reference

AEC STOP

Ramp (from Ion Chamber)

Data Bus

to cut the exposure

EXP ORDER STRT DR DAC Vout (Reference) (calibration data setting) Ion Chamber Output EXP Start AEC STOP (AEC CONTROL PCB)

AEC Function Waveform

2.6.1

EXP Stop

PREVIOUS CHECKS Make sure the automatic processor works correctly, and the concentration and temperature of the solutions comply with manufacturer specifications. Obtain a sensitometric curve to determine gamma (γ) of the film and the solution quality. The procedure normally requires a sensitometer, but if it is not available proceed as follows: 1.

Make two exposures using the same kV and Film/Screen combination (medium is recommended) but with different mAs settings, mAs(f1) and mAs(f2).

2.

Develop and measure the Density (d) of each, d(f1) and d(f2).

3.

Determine gamma (γ) by the formula: γ=

d(f2) − d(f1) log 10

mAs(f2) mAs(f1)

Gamma (γ) must be between 2 and 3, if not change or renew solutions.

28

CA-1036R2


2.6.2

BALANCE ADJUSTMENT FOR THREE FIELD DETECTORS

Note

CA-1036R2

.

Some Ion Chambers does not provide balance potentiometers for Three Field Detectors. Continue calibration process in Section 2.6.3 “Optical Density Adjustment”.

1.

Set the Master Gain potentiometer of the Ion Chambers to mid range (refer to Ion Chamber documentation).

2.

Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position A: JP3 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or JP2 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9.

3.

Set SID at the Focal Distance of the Grid installed in the Table Bucky (usually 100 cm) or in the Vertical Bucky Stand (usually 150 cm).

4.

Collimate the X-ray beam so that it completely covers all three fields but does not extend beyond limits of the phantom.

5.

Place Copper plates (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the Collimator Filter Holder: 1.5 mm for SID of 100 cm, 1 mm for SID 150 cm. (1 mm Copper ≃ 10 cm Plexiglass or Water).

6.

Enter in calibration mode and verify that AEC Calibration number in E04, E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The range for AEC calibration numbers are from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.

7.

Enter in calibration mode selecting a Workstation configured for the Ion Chamber to be calibrated. Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button.

29


8.

30

Select on the Console: G

RAD Menu: 70 kV, 200 mA Large Focus (or the first mA station for Large Focus if 200 mA station is set for Small Focus) and 1 second back-up time.

G

AEC Menu: “Central Area” , “Density 0” and “Medium Film/Screen”.

CA-1036R2


9.

Note

CA-1036R2

.

Make an exposure without film in the cassette and note the Exposure Time displayed on the Console, it should be approximately 100 ms. If necessary, change the Copper thickness or mA station and make the exposure again.

The “Actual Exposure Parameters” area shows the last exposure parameters when: exposure is finished by the AEC, exposure is aborted by releasing the exposure control, or after pressing the “Reset Error” button.

10.

Deselect “Center Area” and select “Left Area”. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and record the Exposure Time. If this time is not equal to the “Center Area” time (± 7%), check that the Ion Chamber is parallel to the X-ray Tube and make an exposure again. If it is parallel, adjust “Left Area” balance potentiometer to increase or decrease Exposure Time. Repeat this process until both Exposure Times for “Center Area” and “Left Area” are equal.

11.

Deselect “Left Area” and select “Right Area”. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and record the Exposure Time. If this time is not equal to the “Center Area” time (± 7%), adjust “Right Area” balance potentiometer to increase or decrease Exposure Time. Repeat process until both Exposure Times for “Center Area” and “Right Area” are equal.

12.

Check that the three scan Areas have equal Exposure Time (± 7%): G

“Center Area” with “Left Area”, “Center Area” with “Right Area”, and “Left Area” with “Right Area”.

G

All three Areas.

13.

Exit from the “Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button and exit from calibration mode.

14.

Repeat the above steps for all the Ion Chambers installed with the Generator.

31


2.6.3

OPTICAL DENSITY ADJUSTMENT

Note

.

The Film Optical Density must be measured always on the same point for all the X-ray Films developed during this procedure. The recommended point is on the central axis of the Film with relation of the Anode and Cathode and as close as possible to center of the Film.

Illustration 2-2 How to measure the Film Optical Density

A

K

USEFUL BEAM

FILM

DENSITOMETER

R

32

CA-1036R2


ION CHAMBERS WITH DETECTOR GAIN SWITCHES OR WITH POTENTIOMETER 1.

Set the Detector Gain switches (or gain potentiometer) of the Ion Chamber to mid range (refer to Ion Chamber documentation). (If the Ion Chamber is provided with the Generator, this adjustment is Factory set.) The following tables indicate the switch position for the “Vacutec” Ion Chamber (Factory set).

VACUTEC ION CHAMBER -- BAK 70 151 with Amplifier 70 901 SWITCH POSITION

GAIN

SW1

SW2

SW3

0.1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 100 μGy)

OFF

OFF

OFF

0.5 V / μGy (10 V≃ 20 μGy)

ON

OFF

OFF

1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 10 μGy)

OFF

ON

OFF

2 V / μGy (10 V≃ 5 μGy)

OFF

OFF

ON

OUTPUT SIGNAL

SW4

Positive

ON

Negative

OFF

NORMAL FACTORY SELECTION: 1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 10 μGy) - Positive

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

VACUTEC DIGITAL ION CHAMBER -- BAK 70 151 with Amplifier 70 902 SWITCH POSITION

GAIN

OUTPUT SIGNAL

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

0.1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 100 μGy)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

0.5 V / μGy (10 V≃ 20 μGy)

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 10 μGy)

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

2 V / μGy (10 V≃ 5 μGy)

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

4 V / μGy (10 V≃ 2.5 μGy)

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Positive or Negative polarity of the ramp signal is selected with a switch at the Ramp Module. The Ramp Module is a 9-pin Sub-D connector plugged to the Ion Chamber cable. Positive polarity of the ramp signal is factory set.

NORMAL FACTORY SELECTION: 1 V / μGy (10 V≃ 10 μGy) - Positive

CA-1036R2

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

33


2.

Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position A: JP3 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or JP2 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9.

3.


4.


5.


6.

Enter in calibration mode and verify that AEC Calibration number in E04, E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The useful range for AEC calibration numbers is from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.

7.


8.

Select on the Console:

9.

Note

34

.

G


G


Make an exposure without film in the cassette and note the Exposure Time displayed on the Console, it should be approximately 100 ms. If necessary, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again.


CA-1036R2


10.

Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the customer. Make an exposure, develop the film and check the Optical Density, it should be 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).

11.

To change the density: G

For Ion Chamber with Gain switches: -- If the Optical Density obtained is 33% above of the desired density, increase the gain with the switches. Repeat step-10. -- If the Optical Density obtained is 33% below of the desired density, decrease the gain with the switches. Repeat step-10. -- If the Optical Density obtained is in between 33% of the desired density, change the AEC calibration number. Exit from the “Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button and in calibration mode set the new AEC calibration number for the respecetive Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or E23). The Optical Density increases / decreases when the calibration number is increased / decreased. Then enter in “User Mode” screen and repeat step-10.

G

Note

CA-1036R2

.

For Ion Chamber with Master Gain potentiometer, adjust this potentiometer until the desired density is obtained by repeating step-10. If the adjustment is not achieved with the Master Gain potentiometer, change the AEC calibration number. Exit from the “Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button and in calibration mode set the new AEC calibration number for the respecetive Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or E23). The Optical Density increases / decreases when the calibration number is increased / decreased. Then enter in “Go to User Mode” screen and repeat step-10.

The AEC accuracy is better in all the useful range as the AEC calibration number is closer to 70.

12.


13.


14.

Record all the values for the Memory Locations in the Data Book.

35


ION CHAMBERS WITHOUT DETECTOR GAIN SWITCHES OR WITHOUT POTENTIOMETER

Note

36

1.

Set the following jumper on the AEC Control Board to position B: JP3 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or JP2 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9.

2.

Set to mid range, the following potentiometer on the AEC Control Board: R10 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R22 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9.

.

The density adjustment of ALL the Ion Chambers in the system are affected by this potentiometer.

3.


4.


5.


6.

Enter in calibration mode and verify that AEC Calibration number in E04, E09, E20 and E23 Memory Locations is 70. The useful range for AEC calibration numbers is from 20 to 120. Exit from calibration mode.

7.


8.



G


CA-1036R2


9.

Note

CA-1036R2

.

Make an exposure without film in the cassette and note the Exposure Time displayed on the Console, it should be approximately 100 ms. If necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station selected.


10.


11.

Repeat the above steps for each Ion Chamber.

12.


13.

Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the customer. Make an exposure (use the final Copper thickness and the selected mA station noted before), develop the film and take note of the Optical Density measured for each Ion Chamber.

14.


15.

Repeat steps 12. and 13. for each Ion Chamber.

37


16.

Take the maximum and minimum value of the O. Densities measured before, sum them and divide the result by two. Subtract this value from density 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density) to obtain the O. Density difference. O.D. difference = O.D. customer preference --

O.D. max + O.D. min 2

Calculate the new O. Density by adding the O. D. difference (with its sign + or --) to the value of the O. Density measured for the Ion Chamber closer to 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density). new O.D. = O.D. mesured + (O.D. difference)

For this Ion Chamber, adjust the potentiometer (turning it clockwise will decrease the O. Density) R10 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R22 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9 (at least one turn). Enter in calibration mode selecting a Workstation configured for the Ion Chamber to be calibrated. Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button. Make another exposure, develop the film and check the Optical Density. Repeat this action (adjusting the potentiometer and making exposures) until the new Optical Density (calculated before) for this Ion Chamber is obtained. 17.

The Optical Density for each Ion Chamber has to be adjusted to 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density). Exit from the “Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button and in calibration mode select the AEC calibration number for the respective Memory Location (E04, E09, E20 or E23). Change the AEC calibration number: The Optical Density increases / decreases when the calibration number is increased / decreased. Then enter in “Go to User Mode” screen. Make another exposure, develop the film and check the Optical Density. Repeat this action (changing the respective Memory Location and making exposures) until the desired Optical Density is obtained.

Note

38

.

The AEC accuracy is better in all the useful range as the AEC calibration number is closer to 70. 18.

Repeat step-17. until the desired Optical Density for each Ion Chamber is obtained.

19.


20.


CA-1036R2


2.6.4

kV COMPENSATION To maintain constant AEC Optical Density regardless of the kV at which a film is exposed, the Generator provides kV compensation. (Refer to Illustration 2-3) Perform the following steps to determine whether or not AEC Tracking of Optical Density must be adjusted.

CA-1036R2

1.

Enter in calibration mode and verify that AEC Tracking number in E08, E10 and E24 Memory Locations is “0”. Exit from calibration mode.

2.


3.



G


4.

Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the Exposure Time is lower than 1 second. If necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station selected for 55 kV.

5.

Select 90 kV. Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the Exposure Time is higher than 20 ms. If necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station selected for 90 kV.

6.


7.

Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the customer. Make an exposure at 55 kV and 90 kV (use the final Copper thickness and the selected mA station noted before for each kV), develop the film and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures. Check that the film variation range is the same ±0.2 of the Optical Density (±20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) obtained before at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.6.3).

39


If the variation value is not ±0.2 of the Optical Density (±20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) calculate the new value for the AEC Tracking number in each Memory Location in the following manner:

8.

Note

.

G

If the Optical Density at 55 kV has to be decreased and the Optical Density above 70 kV has to be increased then increase the Tracking value in one.

G

If the Optical Density at 55 kV has to be increased and the Optical Density above 70 kV has to be decreased then decrease the Tracking value in one.

A tracking value of 10 will have no effect on AEC density (used in solid state detectors). a.

Exit from the “Go to User Mode” screen by pressing the “Manual Calibration” button and in calibration mode select the respective Memory Location (E08, E10 or E24).

b.

Values for AEC Tracking range is from --10 to +10. Determine the correct value for the needed AEC Tracking change.

AEC-kV TRACKING CURVE

+10

+9

+8

+7

+6

+5

+4

+3

+2

+1

0

--1

--2

--3

--4

--5

--6

--7

--8

--9

--10

VALUE TO ENTER IN THE MEMORY LOCATION

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

255

254

253

252

251

250

249

248

247

246

c.

9.

Note

.

Enter the new value and store it. Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button and repeat this process from step-7. until the desired density compensation is obtained.

Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the customer. Make an exposure at 110 kV (use the final Copper thickness and the selected mA station noted before for 110 kV), develop the film and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures. Check that the film variation range is the same ±0.2 of the Optical Density (±20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) obtained before at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.6.3). If the variation value is not ±0.2 repeat step-8. Calibration of AEC Tracking at 110 kV modifies the adjustment done at 55 kV and 90 kV. Repeat exposures of step-7. and check that they are correct. In case that the AEC Tracking at 110 kV places the adjustment at 55 kV and 90 kV out of range, choose the AEC Tracking value more convenient for the application.

40

CA-1036R2


10.


11.


12.


Illustration 2-3 AEC kV Tracking Curve 250

DAC OUTPUT in byte (8 Bit) (U3-2 of AEC Control Board)

200

150

100

10

70

8 6

50

4 2

0 --2 --4

0

--6 --8

--10

--50 40

50

60

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

kV

CA-1036R2

41


2.6.5

PHOTOMULTIPLIER RAD--AEC (DIGITAL RAD) ADJUSTMENT (OPTIONAL) The Photomultiplier RAD--AEC adjustment can be performed in two ways: one is the value stored in E23 Memory Location and the other is the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier Tube. The recommended procedure for this adjustment is to store a constant value in E23 Memory Location and adjust the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier Tube.

Note

.

Value in E23 Memory Location is a common data used for Photomultiplier AEC Calibration or used for the Fourth Ion Chamber Calibration (AEC-4).

Perform the following procedure: 1.

Enter in “Manual Calibration” mode selecting a Workstation configured for DSI. Select E23 Memory Location and set a value of “127”. Then enter in user mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button.

2.

Set up a Dosimeter as close as possible to the Image Intensifier Radiation Input to measure the Entrance Image Intensifier Exposure Dose Rate. Position the Probe at the center of the primary beam with the entire active volume within the primary beam. Select the Field of View for the Image Intensifier to have 9” FOV. Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly at the normal SID (1 meter). Collimate the X-ray beam so it completely covers the Image Intensifier field but does not extend beyond limits of the phantom.

42

3.

Place 2 mm of Copper (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the Collimator Filter Holder. (1 mm Copper ≃ 10 cm Plexiglass or Water).

4.



G


CA-1036R2


5.

Activate “Digital Prep” (--DIGITAL PREP signal = GND on TS3-7 Generator Cabinet). Hold “Digital Prep” and adjust the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier Tube with the potentiometer R12 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R23 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9 on the AEC Control Board until measure --400 VDC between TS1--39 and TS1--42 (GND) in the Generator Cabinet.

6.

The Dose is affected in the following manner:

7.

Note

.

Increases when the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier Tube is decreased. (Example: if 100 μR Dose is obtained with --400 VDC, 200 μR Dose may be obtained decreasing the high voltage to --300 VDC).

G

Decreases when the high voltage applied to the Photomultiplier Tube is increased. (Example: if 100 μR Dose is obtained with --400 VDC, 50 μR Dose may be obtained increasing the high voltage to --450 VDC).

Make an exposure and adjust the following potentiometer on the AEC Control Board: R12 for Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 or R23 for Board A3012--x6/x7/x9 on the AEC Control Board; until getting a Dose around 100 μR per frame (at 9” FOV) (for more information refer to the Image System documentation).

If the photo tube voltage required is too low, decrease the AEC calibration number in the E23 Memory Location and repeat the process.

8.

CA-1036R2

G

Record the E23 Memory Location in the Data Book.

43


2.6.6

AEC OPTICAL DENSITY SCALE AEC is calibrated with “Density 0” selected (Normal Optical Density). The Optical Density can be increased or decreased in several steps. The variation percentage of the density scale is factory set at 25%. This variation can be set according to the customer preferences by changing the value stored in E12 Memory Location. This value applies to both tubes. Depending on the Console model, the range of the scale is “from --2 to +2” or “from --4 to +4” (optional ). The following tables show some examples for the variation percentage of the density scale with reference to the value stored in E12 Memory Location.

DENSITY SCALE FROM --2 TO +2 . VARIATION OVER NORMAL OPTICAL DENSITY (N)

E12 VALUE

--2

--1

0

+1

+2

5

N x 0.90

N x 0.95

N

N x 1.05

N x 1.10

10

N x 0.80

N x 0.90

N

N x 1.10

N x 1.20

25

N x 0.50

N x 0.75

N

N x 1.25

N x 1.50

NOTE: If the value stored in E12 Memory Location is 0, 25 or 255, the variation percentage is 25%.

DENSITY SCALE FROM --4 TO +4 (OPTIONAL) . VARIATION OVER NORMAL OPTICAL DENSITY (N)

E12 VALUE

--4

--3

--2

--1

0

+1

+2

+3

+4

5

N x 0.82

N x 0.86

N x 0.91

N x 0.95

N

N x 1.05

N x 1.10

N x 1.16

N x 1.22

10

N x 0.68

N x 0.75

N x 0.83

N x 0.91

N

N x 1.10

N x 1.21

N x 1.33

N x 1.46

25

N x 0.41

N x 0.51

N x 0.64

N x 0.80

N

N x 1.25

N x 1.56

N x 1.95

N x 2.44

NOTE: With scale from “--4 to +4” the useful range for the value stored in E12 Memory Location is from 1 to 25 .

Record the value for E12 Memory Location in the Data Book.

44

CA-1036R2


2.7

FLUORO CALIBRATION This generator uses Pulsed Fluoro at fixed or variable rate. This technique is a series of short exposures at the TV frame rate (fixed rate) or at the selected PPS (variable rate). Fluoro exposures are controlled by kV with a constant filament current. The kV values are manually (Manual mode) or automatically (ABC mode) adjusted to obtain the desired brightness (entrance dose rate) on the Image Intensifier. The Fluoro calibration consists of setting values in the corresponding Extended Memory Locations for Fluoro use. The following table indicates the relationship between Fluoro and Extended Memory Locations.

FUNCTION

MEMORY LOCATIONS

Fluoro Filament Setting

E17

Maximum Fluoro kV

E19

Fluoro mA Display Calibration at 50 kV

E25


E26


E27

The functions of these extended Memory Locations are: •

E17 is used to store data that controls the Maximum Skin Dose Radiation at the following maximum levels (Regulation limits) (1 Rad = 8.7 mGy). G

5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) for systems working with Manual mode (Non-ABC).

G

10 R/min (87 mGy/min) for systems working with Automatic mode (ABC).

Note that in practice, the rejection limits for entrance exposure rate must be somewhat less than the maximum specified due to Dosimeter calibration accuracy. (Refer to Table 2-2.) Table 2-2 Rejection Limits Based on Meter Calibration Accuracy REJECTIONS LIMITS

METER CALIBRATION ACCURACY

FOR 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) MAXIMUM

FOR 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) MAXIMUM

±5%

4.75 R/min (41.3 mGy/min)


±10%



±15%

4.25 R/min (37 mGy/min)


CA-1036R2

45


Note

•

E19 is used to set maximum Fluoro kV. This value is determined by the type of TV camera and type of images desired. For general fluoroscopic use with a conventional TV system, 120 kV is recommended. A lower maximum setting will produce more contrast on the TV system but less penetration for large patients.

•

E25, E26, E27 are used to calibrate the Fluoro mA Display. These values will be shown on the Fluoro mA Display during Fluoro exposures whenever maximum PPS are selected.

.

The Fluoro mA Display values entered into the Extended Memory Locations E25, E26 and E27 are also used to calculate Heat Units. It is important to enter accurate values.

Fluoro functions are calibrated by performing the following steps: 1.

Turn the generator ON.

Make sure that the Small Filament of the X-ray tube is properly warmed-up (at less 15 minutes).

2.

Set up a Dosimeter to measure the Maximum Entrance Skin Exposure Dose Rate. Position the Probe at the center of the primary beam with the entire active volume within the primary beam. Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly as close as possible to the Table-Top, fully open the Collimator Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light beam. Block radiation input to Image Intensifier with a Lead Apron. (Refer to Illustration 2-4).

46

3.

Enter in “Manual Calibration” mode through a Fluoro workstation and read the Filament Number at 120 kV / 10 mA. Divide this value by four (4) and enter it as starting value for E17 Memory Location (Fluoro Filament Setting).

4.

Select E19 Memory Location and set the maximum Fluoro kV at 120 kV or more if it is possible.

5.

Enter in user mode inside calibration mode by pressing the “Go to User Mode” button and select the Fluoro Menu.

CA-1036R2


Illustration 2-4 Fluoro Entrance Exposure Rate Test Set-up

DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY

PROBE

SET AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE

30 cm (12”)

USEFUL BEAM

LEAD APRON (BLOCKER)

IMAGE SYSTEM

OVERTABLE SOURCE

IMAGE SYSTEM SPOT FILM DEVICE

USEFUL BEAM

LEAD APRON (BLOCKER)

PROBE TABLE TOP

DIAGNOSTIC SOURCE ASSEMBLY

UNDERTABLE SOURCE

CA-1036R2

47


6.

Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode. Make a Fluoro exposure at maximum kV that will be used in the system and measure the dose applied, it should not be over the Rejection Limits for 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) or 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) (refer to Table 2-2.). In case that the value is not acquired, change the Fluoro Filament Setting stored in E17 as required until it is correctly calibrated to that dose. Keep in mind that radiation increases or decreases in accordance to value in E17 is increased or decreased.

7.

The mA values displayed during Fluoro exposures are stored in E25, E26 and E27 Memory Locations. The method used to obtain the Fluoro mA values is to measure the average mA using a mA meter in Fluoro. During Fluoro exposure, mA values are read directly with a mA Meter in DC connected to the mA Test Points (banana plug connections) on the HV Transformer. Only for this purpose, remove the link between the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer. Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode. Make the following Fluoro exposures: G

Make a Fluoro exposure at 50 kV and take note below the mA reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at minimum kV (E25).

G

Make a Fluoro exposure at 80 kV and take note below the mA reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at medium kV (E26).

G

Make a Fluoro exposure at 120 kV and take note below the mA reading, this value will be used as Fluoro mA at maximum kV (E27). FL mA value at 50 kV (E25)

48

FL mA value at 80 kV (E26)

FL mA value at 120 kV (E27)

8.

Remove the Dosimeter and the Lead Apron (Blocker).

9.

Exit from the “User Mode” screen by pressing “Manual Calibration” button.

10.

Select E19 Memory Location if it is required to reduce the value for the maximum Fluoro kV in the installation.

11.

Select the E25, E26 and E27 Memory Locations and store the respective mA values noted before multiplied by 10 (a.e. if the mA value noted is “3.2”, store the value “32” in the respective Memory Location).

12.

Record the new values in the Data Book.

13.


CA-1036R2


2.8

ABC CALIBRATION The purpose of the ABC System is to maintain an optimum constant Image Tube Output Brightness by controlling the X-ray kV during Fluoro exams, regardless of changes in the patient opacity viewed on the TV monitor. The closed-loop ABC System can monitor the Image Tube Output Brightness through two ways: Photomultiplier Tube or TV Camera.

2.8.1

ABC SYSTEM WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE

Note

.

This operation requires the AEC Control Board A3012--x6/x7/x9 (Digital version).

On this system the Photomultiplier current signal, which is proportional to the Image Tube Output Brightness, is used as brightness signal “PT Input” for the ABC circuitry of the Generator. (Refer to Illustration 2-5). This analogic signal is converted to a voltage signal in the Photomultiplier Amplifier Board and sent to a peak-detector in the AEC Control Board. The peak signal obtained is then held through a “Sample and Hold” circuitry after a synchronism pulse. The peak signal held is adapted to obtain finally the “ABC IN” signal which is so the Photomultiplier signal-peak held between synchronism pulses. This signal is then compared to a window reference. Brightness error at the comparator output is sent as “kV Up” and “kV Down” to the Generator where is used to drive the Fluoro kV control. The closed-loop operation requires more or less brightness thru “kV Up” and “kV Down” demand signals respectively. Patient Entrance Dose is automatically varied so that optimum constant Image Tube Output Brightness is maintained.

CA-1036R2

49


The optimum brightness level in ABC mode is set by adjusting Brightness Control Resistor R13 on the AEC Control Board, which controls the output of the Photomultiplier Tube High Voltage power supply on the Interface Control Board (“PT CRL” plus 5 volts programs the output to be 0 volts, and 0 volts programs the output to approximately --1200 volts). The window comparator requires an input range from 0 to +10 VDC for the “ABC IN” (the optimum brightness level will be achieved with a value between 5 and 7 VDC).

Illustration 2-5 ABC System for Photomultiplier Tube

PT SPLY (Photomultiplier Voltage supply)

VIDEO

MONITOR AEC CONTROL PCB BRIGHT. LEVEL ADJ.

TV CAMERA

R13

PHOTOMULTIPLIER PHOTOMULTIPLIER AMPLIFIER BOARD (A3168--xx)

LIGHT

FL

PT INPUT (Brightness signal)

U2

BUFFER U12

PT CRL

I/V CONVERTER U10

PEAK DETECT.

SAMPLE & HOLD

WINDOW ADJ. R11 -- R14

U8 WINDOW COMPARATOR

CONTROL CONSOLE

IMAGE TUBE

KV UP & KV DWN

PATIENT X-RAY TABLE HV TRANSFORMER X-RAY TUBE

50

HT CONTROL PCB

INTERFACE CONTROL PCB

POWER MODULE

CA-1036R2


Window reference could be adjusted first to set mid-way the brightness level (+5 VDC), and second to increase or decrease the range of response and sensitivity of the kV control to input variations (brightness changes). If oscillation occurs during ABC fluoro exposure, increase the dead zone by adjusting Resistors R11 and R14 on the AEC Control Board. (Refer to Illustration 2-6 for ABC waveforms).

ABC IN (U8--8)

window reference

Illustration 2-6 ABC Waveforms in AEC Control Board

--kV Down (J1--19)

DWN PT reference (R11) Brightness level (Gain adj.)

UP PT reference (R14)

High Logic Command to drive the fluoro kVp DOWN

Low Logic

--kV UP (J1--6) Command to drive the fluoro kVp UP

Adjust the ABC system for Photomultiplier Tube as follow: 1.

Be sure that the Video System and the Image Intensifier are powered and operating correctly.

2.

Set up a Dosimeter as close as possible to the Image Intensifier Radiation Input to measure the Entrance Image Intensifier Exposure Dose Rate. Position the Probe at the center of the primary beam with the entire active volume within the primary beam. Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly at the normal SID (1 meter), fully open the Collimator Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light beam.

CA-1036R2

51


3.

Adjust TV Camera gain for 1 volt peak-to-peak composite video output.

4.

Select the maximum PPS and Non-ABC mode.

5.

Place 2 mm of Copper (or equivalent homogeneous phantom) in the Collimator Filter Holder.

6.

Calculate the value of the optimum radiation (that will give optimum brightness) usually is 2μR/frame at 9” FOV (for more information refer to Image System documentation). Examples: For 25 frame/second optimum radiation is 3 mR/min. 2 μR/frame x 25 frame/s = 50 μR/s. 50 μR/s x 60 s/min = 3000 μR/min = 3 mR/min. For 30 frame/second optimum radiation is 3.6 mR/min. 2 μR/frame x 30 frame/s = 60 μR/s. 60 μR/s x 60 s/min = 3600 μR/min = 3.6 mR/min. The optimum radiation value should be measured at Image Intensifier Radiation Input. Intensifier grid should be removed, if it can not be removed, this value should be multiplied by two or by the value specified as Grid Absorption Factor.

7.

Note

52

.

Make a Fluoro exposure at 70 kV and measure the radiation. Optimum radiation is obtained by modifying the Fluoro kV or the Copper thickness in the Collimator Filter Holder. First modify the Fluoro kV, if it is more than 80 kV or less than 60 kV modify the Copper thickness in 0.1 mm (or 0.2 mm). Note the value of Fluoro KV and Copper thickness used to obtain the optimum radiation.

Radiation increases when kV is increased or Copper thickness is reduced.

CA-1036R2


8.

9.

CA-1036R2

Perform the following adjustments in the AEC Control Board: a.

Adjust R13 in order to obtain 6 VDC on TP3 (ABC IN).

b.

Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and increase 2 kV and check the increased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN) (if this value has not been increased, increase 1 kV more). Note this value (consider it as KV-DOWN-SEL).

c.

Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and decrease 2 kV and check the decreased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN) (if this value has not been decreased, decrease 1 kV more). Note this value (consider it as KV-UP-SEL).

d.

Obtain in TP1 the same voltage noted as kV-DOWN-SEL (DOWN PT) by adjusting the Potentiometer R11.

e.

Obtain in TP2 the same voltage noted as kV-UP-SEL (UP PT) by adjusting the Potentiometer R14.

Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) and ABC mode.

10.

Make a Fluoro exposure and check that the kV does not change.

11.

Stop the Fluoro exposure and select 40 kV. Make a Fluoro exposure and check that the kV value goes to 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-7.) ±2 kV without System problems.

12.


53


2.8.2

ABC SYSTEM WITH TV CAMERA The ABC can be performed with an Analogic Signal Output (ABC OUT) proportional to the brightness or with the Composite Video Signal Output from the TV Camera. The “ABC OUT” signal from the TV Camera is compatible with the Generator when the range is from 0 VDC (dark image) to 10 VDC (bright image) and the Optimum Brightness is achieved at around 6 VDC. When a TV Camera without a direct “ABC OUT” signal is used, the Composite Video signal (which amplitude is proportional to the image tube output brightness) is sent to an RF Adaptation Board where it is transformed into an “ABC OUT” analogic signal. In this case, the brightness level is taken from a rectangular window from the center of the raster. (Refer to Illustration 2-7). This analogic signal in the AEC Control Board (“PT Input” in Board A3012--x1/x2/x5 and “ABC OUT” in Board A3012--x6/x7/x9) is filtered, and compared to a window reference. Brightness error at the comparator output is sent as “kV Up” and “kV Down” to the Generator where is used to drive the fluoro kV control. The closed-loop operation requires more or less brightness thru “kV Up” and “kV Down” demand signals respectively. Patient entrance dose is automatically varied so that constant image tube output brightness is maintained.

Illustration 2-7 ABC System for TV Camera RF ADAPTATION BOARD

VIDEO OUT MONITOR

TV CAMERA

VIDEO IN

AEC CONTROL PCB

LIGHT

PT INPUT (Brightness signal)

ABC OUT

FILTER R5 -- C11

WINDOW COMPARATOR U8

WINDOW ADJ. R11 -- R14

CONTROL CONSOLE

IMAGE TUBE

KV UP & KV DWN PATIENT X-RAY TABLE HV TRANSFORMER X-RAY TUBE

54

HT CONTROL PCB POWER MODULE

CA-1036R2


The optimum brightness level in ABC mode is set by adjusting the gain at R27 on the RF Adaptation Board. The “ABC OUT” signal requires an input range from 0 to +10 VDC (the stabilized value will be between 5 and 7 VDC). Window reference could be adjusted first to set mid-way the brightness level (+6 VDC), and second to increase or decrease the range of response and sensitivity of the kV control to input variations (brightness changes). If oscillation occurs during ABC fluoro exposure, increase the dead zone by adjusting R11 and R14 on the AEC Control Board. (Refer to Illustration 2-8 for ABC waveforms) For system interface, refer to RF Adaptation Board. Adjust ABC System according to the following procedures.

ABC IN (U8--8)

window reference

Illustration 2-8 ABC Waveforms in AEC Control Board

--kV Down (J1--19)

DWN PT reference (R11) Brightness level (Gain adj.)

UP PT reference (R14)

High Logic Command to drive the fluoro kVp DOWN

Low Logic

--kV UP (J1--6) Command to drive the fluoro kVp UP

CA-1036R2

55


2.8.2.1

ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA COMPATIBLE WITH THE GENERATOR 1.


2.


3.


4.

Set Jumper JP21 to position B on the RF Adaptation Board.

5.


6.


7.


56

CA-1036R2


8.

Note

CA-1036R2

.



9.

Perform the adjustment for the window test as specified on the TV Camera manuals. This window defines the area of the image where the brightness will be captured for the ABC and it should be the 25% of the image area.

10.

Adjust the TV Camera to obtain +6 VDC (or the voltage supplied by the TV Camera as optimum brightness) on TP3 (ABC IN) on the AEC Control Board (Refer the TV Camera manuals).

11.



b.


c.


d.


12.

Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and ABC mode.

13.


14.


15.


57


2.8.2.2

ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH AN ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE GENERATOR 1.


2.


3.


4.

Set on the RF Adaptation Board, Jumpers JP21 to position “A” and JP20 to position “B” (for negative ABC signal) or to position “C” (for positive ABC signal).

5.


6.


7.


58

CA-1036R2


8.

Note

.


9.

CA-1036R2


Perform the adjustment for the window test as specified on the TV Camera manuals. This window defines the area of the image where the brightness will be captured for the ABC and it should be the 25% of the image area.

10.

Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and Non-ABC mode.

11.

Adjust R29 (OFFSET) on the RF Adaptation Board to have 0 VDC in TP7.

12.

Adjust gain at R27 (Gain) on the RF Adaptation Board to make the “ABC OUT” signal equal to +6 VDC. Measure “ABC OUT” in TP-7 of RF Adaptation Board or in TP3 (”ABC IN”) of the AEC Control Board.

13.


Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and increase 2 kV and check the increased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN). Note this value (consider it as KV-DOWN-SEL).

b.

Select 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and decrease 2 kV and check the decreased value of voltage in TP3 (ABC-IN). Note this value (consider it as KV-UP-SEL).

c.


d.


14.


15.


16.


17.


59


2.8.2.3

ABC SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT WITH NO ABC SIGNAL FROM TV CAMERA 1.


2.


3.


4.

Set on the RF Adaptation Board, Jumpers JP21 to position “A” and JP20 to position “A”.

5.


6.


7.


60

CA-1036R2


8.

Note

.



9.

Perform the adjustment for the window test. This window defines the area of the image where the brightness will be captured for the ABC. a.

Calculate the image area πr2 (clear circle on the monitor). (r=circle radius).

b.

Calculate the 25% of the image area ( πr2/4).

c.

Calculate the sides of the window: l =

d.

Mark the calculated area on the monitor (square).

e.

Position jumper JP18 of RF Adaptation Board in “A”. A window will be displayed on the monitor.

f.

Adjust in the RF Adaptation Board the following potentiometers to move the window under the frame marked on the monitor in step--d: -----

g.

CA-1036R2

πr2∕4 (I= side of square).

R1 potentiometer (vertical position) R2 potentiometer (vertical width) R3 potentiometer (horizontal position) R4 potentiometer (horizontal width)

Once the window is configured, place JP18 in “B” again at RF Adaptation Board.

10.

Select the 70 kV (or the kV obtained in step-8.) and Non-ABC mode.

11.

Adjust the gain at R27 on the RF Adaptation Board to make the “ABC OUT” signal equal to +6 VDC. Measure “ABC OUT” in TP7 of RF Adaptation Board or in TP3 (”ABC IN”) of the AEC Control Board.

61


12.

62



b.


c.


d.


13.


14.


15.


16.


CA-1036R2


2.9

FINAL CHECKS Verify that all Configuration and Calibration data have been properly stored in memory. 1.

Enter in calibration mode and check that the values noted for the “Filament Current Numbers” and “Extended Memory Locations” tables of the Data Book are the same that the values displayed and stored in memory. Press the “Read” button to read the stored values.

2.

Exit from calibration mode and Service mode.

3.

Turn the Generator OFF and verify position of dip switches on the HT Controller Board are:

4.

CA-1036R2

G

Dip switch 3000SW2-2 in “Off” position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).

G

Dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).

Set the Test dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in “Off” position to place the Generator in normal operating mode.

63



64

CA-1036R2

Technical Publication TR-1005R4

Troubleshooting HF Series Generators with Low or High Speed Starter

HF Series Generators Troubleshooting


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0

JAN 24, 2000

First edition

2

NOV 1, 2000

New edition

3

FEB 17, 2005

New error codes and procedures

4

APR 15, 2005

New Battery Charger






Note

TR-1005R4

.

Alert readers on pertinent facts and conditions. Notes represent information that is important to know but which do not necessarily relate to possible injury or damage to equipment.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1

2


1

1.1

Tools and Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

1.2


2

GENERAL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

2.1

Low DC Voltage Power Supplies Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

2.2

Microprocessors and General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

2.3

Replacement of Memory in ATP Console CPU Board and/or HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Procedures Related to the Push-button Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

2.4.1

APR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

2.4.2

APR Re-initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

2.4.3

APR Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

2.4.4

APR Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

Procedures Related to the Touch Screen Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

2.4

2.5

2.5.1

Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

2.5.2

Touch Screen Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

2.5.3

External Backup of the APR Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

Procedures Related to the Battery Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

2.6.1

Battery Charger Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

2.6.2

Identifying and Replacing Defective Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

Procedures Related To the Capacitor Assisted Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

23

2.7.1

Procedure for Storage Capacitors Discharging and Voltage Testing .

23

3

SELF-DIAGNOSIS INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

4

ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

5

CENTRAL LISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

107

5.1

HT Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

107

5.1.1

HT Controller Board (A3000--10/20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

107

5.1.2

HT Controller Board (A3000--30/33/34/35/36 & so) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

108

2.6

2.7

TR-1005R4

i


Section

ii

Page 5.2

Filament Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

109

5.3

Interface Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

109

5.4

LVDC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

5.5

Charge/Discharge Monitor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

5.6

Locks Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

5.7

ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

112

5.8

Fluoro CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113

5.9

Fluoro -- RF Adaptation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114

5.9.1

RF Adaptation Board (A3514--03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114

5.9.2

RF Adaptation Board (A3514--04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115

5.10 AEC Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

116

5.10.1 AEC Control Board (A3012--01/02/05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

116

5.10.2 AEC Control Board (A3012--06/07/09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

117

5.11 AEC Adaptation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118

5.12 LF-RAC Board (Low Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119

5.13 LV-DRAC (High Speed Starter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

5.13.1 Delayed Switch-off Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

5.13.2 Control DRAC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

5.13.3 Interface DRAC--HF Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

5.13.4 DRAC Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

5.14 Cabinet Miscellaneous for Line Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

122

5.15 Boards Related to Battery Powered Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123

5.15.1 Battery Charger Board (A3285--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123

5.15.2 Isolated Stand-Alone Control Board (A3138--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123

5.15.3 Energy Guard Board (A3264--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124

5.15.4 Line Monitor Board (A3139--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

124

5.16 Boards Related to Capacitor Assisted Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126

5.16.1 Capacitor Charger Board (A3517--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126

5.16.2 Line Selector Board (A3525--01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126

5.16.3 Line Selector Board (A3525--02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

127

5.16.4 Brake Board (A3567--01/02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

127

TR-1005R4


SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION The Generator contains many self-diagnostic routines which greatly facilitate troubleshooting. Self-diagnostic functions require that all microprocessors function correctly. Each microprocessor contains LEDs that indicate its correct operation. As a general rule, the first step in any troubleshooting procedure is to verify correct Power Supply Voltages and perform a visual inspection of all Boards and Cable connections. On arrival in the X-ray Room, the Service Engineer should carry out the following operations: •

If the Generator cannot be Powered up, run the troubleshooting for Error Code E01.

•

If the Generator can be Powered up: G

Check which Error Code is displayed on the Console and run the troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.

G

If it is not, try to reproduce the failure in the conditions reported by the Operator. It is possible that the Error Code displayed is different from either that indicated by the Operator. In all cases, run the troubleshooting routines for the last Error Code displayed.

When any major component, such as a X-ray Tube, HV Transformer or Circuit Board, is replaced in the system, perform the respective Configuration and Calibration procedures. If the HT Controller Board or the ATP Console CPU Board are replaced, check specially that Extended Memory data have not been lost or modified with the Board change. Compare Extended Memory data displayed on the Console with the values noted in the Data Book. If the HT Controller Board is replaced in the Power Module, transfer U3-EEPROM from the old Board to the new Board. U3-EEPROM contains calibration data and if U3-EEPROM is not transferred a complete Calibration must be performed. Also, make some exposures using different techniques and Focal Spot and check that mA stations are calibrated correctly, if not perform Calibration procedures. Update and record in the Data Book any new data entered in the Extended Memory Locations.

TR-1005R4

1


1.1

1.2

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED •

Standard service engineers tool kit.

•

Configuration and Calibration test equipment (refer to Installation document).

•

Antistatic Kit.

•

Oscilloscope (Tektronics 486 or similar).

GENERAL CAUTIONS

MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF, APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.



2

TR-1005R4


BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. WHEN IT DOES NOT WORK WITH STAND-ALONE, IT IS POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. WHEN IT WORKS WITH OPTIONAL STAND-ALONE IT IS POWERED ON IN ALL SITUATIONS. WHEN THE UNIT IS TURNED ON, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. KEEP THE PROTECTION COVERS IN PLACE ALL THE TIME, ONLY REMOVE THE COVERS TO PERFORM SERVICE OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CONTACTOR 6K5, LINE FUSES, BATTERY CHARGER BOARD, LINE MONITOR BOARD, BATTERY MONITOR BOARD, ENERGY GUARD BOARD AND STAND-ALONE BOARD) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE BATTERIES (APPROX. 400 VDC) ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THIS AREA.

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. IT IS POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS POWERED, THE NEON (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. KEEP THE PROTECTION COVERS IN PLACE ALL THE TIME, ONLY REMOVE THE COVERS TO PERFORM SERVICE OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CAPACITOR OF HV INVERTER, STORAGE CAPACITORS MODULE, LINE FUSES, DC BUS FUSES, ETC.) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE CAPACITORS (APPROX. 800 VDC), ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THIS AREA.

TR-1005R4

3



4

TR-1005R4


SECTION 2

2.1

GENERAL PROCEDURES

LOW DC VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY TEST The Generator operates from a Low DC Voltage Power Supply located in the Front Panel (MOD. 3) of the Generator Cabinet. (Refer to Illustration 2-1). Turn the Generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between: •

P2-3 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at this point is +5 ±0.2 VDC. If required, adjust voltage with the +5 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.

•

P2-2 (+) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at this point is +12 ±0.1 VDC. If required, adjust voltage with the +12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.

•

P2-1 (--) and P2-4 on the HT Controller Board. Check that the voltage at this point is --12 ±0.1 VDC (this voltage must be --12.7 ±0.1 VDC if the Console is provided with a Graphic Display). If required, adjust voltage with the --12 VDC Adjustment Potentiometer on the Power Supply Board.

Illustration 2-1 Power Supply in the Front Panel

R26 ADJ. +12 VDC

R25 ADJ. --12 VDC

R12 ADJ. +5 VDC

POWER SUPPLY BOARD

TR-1005R4

5


The ATP Console CPU Board operates from a 12 VDC Non-Regulated Supply located in the Generator Cabinet that supplies to a 5 VDC Switching Regulator located in the ATP Console CPU Board. Turn the Generator ON and with a Digital Multimeter measure between:

Note

2.2

•

TS1-30 (GND) and TS1-29 (+12 V Unr.) on the Generator Cabinet. Check that the voltage at this point is +12 ±1.5 VDC.

•

TP GND and TP +5 on the ATP Console CPU Board. Check that the voltage at this point is +5 ±0.2 VDC.

.

No adjustments are required for both voltage measures. The ATP Console CPU Board may be located inside the Console or inside the Generator Cabinet.

MICROPROCESSORS AND GENERAL OPERATION The following LEDs indicate the proper operation of each Microprocessor in the Generator: •

The LED DS1 located on the HT Controller Board blinks fast during power up, then slows to a steady blink of about 2 per second, indicating that the Microprocessor U5 is operating normally.

•

The LED DS2 located on the ATP Console CPU Board normally blinks at the same rate as LED DS1 on the HT Controller Board, indicating that the Console Microprocessor U30 is operating correctly.

•

The LED DS1 located on the Fluoro CPU Board only blinks in Fluoro mode indicating that the Fluoro Microprocessor is operating correctly.

Also observe the following LEDs to facilitate general troubleshooting:

6

•

When LED DS1 located on the Interface Control Board is ON (lighting), it indicates that the Generator is ON.

•

The LED DS1 located on the ATP Console CPU Board is normally ON (lighting), indicating that the Watch-Dog Timer of the Console is operating and insuring the correct timing of data communications with the HT Controller Board.

TR-1005R4


2.3

REPLACEMENT OF MEMORY IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND/OR HT CONTROLLER BOARD Before starting up the system, you have to set ON the switch A3024SW2--3 at the ATP Console CPU Board to enable Service Mode. A few seconds after pressing the ON button on the Console, you will see E10 (this is shown because the EPROM U24 has been replaced). Reset the error indication by pressing the respective button on the Console and keep it pressed until the Error 10 disappears. After this, the normal start up will take place. We recommend setting this switch back to OFF once the installation has been completed. This will not enable the operator to enter in Configuration or in Calibration Mode (Service Modes).

2.4 2.4.1

PROCEDURES RELATED TO THE PUSH-BUTTON CONSOLES APR OPERATION APR techniques are factory pre-programmed to standard techniques sets. All parameters of APR techniques may be manually rewritten as required by the operator and stored in the ”APR working file” for later use (refer to the respective Operator Manual).

Note

.

This section only applies to Consoles equipped with Anatomical Programmer (APR).

Illustration 2-2 APR Module version in Push-buttons Consoles

1

2

3

4

1

5

2

Display APR

5

TR-1005R4

6

7

3

8

4

6

Display APR

7 8

7


2.4.2

APR RE-INITIALIZATION The APR re-initialization makes a new copy of the factory pre-programmed parameters of the APR techniques in the U23-NVRAM of the ATP Console CPU Board. APR re-initialization set the APR techniques only for the selected workstation. To re-initialize the APR techniques, exit the APR mode and press simultaneously the push-buttons 5-6-7-8 on the APR module. (Refer to Illustration 2-2).

The APR re-initialization deletes all the APR parameters and related selections previously modified and stored by the operator for both X-ray Tubes.

2.4.3

APR BACKUP The APR backup makes a copy of the parameters and selections of the APR techniques stored in the U23-NVRAM to the U18-E2PROM of the ATP Console CPU Board. This action make a copy of all the APR techniques stored in the “APR working file” to the “APR backup file” . The APR backup is automatically performed when the equipment is turned OFF/ON, whenever any APR technique has been modified and stored in the U23-NVRAM by the operator. To backup the APR techniques, exit the APR mode and press simultaneously push-buttons 1-5-6 of the APR module. (Refer to Illustration 2-2).

2.4.4

APR RESTORE The APR Restore makes a copy of the parameters and selections of the APR techniques stored in the U18-E2PROM to the U23-NVRAM of the ATP Console CPU Board. This action replaces the data stored in the “APR working file” by the data stored in the “APR backup file” for all the APR techniques. The APR Restore is automatically performed when the Console is turned OFF-ON, whenever any problem had been detected during the U23-NVRAM checksum. To restore the APR techniques, turn the Console ON and with the APR mode OFF press simultaneously the push-buttons 4-7-8 of the APR module. (Refer to Illustration 2-2).

8

TR-1005R4


2.5

PROCEDURES RELATED TO THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES

DESCRIPTION

The Console and the Generator do not start up.

POSSIBLE CAUSES

ACTIONS

Malfunction of the Power-ON button.

Check if the button works properly.

Cable connection or cable status.

Check that all the internal cable are connected. (A7031--xx Cable)

Generator / Console is not connected to mains.

Power ON the Generator / Console. Check all the power connectors from/to the power supply (power values are +5V and +12V).

Power Supply does not work properly. Check the power input selector, change the power supply (Kit Power Supply) if the selector is wrong. Connect again this cable. The Console starts but the Generator do not start.

The Console beeps before start.

There is no image on the screen.

The operator application is not launched

Upper fans are stopped

Touch panel. If you push a button, and nothing happens, or another button is selected

TR-1005R4

Cable A7067--xx is not properly connected

Check all the cables to the board. If the problem persist, change the A3515--02 board (you should also check the connection to the Generator)

BIOS error. If there is a problem with the video chipset the beep code will consist of a single long beep followed by three short beeps

Disconnect the power connector. Wait ten seconds and connect it again. Push the power button and if the problem persists, replace the mainboard.

BIOS error. If there is a problem with the DRAM, the beep code will consist of a single long beep repeatedly.

Check that the DRAM is connected right. If so, try to reboot the system, and if the problem persists, replace the mainboard.

The TFT inverter is not working properly.

First check that the fans are working. If so, check that cable 55001042 is right connected. Replace the inverter if the problem persists.

Cable 55001042 is broken.

Try to move the cable. If the screen suddenly bright, replace Kit TFT Screen TPC 12”.

Mainboard is broken.

Replace the mainboard. If the problem persists, replace the whole Console.

The operating system is not working properly.

Replace the Compact Flash Card.

Power cable is broken

Check the power cable. If it is broken, replace the power supply

Fan broken

Change the kit fans Console

Calibration error of the touch panel controller

Check the calibration process.

Touch panel controller is broken.

Check that there is a blinking led in the controller. If not, check the power supply. If it is correct, replace the Controller. When the panel is pushed, the led is on continuously. If not, replace the kit TFT Screen TPC 12”. If the problem persists, replace the Kit PC GESPAC.

9


2.5.1

SOFTWARE UPGRADE If the Touch Screen Application is provided with a “Software Upgrade” button on the Service Mode Menu, it is used to close the Application Program without turning OFF the System. After pressing this button, the Console shows the PC Desktop to enable the Application Software Upgrade, Language Configuration of the PC Operating System or Touch Screen Sensor Calibration.

Note

.

To perform any of these operations, it is necessary to connect a Keyboard to the connector labelled “Kb” on the back side of the Touch Screen Console. Please, make sure that the Keyboard connector is suitable (MiniDin type).

2.5.2

TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR CALIBRATION If required to calibrate the Sensor of the Touch Screen because the buttons can not be properly selected or because the Compact Flash has been changed, perform the next procedure:

10

1.

Enter in “Service Mode” and press the “Software Upgrade” button.

2.

On the PC Desktop, press the“Start--Windows” button on the keyboard connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: “Programs / UPDD / Calibrate”.

3.

Execute the “Calibrate” program and follow the process clicking on the indicated places.

4.

When finish this calibration, come back to the Application by entering again in “Start” and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console”.

TR-1005R4


2.5.3

EXTERNAL BACKUP OF THE APR TECHNIQUES 1.

Connect a Laptop (PC) to the Touch Screen Console with a serial cable (DB9 with female pins on both ends; on one end Pin 2 connected with Pin 3; on the other end Pin 2 connected with Pin3; Pin 5 connected with Pin 5). Connect the serial cable to port “COM4” of the Touch Screen Console and any free port on the Laptop (PC).

2.

On the Laptop (PC): a.

Select: “StartMenu / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Hyperterminal / hypertrm.exe”.

b.

Once the Hyperterminal is opened on the Laptop (PC), configure the connection. For that select on the Menu bar: File --> Properties --> Connect using: COM * (selected free port) Configure -->

Bits per second: 115200 Data Bits: 8 Parity: None StopBits: 1 Flow Control: None

c.

Then press “OK” and “OK”.

d.

Select on the Menu bar: Transfer --> Receive File on this window select: Place received file in the following folder: (choose a folder in the Laptop) Use receiving protocol: Xmodem

e. 3.

TR-1005R4

Let that window open without pressing “Receive”, by the moment.

On the Touch Screen Console: a.


b.

Press the “Start--Windows” button on the keyboard connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: “Programs / accessories / hyperterminal / PORT4.ht”.

11


c.

Once the Hyperterminal is opened on the Touch Screen Console, configure the connection. For that select on the Menu bar: File --> Properties --> Connect using: COM4 Configure -->

Bits per second: 115200 Data Bits: 8 Parity: None StopBits: 1 Flow Control: None

d.

Then press “OK” and “OK”.

e.

Select on the Menu bar: Transfer --> Send File on this window select: Filename: C:\ program files\Rad_Console (this name can be different) \APR_English.ini (or APR_French.ini, or APR_Spanish.ini, or APR_German.ini, or APR_Italian.ini, or APR_Portuguese.ini, according to the APR language previously selected on the Settings / Settings Menu.) Use sending protocol: Xmodem

f.

12

Let that window open without pressing “Send”, by the moment.

4.

Press “Reveice” on the Laptop (PC) window. It will ask for the name to save the file: Type “APR_English.ini” (or APR_French.ini, or APR_Spanish.ini, or APR_German.ini, or APR_Italian.ini, or APR_Portuguese.ini, according to the APR language previously selected on the Settings / Settings Menu.)

5.

Press “Send” on the Touch Screen window.

6.

Wait until the transference is complete (this can take a few minutes)

7.

When the transference is complete, close the Hyperterminal application in the Laptop and Touch Screen Console. Disconnect the serial cable.

8.

On the Touch Screen, press the“Start--Windows” button on the keyboard and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console”, to come back to the Application.

TR-1005R4


SECTION 3

SELF-DIAGNOSIS INDICATORS Some Console are provided with Self-Diagnosis indicators that identify a malfunction in the system alerting operator about error existence that inhibits exposure. During normal operation of the system, these indicators are directly shown on the Console (depending on the Console model they can be shown on the APR Display, Console Indicators, Warning Messages Area, etc).

DOOR

G.OVL

DOOR OPEN: Indicates the X-ray room door is open when the X-ray equipment is in use. (Also refer to Error Code “E35”).

GENERATOR OVERLOAD: Indicates that the exposure has been interrupted because during exposure has been produced arcing or bad function on the HV circuitry (X-ray Tube, HV Transformer and/or HV Cables) or a failure of IGBT module (overheated or defective IGBTs) has been detected. (Also refer to Error Code “E09”). It can be also shown making a high power and long exposure with the X-ray tube cool (X-ray Tube has not been warmed-up).

T.OVL

TUBE OVERLOAD: Indicates that either the technique selected is beyond the X-ray tube ratings or the present conditions of the X-ray tube inhibit the exposure (anode overheated). Parameters for next exposure may be temporally limited by the Generator (change the exposure values or wait for the X-ray tube to cool). (Also refer to Error Code “E37”). Check that heat units available are lower than the calculated for the next exposure. Reduce exposure factors or wait for the X-ray tube to cool.

ROTOR

HEAT

TR-1005R4

ROTOR ERROR: Indicates that the X-ray tube anode is not rotating while “Prep” is active, then exposures are inhibited. (Also refer to Error Code “E18”).

HEAT: Indicates that the X-ray Tube thermostat / pressurestat is open due to overheating of the tube housing (housing is too hot, wait for the housing to cool) or to a thermostat / pressurestat mal-function (housing is cool). Heat units may raise to any value. (Also refer to Error Code “E36”).

25


TECHNIQUE ERROR: If it activates during exposure it means that: TECH The exposure has been interrupted by the “Security Timer” because of a system failure. Call Field Service. (Also refer to Error Code “E34”).

This error can also be shown:

26

•

after an APR technique selection to advise that exposure parameters displayed on the Console are not the values stored for this APR technique. Exposure parameters are adapted by the Generator to another enable values. (Also refer to Error Code “E34”).

•

after the “ABC” selection, when ABC is not enable. (Also refer to Error Code “E34”).

•

if a failure on the Automatic Collimator has been detected (blades are full open or in movement during exposure, etc.). In this case the indicator light will blink. (Also refer to Error Code “E48”).

TR-1005R4


SECTION 4

ERROR CODES

ERROR CODE LIST ERROR CODE “ -- -- -- -- -- -- ”

DESCRIPTION SYSTEM FAILURE. FATAL ERROR.

E01

FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN HT CONTROLLER BOARD AND ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD.

E02

FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. RAD GENERATOR CONFIGURED AS R&F GENERATOR. NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND FLUORO CPU BOARD.

E03

FAILURE IN POWER UP ROUTINE. ALL WORKSTATIONS ARE UNCONFIGURED.

E04

“PREP” SIGNAL RECEIVED WITHOUT CONSOLE ORDER.

E05

“FLUORO” SIGNAL ACTIVE WITHOUT REQUEST.

E06

“PREP” OR/AND “EXPOSURE” ORDERS ACTIVATED DURING POWER UP ROUTINE.

E07

WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-2.

E08

WRONG DATA FOR X-RAY TUBE-1.

E09

GENERATOR OVERLOAD. ARCING OR IGBT FAULT.

E10

EEPROM CORRUPTED OR NO INITIALIZED IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD OR IN HT CONTROLLER BOARD. WRONG DATA CALIBRATION.

E11

NO VOLTAGE IN CAPACITOR BANK.

E12

NO mA DURING EXPOSURE OR mA OUT OF TOLERANCE. WRONG FILAMENT CURRENT.

E13

NO kVp DURING EXPOSURE OR kVp OUT OF TOLERANCE.

E14

EXPOSURE SIGNAL WITHOUT X-RAY EXPOSURE CONSOLE COMMAND.

E15

NO CURRENT ON FILAMENT. WRONG SELECTION OF FOCAL SPOT DETECTED DURING “PREP”.

E16

INVALID VALUE OF: kVp, mA OR kW.

E17

COMMUNICATION ERROR BETWEEN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD AND HT CONTROLLER BOARD.

E18

ROTOR RUNNING WITHOUT ORDER OR ROTOR ERROR.

E19

mA DETECTED WITHOUT “EXPOSURE” ORDER.

E20

kVp DETECTED WITHOUT “EXPOSURE” ORDER.

E21

WRONG TUBE-1 SELECTION.

E22

WRONG TUBE-2 SELECTION.

E23

CALIBRATION DATA NOT STORED.

E24

THE BUCKY HAS NOT BEEN DETECTED TO BE MOVING.

E25

BATTERY FAILURE IN BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS.

E26

VOLTAGE FAILURE IN BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS WITH STAND-ALONE.

E27

FAILURE IN CONSOLE EPROM. BAD CHECKSUM.

TR-1005R4

27


ERROR CODE LIST ERROR CODE

28

DESCRIPTION

E29

ALL CLEAR SIGNAL NOT ACTIVE -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.

E30

RELAY K1 NOT ACTIVE -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.

E31

LONG EXPOSITION IS NOT INITIATED -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.

E32

LONG EXPOSITION IS NOT CUT AFTER 3.2 SECONDS -- NUCLETRON GENERATOR.

E33

NO COMMUNICATION BETWEEN GENERATOR AND SERIAL CONSOLE OR PC UNIT.

E34

TECHNIQUE ERROR.

E35

DOOR OPEN.

E36

HEAT UNITS. OVERHEATING.

E37

TUBE OVERLOAD.

E41

DOSIMETER -- COMMUNICATION FAILURE BETWEEN TUBE-1 DOSIMETER AND GENERATOR.

E42

DOSIMETER -- AUTOTEST ERROR ON TUBE-1 DOSIMETER.

E43

DOSIMETER -- TUBE-1 ION CHAMBER STATUS CHECK ERROR.

E44

DOSIMETER -- COMMUNICATION FAILURE BETWEEN TUBE-2 DOSIMETER AND GENERATOR.

E45

DOSIMETER -- AUTOTEST ERROR ON TUBE-2 DOSIMETER.

E46

DOSIMETER -- TUBE-2 ION CHAMBER STATUS CHECK ERROR.

E47

CAPACITOR ASSITED GENERATOR -- CAPACITOR NOT CHARGED WHEN “PREP”.

E48

COLLIMATOR ERROR.

E49

EXPOSURE CYCLE ERROR.

E50

INTERRUPTED EXPOSURE.

E51

DRAC -- CHECKSUM FAILURE OR EPROM CORRUPTED.

E52

DRAC -- MICROCONTROLLER RAM FAILURE.

E53

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT LOW LEVEL VOLTAGE (220 VAC).

E54

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC).

E55

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE DC BUS VOLTAGE AT HIGH LEVEL VOLTAGE (480 VAC OR 380 VAC).

E56

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE REFERENCE VOLTAGE.

E58

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.

E59

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.

E60

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.

E61

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM.

E62

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.

E63

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.

E64

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.

E65

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE LIST ERROR CODE

DESCRIPTION

E66

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.

E67

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.

E68

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.

E69

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 3300 RPM.

E70

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.

E71

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.

E72

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.

E73

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING RUNNING AT 10000 RPM.

E74

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.

E75

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.

E76

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.

E77

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 3300 RPM.

E78

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.

E79

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.

E80

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN AUXILIAR WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.

E81

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN MAIN WINDING BRAKING AT 10000 RPM.

E82

DRAC -- WRONG X-RAY TUBE SELECTION.

E83

DRAC -- EXCESSIVE CURRENT IN DC BRAKE.

E84

DRAC -- INCORRECT TUBE SELECTION SIGNAL.

E85


E86


E87

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 3300 RPM

E88

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 3300 RPM

E89

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE DURING ACCELERATION UP TO 10000 RPM

E90

DRAC -- INSUFFICIENT CURRENT IN COMMON WIRE RUNNING AT 10000 RPM

E91

DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IPRINC (CH2)

E92

DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT IAUX (CH3)

E93

DRAC -- INCORRECT MEASURE AT ICOM (CH4)

E95

RAPID TERMINATION

E96

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR -- VOLTAGE MISSING

E97

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR -- VOLTAGE IN CAPACITORS NOT BALANCED

E98

DIP SWITCH 3024SW2-3 IN ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD SET FOR CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION MODE ACTIVE (SERVICE MODE).

TR-1005R4

29


ERROR CODE :

“-- - - - - - ”

DESCRIPTION :

System failure.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal error. Generator must be switched off.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

This indication may appear at any time together with another Error Code on the Console.

INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :

This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed.

ACTIONS 1.

ERROR CODE :

Turn the Generator OFF, wait a few seconds and turn it ON.

E01

DESCRIPTION :

Failure in power up routine. No communication between HT Controller Board and ATP Console CPU Board.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal error. Generator can not continue with power up.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

Only during initialization phase. If it appears during normal functioning of equipment, it means that a problem has caused a power off in the Console.


This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures. If Led 1 of the HT Controller remains lit, it means that HT Controller has not been started.

POSIBLE CAUSES The Console has been suddenly switched OFF by operator or by a shut-off on the line. The Microprocessor U5 on the HT Controller Board has not started-up. The communication between ATP Console Board and HT Controller Board is not reliable.

ACTIONS

30

1.

Check DC supplies.

2.

Check the software version in case of update or change the ATP Console or HT Controller Boards. Check and replace if necessary U5 in HT Controller and U24 on ATP Console Board.

3.

Check continuity between terminals 2, 3, 5 and 6 on J3 of ATP Console Board and P1-4, P1-11, P1-15, P1-10 of HT Controller Board. Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.

4.

Switch OFF, wait a few seconds and switch ON again to reset the Error Code.

5.

If not fixed after previous steps, check Led DS1 in HT Controller Board when powering the equipment, if it has not turned off, replace HT Controller Board.

6.

If Led DS1 is off, check with an oscilloscope the following signals: HT-C CLK, HT-C DAT, C-HT CLK and C-HT DAT in order to find a possible defective component at any of both Boards (HT Controller and ATP Console). Replace the Board where the defective component is found.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E02

DESCRIPTION :

Failure in power up routine. RAD Generator configured as R&F Generator. No communication between ATP Console CPU Board and Fluoro CPU Board.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :

R&F Generators or Generators configured by mistake as R&F.

APPEARS WHEN :



This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and Fluoro CPU Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES A RAD Generator has been configured by mistake as a R&F Generator. See Configuration Section. The communication between ATP Console Board and Fluoro CPU Board is not reliable. The Fluoro CPU Board does not work properly.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check Communication Cable between J4 of ATP Console and J4 of Fluoro CPU Boards.

2.

Check and replace if necessary U12 in Fluoro CPU Board.

3.

If Fluoro values are not displayed on the Console, check DC supplies and Fluoro CPU Board. Replace Fluoro CPU Board if necessary.

E03

DESCRIPTION :

Failure in power up routine. All workstation are unconfigured.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :



This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make Exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES All workstations have been configured as tube=0. The EEPROM (U18) in ATP Console Board is defective. The ATP Console Board is not able to communicate with U18.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual.

2.

Change U18 and configure the workstations as referred in Service Manual.

3.

If not fixed after previous steps, replace ATP Console Board and configure the workstations.

31


ERROR CODE :

E04

DESCRIPTION :

“Prep” signal received without Console order.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment once initialization phase is over.


This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards.

POSIBLE CAUSES The Generator receives the “Prep” signal without a Console command.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check continuity between P1-3 in HT Controller Board and J3-4 in ATP Console Board. Check with special care connector 6J3 of the Generator.

2.

If all is correct, check signal from P1-3 to U5 in HT Controller Board.

3.

If the signal is OK, replace HT Controller Board.

E05

DESCRIPTION :

“Fluoro” signal active without request.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal error. Generator can not continue with Power up.

APPLICABLE TO :

R&F Generators or Generators configured by mistake as R&F.

APPEARS WHEN :

Only during initialization phase.


This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and Fluoro CPU Boards during power ON and the Generator is not able to make exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES The Generator receives the “Fluoro” signal without Console command. “Exp” has been pressed in a Workstation not configured for standard R&F.

ACTIONS

32

1.

Check an unwilling press on the Fluoro pedal.

2.

If not the case, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 in ATP Console Board.

3.

Then, check signal -FL EXP in ATP Console Board.

4.

If the Signal is OK, replace the ATP Console Board.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E06

DESCRIPTION :

“Prep” or/and “Exposure” orders activated during power-up routine.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Generator re-start automatically once error is solved.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment once initialization phase is over.


This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards.

POSIBLE CAUSES The Generator has been detected “Prep” or “Exposure” signals during initialization.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

In Generators equipped with “Prep” and “Exposure” keys on the Console, check that not object is activating the function. Also check for possible damages on keys.

2.

Check damages on flat cable with connector J9.

3.

In Generators with external Handswitch, check contacts, cable and connectors.

4.

If the error remains, check continuity between TS1-37 and J2-17 in ATP Console Board and TS1-36 and J2-4 also in ATP Console Board.

5.

If not solved yet, replace the ATP Console Board.

E07

DESCRIPTION :

Wrong data for X-ray Tube-2.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :



This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON.

POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-2. Corrupted calibration data. Data on Extended Memory Location E18 are larger than the maximum allowed.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Check data in Extended Memory Location E18.

2.

If it is OK, replace U3 in HT Controller Board.

33


ERROR CODE :

E08

DESCRIPTION :

Wrong data for X-ray Tube-1.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :



This Error Code needs to turn OFF/ON the Generator to be fixed. It has not been possible to establish a correct communication between ATP Console and HT Controller Boards during power ON.

POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong configuration of X-ray Tube-1. Corrupted calibration data. Data on Extended Memory Location E02 are larger than the maximum allowed.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check data in Extended Memory Location E02.

2.

If it is OK, replace U3 in HT Controller Board.

E09 - GENERATOR OVERLOAD

DESCRIPTION :

Generator overload. Arcing or IGBT fault.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

During the exposure and In Stand-by,


This error may appear at the Console as “E09” Error Code or as a “Generator Overload” indication. During exposure an over current on the IGBT‘s of the HV Inverter Module has been detected. This may be produced by and arc or mal-function on the HV Circuitry. In stand-by, the Console is continuously displaying “E09” or “Generator Overload” due to a defective or overheated IGBTs Module.

POSIBLE CAUSES Symptom-1: G

Defective X-ray Tube.

G

Defective HV Transformer or HV Cable.

G

Defective IGBT module.

G

Defective HT Controller.

Symptom-2: G

34

Extremely high Duty Cycle on Rad and Fluoro operation.

TR-1005R4


ACTIONS A.

PRELIMINARY

1.

Select minimum kVp , minimum mA, and 80 ms (for example 40 kVp, 10mA, and 80 ms). Make preparation and check that anode rotates in the X-ray Tube. If the anode is not rotating correctly, check the starter and the Stator connections.

2.

In case the anode is rotating correctly, make an exposure:

3.

G

If “09” or “Generator Overload” appears follow procedure in paragraph B (Inverter Module Test).

G

If not, follow step-3.

Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select the same mA and time. Make an exposure: G

If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, or the exposure is cut before 80 ms, then follow procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).

G

If not, keep on increasing the kVp in 10 kVp steps (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 125 kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp for 150 kVp HV Transformers) making Exposures at each kVp selected. --

If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears or the exposure is cut before 80 ms at any kVp selected, follow procedure in paragraph C (HV Transformer Test).

--

If “E09” or “Generator Overload” has not appeared at the maximum kVp or the exposure was not cut before 80 ms , it means that HV Transformer and HV Cables are OK. Then follow the procedure in paragraph E. In this case high mA causes E09 or “Generator Overload”.

B.

INVERTER MODULE TEST

1.

Power off Generator and mains.

2.

Remove the cover from the Generator Cabinet.

3.

Wait for the DC Bus of the Inverter to be fully discharged. When it is fully discharged the Leds on the Charge-Discharge Monitor Board will be completely turned off.

4.

When Leds are off make a jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC--BUS--. Make sure that there is less than 10 VDC across the BUS. (Refer to Illustration 4-1 to see where to make the jumper).

5.

Measure with a Multimeter in Diode (or ohms) between C2E1 (positive polarity) and E2 or C1 (negative polarity) in both IGBTs (refer to Illustration 4-1 for more details). Repeat the measure with different polarity between C2E1 (negative polarity) and E2 or C1 (positive polarity). Voltage should be around 0.3 V (or the resistance must be a high impedance) for the IGBT to be OK. Normally when an IGBT is broken the voltage is = 0 volts (or the resistance is zero Ohms) or very close.

TR-1005R4

35


Illustration 4-1 Jumper and Measurement Points

Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS--

E2

C2E1

3-- PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR

Jumper between DC-BUS+ and DC-BUS--

E2

C2E1

1-- PHASE LINE POWERED GENERATOR, BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR OR CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR

36

TR-1005R4


6.

Note

Repeat the measurements done in point 5 for the other IGBT.

.

Don’t forget to remove the jumper across the DC Bus after all measurements are made, otherwise the Inverter will suffer serious damage.

7.

If any of the IGBTs are short-circuited, replace the IGBT.

8.

If both IGBTs are OK, remove both shielded cable that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer: P1, P3 and SHLD (P2) . Isolate the three wires completely from each other and from the metal sheet or ground. Make sure that wires are perfectly isolated and that no short-circuit is made otherwise serious damages could be produced.

9.

Set Dip-switch 3000SW2--2 in ON position at the HT Controller Board.

10. Turn ON mains and Generator. 11. Make an exposure:

Note

.

G

If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appear or the exposure has not been cut before 80ms, change (if possible) the whole Inverter. If it is not possible check capacitor C9 and choke L1 of the inverter (normally placed at the backside of the inverter). If both seem OK, change both IGBTS and IPM Drivers (Do not forget to re--connect both shielded cables to the HV Transformer (P1, P2 and P3).

G

If “E09” or “Generator Overload“ does not appear and the exposure has not been cut before 80 ms, re--connect both shielded cables to the H. Voltage Transformer (P1, P2 and P3). Follow the procedure in paragraph C (High Voltage Transformer Test).

At the end of an Exposure and right after releasing the Handswitch, error “E13” is shown on the Console (this is normal, reset and continue).

12. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-2 in OFF position at the HT Controller Board. Re-connect both shielded cables that connect the Inverter to the HV Transformer P1, P3 and SHLD (P2).

TR-1005R4

37


Illustration 4-2 Flowchart for B: Inverter Module Test

TURN OFF GENERATOR WAIT TILL INVERTER IS DISCHARGED MAKE A JUMPER DC--BUS+ AND DC--BUS-MEASURE AND CHECK

NO V¶ 0,3V

REPLACE IGBT

YES

REMOVE JUMPER DC--BUS REMOVE SHIELDED CABLES THAT CONNECT INVERTER TO THE HV TRANSFORMER SET 3000SW2-2=ON TURN ON GENERATOR & MAKE EXPOSURE

E09 OR EXPOSITION CUT ?

NO

RE--CONNECT H V TRANSFORMER AND INVERTER PERFORM C:HV TRANSFORMER TEST

YES

REPLACE INVERTER

38

TR-1005R4


C. 1.

HV TRANSFORMER TEST Connect the scope as follows: G

CH.1 on + mA (TP14) on HT Controller Board.

G

CH.2 on - mA (TP13) on HT Controller Board.

G

Base Time in 10 ms per division and 1 V per division

2.

Turn ON mains and Generator. Set Dip-switch 3000SW2-4 in ON position at the HV Controller Board. Select 50 kVp, 25 mA and 50 ms.

3.

Make an exposure and check that both waveforms are almost symmetric (a difference of ±10% is normal). G

If it is OK, follow procedure in step-4.

G

If it is not OK, check: --

that in the mA test point of the HV Transformer the jumper is securely placed and tighten.

--

that connector J1 is well placed and tighten in the HV Transformer.

--

continuity between J1-D and P4-7, J1-E and P4-6, J1-B and P4-2, and J1-C and P4-1. Check that they are well connected and tighten.

--

if after these actions the waveform is not OK, replace HV Transformer.

4.

Turn OFF Generator and mains.

5.

Remove HV Cables from the HV Transformer (anode and cathode) and fill the HV Receptacles with oil.

6.

On the HT Controller Board, make a jumper FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2).

7.

Turn ON mains and Generator. Select 50 kVp, 50 mA and 50 ms.

8.

9.

Connect the scope as following: G

CH.1 on + kV (TP11) on HT Controller Board.

G

CH.2 on --kV (TP12) on HT Controller Board.

G

Base time in 10 msec. per division and 2 V per division.

Make an Exposure and check that both waveforms are symmetric.

10. Make exposures from 50 kVp to 110 kVp with the same Exposure Time and check that all kVp waveform are symmetric and the values are similar according the table below.

TR-1005R4

Select

TP11 & TP12 on the HT Controller (Compact Generators)

50 kVp

2.1 V

70 kVp

2.9 V

90 kVp

3.7 V

110 kVp

4.5 V

130 kVp (only for 150 kVp HV Transf.)

5.3 V

39


11. Select the maximum kVp allowed (depending of the tube type) and maximum Exposure Time allowed but NEVER go over than 110--130 kVp. Make several Exposures and check that waveforms are correct. If the waveforms are not symmetric within ± 10% at any point, replace the HV Transformer. 12. Repeat the above procedure for the X-ray Tube-2 if the installation has two tubes. 13. If everything is OK, it means that HV Transformer is OK and the problem could be in X-ray Tube or in the HV Cables. To know when the Tube begins to arc follow procedure in parragraph D. In any case, X-ray Tube must be replaced. 14. Set in the HT Controller Dip-switch SW2 position 4 in OFF and remove jumper between FIL (TP8) and + 5 V (TP2).

D.

X-RAY TUBE TEST

Although after the performance of the above referred test everything is found OK, the Service Engineer may want to know the actual status of the tube. Perform the following procedure in order to determine the point in which the X-ray Tube begins to arc, it is strongly recommended to replace the tube as soon as possible to prevent potential damage to the Generator. 1.

Select minimum kVp and minimum mA and 100 ms.

2.

Make an exposure.

3.

Increment kVp in 10 kVp steps, select same mA and time. Make an exposure. G

If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears follow procedure in step C.1 (HV Transformer Test).

G

If not, keep on incrementing the kVp in steps of 10 kVp (60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 and 125 kVp for 125 kVp HV Transformers; and 130, 140, 150 kVp HV Transformers) making exposures at each kVp selected. --

If “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears at any kVp selected it means that the tube has dielectric problems above the selected kVp.

•

If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear up to maximum kVp, it means that arcing may be due to mA or kW, follow procedure in step-4.

4.

Select minimum kVp and minimum mA. Increment the mA one station and make an Exposure. Keep on incrementing the mA station (making exposures) until “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears. This will give an idea of the maximum mA allowed by the tube without arcing. If “E09” or “Generator Overload” does not appear follow step-5.

5.

If still the tube does not arc, the problem is related to kW=KV*mA. Make selections on the Console at 100 ms incrementing kV and mA. A point will be reached in which “E09” or “Generator Overload” will appear. This will give an idea on the approximate value of kVp and mA that can be handled by the X-ray Tube. Anyway, this value may change when the tube heats up.

E.

RANDOM “E09” OR “GENERATOR OVERLOAD”

If everything is OK and random “E09” or “Generator Overload” appears, check:

40

1.

That the signal IGBT FAULT on pin 3 of P5 on the HT Controller Board is not low (logic 0) in stand-by and during the exposure. If there is noise, check loose connection between pin 3 of P5 on HT Controller Board, and pin 4 of J2 in both IPM Driver Boards

2.

If IGBT FAULT is active during an exposure, try to isolate when it occurs. It may be due to noise coming from any device outside the Generator (Bucky, Fluoro devices, etc.). Or it may occur when selecting a high power Exposure and the voltage of the main line goes down more than 10% (in this case check the part number of the IPM Driver Board, it must be A3063-03 or greater).

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E10

DESCRIPTION :

EEPROM corrupted or not initialized in ATP Console CPU Board or in HT Controller Board. Wrong data calibration.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal Error during power up (when EEPROM U3 in HT Controller Board is corrupted or not initialized). Informative error during power up (when EEPROM U18 in ATP Console Board is corrupted or not initialized or when EPROM U24 in ATP Console Board has been changed). In both cases, “E10” appears together with “E34” Error Code or “Technique Error” indication.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :



Generator does not continue with start up.

POSIBLE CAUSES EEPROM U3 in HT Controller Board corrupted or no initialized. EEPROM U18 in ATP Console Board corrupted or no initialized. EPROM U24 in ATP Console Board has been changed.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

If EPROM U24 in the ATP Console Board has been replaced, reset the Error Code to acknowledge that the NVRAM has been initialized.

2.

If the error does not reset, turn the Generator OFF and set Dip-switch A3024SW2-3 in ON position to allow Service Mode. Turn the Generator ON and enter in workstations configuration and check as referred in Service Manual (do not forget to exit from Configuration mode to store the workstation configuration).

3.

If the problem is still present, and “E10” error appears together with “E34” Error Code or “Technique Error” indication, replace ATP Console Board.

4.

If the problem is still present and only “E10” error appears on the Console, replace HT Controller Board.

41


ERROR CODE :

E11

DESCRIPTION :

No voltage in the Capacitor Bank.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. “Prep” is not allowed.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

Only during initialization phase or when pressing “PREP”.


It was not possible to perform “Prep” or “Exp”.

POSIBLE CAUSES No voltage in the Capacitor Bank (5C1, 5C2, 5C3, 5C4) of the Generator Cabinet. Defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board. Precharge K6 contactor located inside the Generator Cabinet is not energized. Main line fuses F3 and/or F4 are blown off. “--CHRG” signal of pin 7 on connector P1 on HT Controller Board is not present. Exposition parameters selected above IGBT maximum current (only software versions before V2.R06) Cables disconnected accidentally or damaged connectors. Test Switch SW1 of the Generator Cabinet is in “Test” position (only for Factory use). This is only applicable to old Generators.

ACTIONS A.

IF LED DS1 IN CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR LIGHTS

Check Capacitors Voltage, •

•

42

If it is OK, check that P1-7 in HT Controller is at logic level “0”. (0.75 V for Generators with 1 Charge/ Discharge Monitor Board and 1.5 V for Generators with 2 Charge/Discharge Monitor Boards). G

If it is OK (logic level 0), replace HT Controller Board.

G

If it is not OK, check links between P1-7 in HT Controller Board and P1-2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1-1 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #1 and P1-2 in Charge/Discharge Monitor Board #2, --

If it is OK, replace defective Charge/Discharge Monitor Board.

--

If it is not OK, repair connection.

If voltage in capacitors is not OK, check VAC in AC1, AC2 and AC3 at Input Rectifier Board (for Battery Powered Generators check battery voltage). G

If VAC is not OK, verify input connections and input fuses.

G

If VAC is OK, disconnect BUS+ and BUS-- at Input Rectifier Board and check VDC. --

If VDC is not OK, replace defective component (CR1, CR2, CR3) at Input Rectifier Board.

--

If VDC is OK, check and replace defective component at Generator Cabinet.

TR-1005R4


B. •

IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS NOT A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR. Check input VAC in 6LF1, G

If VAC is OK, replace a defective component at Input Rectifier Board (CR2, CR3 or CR1).

G

If VAC in 6LF1 is not OK, check that contactor 6K5 is ON. --

If 6K5 is ON, check VAC in T1,T2 and T3 (in 6K5). -- If voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1. -- If voltage is not OK, replace the defective fuse (F3, F4 or F5).

•

If Contactor 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK. G

If it is not OK, check and/or replace 3F6 and 6T2.

G

If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC, --

if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.

--

If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board. -- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and “A” in 6K5. -- If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.

C.

IF LED DS1 LIGHTS AND IT IS A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.

Check Contactor 6K5, •

•

If 6K5 is ON, check output voltage of 6K5. G

If 6K5 output voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.

G

If 6K5 output voltage is not OK, check and replace 6F1, 6J1 and Andersen connectors.

If 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK. G


G

If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC in J3-10 at ATP Console Board, --

if --LINE CONT is OK, replace 6K5.

--

If --LINE CONT is not OK, check continuity in J3-10 at ATP Console Board. -- If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and “A” in 6K5. -- If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.

D.

IF LED DS1 DOES NOT LIGHT AND IT IS A BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR.

Check Contactor 6K5, •

•

TR-1005R4

If 6K5 is ON, check output voltage of 6K5. G

If 6K5 output voltage is OK, replace defective 6R1.

G

If 6K5 output voltage is not OK, check and replace 6F1, 6J1 and Andersen connectors.

If 6K5 is not ON, check if signal +24VPSU is OK. G


G

If +24VPSU is OK, check that signal --LINE CONT is at 0 VDC in J3-10 at ATP Console Board, --

If --LINE CONT is OK at ATP Console Board, repair connection between J3-10 and “A” in 6K5.

--

If --LINE CONT is not OK at ATP Console Board, replace ATP Console Board.

43


ERROR CODE :

E12

DESCRIPTION :

No mA during exposure or mA out of tolerance. Wrong filament current.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

After exposition.


Error 12 appears after the Exposure to alert the operator that the mA at the starting of the exposure has not been correct. During the first 10 ms the Generator applies constant filament current to the tube. This current is proportional to the current already calibrated for that mA station at the kVp selected for that Exposure (filament numbers). Near the end of these 10 ms, the HT Controller reads the mA and if they are found to be a 30% under or over of what has been selected, it sends error 12 to the Console.

POSIBLE CAUSES Calibration data for kVp and mA that produces E12 are not correct. The mA jumper on the HV Transformer is open, or it is not making good contact. The mA read at the beginning of the exposure is 50% of the correct value (because one branch is open). There is a problem on the reading of the mA. No correct heating prior to the Exposure. The filament has not reached its correct temperature and the mA at the starting of the exposure is low. It usually occurs when the “Prep” and “Exp” buttons are pressed down at the same time. Making an exposure immediately after getting out of calibration mode in extended memory. +5 VDC , +12 VDC or --12 VDC Power Supplies of HT Control Board (mesured at TP2, TP3 and TP4 of this Board) have excesive ripple or VDC measured is not correct.

ACTIONS 1.

Connect a scope to the following Test Points in the HT Control Board and check that the voltage is correct, if not adjust it with the respective Potentiometer in the Power Supply Board (refer to Section 2.1 - Low DC Voltage Power Supply Test): TP2 (+5 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R12 Pot. in the Power Supply Board. TP3 (+12 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R26 Pot. in the Power Supply Board. TP4 (--12 VDC) in HT Control Board is adjusted with R25 Pot. in the Power Supply Board.

2.

Check calibration data for the mA Open Loop (filament numbers) as stated in the Service Manual for all combination of kVp and mA when this error appears. With a scope connected to the Test Point TP5 (mA) in the HT Control Board check that the mA read is within the ratio of 1V=100 mA (± 5%) for V2 and V3 software versions, for V4 and up the ratio is 1V=10mA from minimum mA to 80 mA and 1V=100mA from 100 mA to the maximum rating. If it is not, the cause could be that the mA second test is not measuring right, or a wrong measurement performed in the Generator. (Refer to step 3).

44

3.

Check that the jumper in the mA test point of the HV Transformer is well placed and tighten.

4.

With a scope check that during the entire Exposure signals on the test point TP13 (--mA) and TP14 (+mA) on the HT Control Board connectors are symmetrical (± 10%). If one is found missing or not symmetrical, measure on pin 6 and 7 of J4 on the HT Control Board. If they are symmetrical on both points, the problem could be in the HT Control Board. If they are not correct, check that the connections made on the HV Transformer in J1-E, D, K terminals for Compact Generators (in TB1, terminals 1, 4 and 5 for no Compact Generators) are well connected and tighten. Also check that the GND wire is connected to the GND stud. If connections are correct the problem is in the HV Transformer.

TR-1005R4


5.

Connect a scope to the Test Point TP5 (mA) in the HT Control Board. Check that when an exposure is made by pressing at the same time the “Prep” and “Exp” controls, the mA at the beginning of exposure is low. Check that when the exposure is made by pressing first the “Prep” control and then the “Exp” control, the mA at the beginning of exposure is correct.

6.

For Low Speed Generators: G

7.

For High Speed Generators: G

ERROR CODE :

Reprogram the “Rotor Acceleration and Filament Setting Time” as stated in the Service Manual, one step over the time as it was before (a.e.: if it was 1.2 seconds, reprogram for 1.8 seconds) and check if boosting is well configured.

When performing the test for High Speed Generators check that the self-maintaining mode is not active. In order to check if the problem disappears, select the highest mA station for Small Focus and the lowest kVp allowed for this mA station (a.e. 40 kVp, 150 mA, SF). Make an Exposure by pressing at the same time the ”Prep” and “Exp” controls; check that the mA reading at the beginning of the Exposure is correct. Do the same for Large Focus (a.e. 50 kVp, 500 mA, LF). If it is found not correct, reprogram a step over at the time for each case, and test again.

E13

DESCRIPTION :

No kVp during exposure or kVp out of tolerance.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. May abort exposition.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

During and after exposures.


No kVp during exposure.

POSIBLE CAUSES

Note

.

This error assumes that the fault is not on the IGBT and is not due to arcing in the X-ray Tube. Defective HV Transformer. Defective HT Controller Board. Defective IPM Driver Boards. Poor connection on the IPM Driver Boards.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Check 5 VDC between P1-4 and P1-3 (GND) in both IPM Driver Boards.

2.

Check 115 VAC between pins 1 and 2 of connector P2 on the same Boards.

3.

If it is OK, check if the -kVp (TP12) and +kVp (TP 11) test points on the HT Controller Board are symmetrical. If they are not, check signals -- kV and + kV (in Compact Generators between P4-1 and J1-B at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and J1-C at HV Transformer) (in no Compact Generators between P4-1 and TB1-3 at HV Transformer and also between P4-2 and TB1- 4at HV Transformer) if they are OK, replace the HV Transformer.

4.

Check the connectors on the IPM Driver Boards. Check continuity in P3-1 (-kV DR1), P3-2 (--kVDR2) and those signals in IPM Driver Boards. Check with a scope in TP17 (1V=33.33kVp), if value is OK, replace HT Controller Board; if value is not OK, replace IPM Driver Boards.

5.

If kVp value and time is OK and “E13” appears, check that for software version V3 and up the Dip-switches of A3024SW3 are all in OFF position at ATP Console Board.

45


ERROR CODE :

E14

DESCRIPTION :

Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

During and after exposition.


Exposure signal without X-ray Exposure Console command.

POSIBLE CAUSES The “Exp” signal is grounding on the HT Controller Board.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Remove the connector J1 on HT Controller Board and check grounding of pin 6 of P1.

2.

If so, replace the HT Controller Board.

3.

If it is not, remove the connector J3 on the Console, and check pin 1 on connector J3 on the Generator Cabinet.

4.

If GND, replace the communication cable J3; if not, replace the ATP Console Board.

E15

DESCRIPTION :

No current on Filament. Wrong selection of Focal Spot detected during “Prep”.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Does not allow “Prep”.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment.


No current detected on Focal Spot (Filaments Off).

POSIBLE CAUSES A -- There is not supply in Filament Board or poor connection on the Cathode HV Cable or defective Filament Transformer inside the HV Transformer or defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (if the system is equipped with two tubes) B -- Wrong signal --FIL1 ACK

46

TR-1005R4


ACTIONS A. THERE IS NOT SUPPLY IN FILAMENT BOARD, OR POOR CONNECTION ON THE CATHODE HV CABLE, OR DEFECTIVE FILAMENT TRANSFORMER, OR DEFECTIVE HV SWITCH.

Note

.

For Generators with two tubes: - if the error appears in both tubes, go to step 1. - if the error appears in only one tube, interchange HV Cables. -

if error remains when selecting the same tube from Console, replace HV

Transformer, if does not appear go to step 8.

1.

Check through the X-ray tube window if the selected filament is On. Check both circuits to detect which one is causing the error code.

2.

If none lit when selected, check in the DC output on the BR1 rectifier (324 Dc approx.) or input voltage (220 VAC approx.). If input voltage is OK and output voltage is not OK, replace rectifier. If it is OK go to step 3.

3.

Check if the Led’s DS1 and DS2 are ON in the Filament Board. If they are not, replace the Board.

4.

If everything is OK, check DC voltage between P2-4 and P2-1 (324 DC approx.). If not enough voltage detected, review circuit between BR1 and T2 transformer. Replace Filament Board if defective.

5.

If it is OK, check the AC voltage between pin 4 on connector P3 on Filament Board Fil. Sup.) and pins 15 or 16 (depending on filament selection) on connector P4 on Interface Control Board. The range should be between 90 and 200 VAC.

6.

If not, check voltage in Pin 17 of connector P4 at Interface Control Board and Pin 4 of connector P3 at Filament Board, also Check P14and 14 of connector P4. If not, replace the Interface Control Board.

7.

If it is OK, check continuity between HV Transformer connector and Interface Board.

8.

If it is OK, check continuity of HV Cable connector (between common C and S (Small Focus) and between common C and L (Large focus). The OHM value should be very low in both cases ( 0.01 approx.)

9.

If it is OK, replace the HV Transformer. If it is not OK, check all connections from HV Cable to the tube. Replace cable if necessary.

10. If HV Cable is OK, check tube filaments. Replace Tube if necessary.

TR-1005R4

47


B.

WRONG SIGNAL - FIL1 ACK

Perform the following diagnosis if after pressing “Prep” the Error Code “E15” appears on the Console and after reseting it, the Console displays Error Code “E04”.

START

link P1-8 HT Controller

Check --FIL1 ACK at Interface Board in P1-8 at HT Controller. Is it ok?

YES

YES

& P4-22 Interface Board

NO

Replace

Press “Prep” and check - FIL1 ACK at Interface Board (P4-22). Is it Low Level?

NO

Check and REPAIR

YES

HT Controller Board

Check if K7 is active when selecting FIL1*. Press Prep? Is it active?

NOTES

NO

1) FIL1 is Small Focus in Tube1 and it is Large Focus in Tube2. 2) FIL1 SLC is activated when selecting FIL1 during Stand by for RAD Tubes. For R&F Tubes it is activated at “Prep”.

Replace

YES

NO

Interface Board

Check signal FIL1 SLC at P4-19 Interface Board. Is it at Low Level when selecting FIL1*?

Check and fix link P1-13 in HT Controller with P4--19 in

YES

Check Signal --FIL1 SCL in P1-13 at HT

NO

Replace HT Controller Board

Controll. Is it OK?

Interface Board

48

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E16

DESCRIPTION :

Invalid value of : kVp, mA or kW.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Does not allow “Prep” or “Exp”.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

In “Prep”


Selected mA or kVp are not correct.

POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong maximum kVp configuration. Wrong software compatibility on the Generator Cabinet and Console. When pressing “Prep” during calibration of Open Loop mA with a technique that overpasses the Generator power kVp/mA.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check the switch 5 of SW2 on HT Controller Board (125 kVp in open position and 150 kVp in closed position).

2.

Check the software version on U5 of HT Controller Board and U24 of ATP Console Board.

3.

Set calibration data manually as per calibration procedure table “mA calibration number change” at calibration section in this manual.

E17

DESCRIPTION :

Communication error between ATP Console CPU Board and HT Controller Board.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

Once initialization phase is over at any moment.


No communication between Console and Generator Cabinet.

POSIBLE CAUSES Defective communication cable between Console and Generator Cabinet (J3). Noise on the bucky circuitry. Defective HT Controller Board or defective ATP Console Board. The “Prep” signal from Console to HT Controller is short--circuited to ground.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Turn Generator OFF/ON.

2.

If E01 appears, follow procedure for E01.

3.

If E01 does not appear, it is an intermittent error due an external device, install a R--C filter in the power supply and at bucky start circuitry.

4.

If error persists, replace HT Controller or ATP Console Boards.

49


ERROR CODE :

E18 OR ROTOR ERROR

DESCRIPTION :

Rotor running without order or Rotor error.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment.


The X-ray tube is not rotating while “Prep” is active, then the exposures are inhibited or the X-ray tube anode is rotating without Console command.

POSIBLE CAUSES Defective relay K1 (solid State) on the low speed module. Signal –RTR on HT Controller Board is active. Defective HT Controller or Low Speed Control Boards. ± 12 VDC power supplies missing on HT Controller Board.

ACTIONS In Stand-by: 1.

Check if the signal RTR test point (TP6 on HT Controller ) is logic “0”. If yes, check if K1 works properly.

2.

If it is OK, check if the ± 12 VDC power supplies are correct.

3.

If it is OK, replace the H. T. Controller.

4.

If not logic “0” check K1 at Low Speed Module.

5.

If K1 defective, replace.

In “Prep”: (Rotor error/E18). When Console has not “ Rotor Error” indication , E18 Appears.

50

TR-1005R4


IF E18 OR ROTOR ERROR APPEARS IN “PREP” (ONLY FOR LF-RAC)

VISUALLY CHECK THAT ANODE IS TURNING WHEN PRESSING “PREP” DOES IT TURN?

CHECK TUBE STATOR

YES

VERIFY STARTER IS CONFIGURED TO CORRECT TUBE AND CAPACITOR INSTALLED. + VERIFY AT SIGNAL DELAYED +24V THAT LINE VOLTAGE IS TOO LOW -- THAT MAY CAUSE ROTOR ERROR OR E18. + CHECK WITH THE SCOPE SIGNAL RTRI AT TP6 HT CONTROLLER. SEE ILLUSTRATION BELOW.

NO

2.2 V

YES PREP CHECK LINK FROM TS2 TO TUBE STATOR IS IT OK?

YES

0.8

CHECK VAC IN TS2 -CONNECTIONSSTATOR

running

PRESSING “PREP” IS IT OK? t

NO REPAIR CONNECTIONS

tprep

NO

YES

REPLACE FUSE 6F6

CHECK SIGNAL +24 DELAYED IS IT OK?

NO

REPLACE K1 OR LF--RAC BOARD

TR-1005R4

YES

CHECK IF -START &--ACC ARE AT LOW LOGIC LEVEL WHEN PRESSING PREP

NO

REPEAT CONFIGURATION OF ROTOR ACCELERATION TIME FOR LOW SPEED

51


ERROR CODE :

E19

DESCRIPTION :

mA detected without “Exp” command.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal Error. Generator opens line contactor that remains in a endless loop. It is necessary to turn off the equipment.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

In stand-by or during initialization.


Current in tube without ”Prep” command.

POSIBLE CAUSES ± 12 VDC power supplies missing on the H. T. Controller Board. Defective H. T. Controller. mA signal on H T Controller is active.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check ± 12 VDC power supplies.

2.

Check a level logic “0” in TP5. Check also a level logic “0” in TP13, TP14 connector P4-6 y P4-7.

3.

If it is OK, replace the HT Controller or Filament Drive Boards one by one.

E20

DESCRIPTION :

kVp detected without “Exp” command.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

In stand-by or during initialization.


kVp detected without “Exp” command. When E20 appears on Console (E20) means that the error can not be solved without turning off the equipment.

POSIBLE CAUSES --12 VDC power supply missing. Defective HT Controller Board.

ACTIONS

52

1.

Check --12 VDC power supply.

2.

Check logic level “0” in TP7 and TP11, TP12, P4-1 and P4-2.

3.

If it is OK, replace HT Controller Board.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E21

DESCRIPTION :

Wrong Tube-1 selection.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.


Wrong tube 1 selection.

POSIBLE CAUSES The –HT INTLK is not grounding (tube 1 selection). Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option). The --HT INTLK is missing.

ACTIONS Only for one tube option (no Compact Generators): 1.

Check signal –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 0 VDC in tube 1 selection.

2.

If it is not OK, check pin 9 of TB1 and ground is 0 Ω. If it is not, replace the HV Transformer.

3.

If it is OK, check signal -HT LINK in ATP Console Board (J3-13), if not “0” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “0” and E21 appears, replace ATP Console Board.

Only for one tube option (Compact Generators): 1.

Check the –HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be “0” VDC in tube 1 selection.

2.

If it is not OK, check Jumper between 6J3-13 and 6J3-16 (GND).

3.

If 6J3-13 = 0, check 6J3--13 in ATP Console Board.

4.

If not “0” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “0” and E21 appears, replace ATP Console Board.

Only for two tubes option (no Compact Generators): 1.

Check the –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 0 VDC in tube 1 selection.

2.

If it is not OK, check between pin 9 of TB1 and ground is 0 Ω. If not replace the HV Transformer.

3.

If it is OK, check 0V at J2-13 in ATP Console. a.

If it is not OK, check between J3-13 in ATP and TB1-9.

b.

If it is OK, replace ATP Console Board.

Only for two tubes option (Compact Generators):

TR-1005R4

1.

Check logic “0” in J3-13 in ATP Console Board, if “0” VDC, replace ATP Console Board.

2.

If not “0”, turn off equipment, disconnect J1 of HV Transformer and check continuity between J1-J and J3-13 in ATP Console Board.

3.

If it is not OK, check cable and replace if necessary.

4.

If connection is OK, replace HV Transformer.

53


ERROR CODE :

E22

DESCRIPTION :

Wrong Tube-2 selection.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Does not allow working unless the error is solved or other tube is selected.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment mainly after initialization or when changing tube selection.


Wrong tube 2 selection.

POSIBLE CAUSES The –HT INTLK is not high logic level 5V (tube 2 selection). Defective HV Switch inside the HV Transformer (two tubes option). The --HT INTLK is grounding.

ACTIONS Only for one tube option (no Compact Generators): 1.

Check signal –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 5 VDC in tube 2 selection.

2.

If it is not OK, check pin 9 of TB1 and ground is infinite Ω. If it is not, replace the HV Transformer.

3.

If it is OK, check signal -HT LINK in ATP Console Board (J3-13), if not “1” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “5” and E22 appears, replace ATP Console Board.

Only for one tube option (Compact Generators): 1.

Check the –HT INTLK in 6J3-13 (Generator Cabinet), it should be “5” VDC in tube 2 selection.

2.

If it is not OK, check that 6J3-13 is not grounding.

3.

If 6J3-13 = 5, check 6J3--13 in ATP Console Board.

4.

If not “5” in J3-13, check link between TB1-9 and J3-13, if voltage = “5” and E22 appears, replace ATP Console Board.

Only for two tubes option (no Compact Generators): 1.

Check the –HT INTLK in pin 9 of TB1 in the HV Transformer, it should be 5 VDC in tube 2 selection.

2.

If it is not OK, check between pin 9 of TB1 and ground is infinite Ω. If not replace the HV Transformer.

3.

If it is OK, check 0V at J2-13 in ATP Console. a.

If J2-13 is not OK, check 5V between J3-13 in ATP and TB1-9.

b.

If it is OK, replace ATP Console Board.

Only for two tubes option (Compact Generators):

54

1.

Check logic “5” in J3-13 in ATP Console Board, if “5” VDC, replace ATP Console Board.

2.

If not “5”, turn off equipment, disconnect J1 of HV Transformer and check continuity between J1-J and J3-13 in ATP Console Board.

3.

If it is not OK, check cable and replace if necessary.

4.

If connection is OK, replace HV Transformer.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E23

DESCRIPTION :

Calibration data not stored

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative although it is almost impossible to find if not provoked.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

When trying to save a calibration data.


Calibration data not stored. Calibration value intended to be stored has not been properly recorded.

POSIBLE CAUSES This problem may be shown randomly. This problem is continuos or occurs frequently and the communication between the Generator Cabinet and the Console is too noisy.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Store data again.

2.

Check communication cables.

3.

Route communication cables in different way.

55


ERROR CODE :

E24

DESCRIPTION :

The Bucky has not been detected to be moving.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. Does not allow exposition.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At the beginning of exposition.


Wrong Exposure signal from Buckies.

POSIBLE CAUSES Malfunction of the bucky. Wrong wiring of the bucky. Wrong bucky selection.

ACTIONS

CHECK - DRCMA AT PREP IS IT AT LOW

NO

REVIEW WORK STATION CONFIGURATION IS IT OK?

NO

CONFIGURE CORRECTLY

LEVEL?

YES

REPAIR

NO

CONNECTION

CHECK K2 FOR BUCKY 1 & K3 FOR BUCKY 2 ARE THEY ON?

YES

YES

CHECK J3-14,J3-11 AT ATP CONS. IS IT OK?

NO

REPLACE ATP CONSOLE BOARD

YES CHECK AND REPAIR LINK J3--14 //P4-12 AT

YES REPLACE INTERFACE BOARD

CHECK-BUCKY MOTION 1&2 AT INTERFACE BOARD P4-11 & P4-10 AT LOW LEVEL IS IT OK?

INTERFACE BOARD J3--11 / P4-13 AT INTERFACE BOARD

NO PROBLEM AT BUCKY

56

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E25

DESCRIPTION :

Battery failure in Battery Powered Generators.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. Does not allow exposition.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Battery Powered Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At “Prep” in any Battery Powered Generators and at any moment in Generators with Stand-Alone.


Batteries charge level is momentarily low or some batteries are discharged or damaged.

POSIBLE CAUSES Batteries are discharged. Some Battery Charger Sector is not working properly or some Batteries are damaged.

ACTIONS A.

PRELIMINARY

E25 appears when the Generator has not been used for a period of time, it usually allows 2 or 3 exposures and then E25 appears. If this is the case, charge Batteries and perform exposures until the batteries are totally discharged, then charge again and perform exposures again to discharge, repeat the procedure 5 or 6 times. This is the way to charge batteries fully and safe.

B.

TR-1005R4

BATTERIES FULLY CHARGED AND “E25” APPEARS

1.

Check Corrosion in metal contacts of Batteries.

2.

Check charger Leds on Battery Charger. Green Leds and LED DS1 should be ON.

3.

Check voltage in J1 of Battery Charger Board: J1-16 & J1-15, J1-14 & J1-13...... , J1-2 & J1-1.

•

With Generator OFF and disconnected from Mains, the voltage to be found is: 26.6 VDC.

•

With Stand-Alone mode, disconnected the Generator from Mains and with the Generator turned On, the voltage should be: 25.4 VDC. G

If voltage is not OK, check the batteries status and replace defective batteries if needed (refer to Section 2.6.2 - Identifying and Replacing Defective Batteries).

G

If total voltage is correct and E25 appears, check the measure circuit. --

In Generators with Stand-Alone check links between J1-18 (HT Controller) & J3-5 (Stand-Alone), J1-19 (HT Controller) & J3-6 (Stand-Alone), J1-20 (HT Controller) & J3-7 (Stand-Alone). If links are OK and batteries voltage is OK but signals are below minimum required (that is --BATST3 is “0”, BATST2 is “0” and BATST1 is “1”), check HT Controller Board and Stand-Alone Board, replace the defective Board found.

--

For Generators without Stand-Alone check that signal -BAT FAULT at P5-2 of HT Control Board is at “High Level”. If -BAT FAULT is at “High Level”, replace HT Controller Board. If -BAT FAULT is at “Low Level”, check J2-2 in Battery Charger Board. If not “Low Level” replace cable. If “Low Level“ replace the Battery Charger Board.

57


C. 1.

LEDs CHECKING ON THE BATTERY CHARGER BOARD GREEN LEDS ARE ON BUT LED DS1 IS OFF

Check that 24 V are present in J2-1 of Battery Charger Board. •

If it is OK, replace Battery Charger Board.

•

If it is not OK, check 24V in J2-7 Line Monitor.

2.

G

If it is OK, repair links between J2-1 of Battery Charger Board & J2-7 of Line Monitor Board.

G

If it is not OK, check 20 VAC between J2-5 and J2-6 at Line Monitor Board. --

If it is OK, replace Line Monitor Board.

--

If it is not OK, check voltage from 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer to the Line Monitor Board and replace it if necessary.

SOME GREEN LEDS ARE NOT ON AND DS1 IS ON.

Check Fuses F7 to F21(2A, 250 VAC) (Charger Sectors) of the Battery Charger Board. Check VAC at J6 and J4 in Battery Charger Board (connectors J6 and J4 must be plugged in the Board), it should be 28 VAC (measure between: J6-1 & J6-2, J6-3 & J6-4........... until J6-15 & J6-16, and also check J4-1 & J4-2 ........ until J4-13 & J4-14). •

If VAC is OK, replace Battery Charger Board.

•

If VAC is not OK, unpplug connectors J6 and J4 from the Battery Charger Board and repeat the measure checking VAC from 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer at connectors J6 and J4, it should be 28 VAC (measure between: J6-1 & J6-2, J6-3 & J6-4........... until J6-15 & J6-16, and also check J4-1 & J4-2 ........ until J4-13 & J4-14). Check 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer and replace it if necessary.

3.

NONE LED IS ON

Check that Generator is Powered ON. If DL1 is blinking (yellow) at Line Monitor Board and DL2 and DL3 are OFF: •

Check VAC between J2-1 and J2-3 at Line Monitor Board. G

If no VAC found, replace Line Monitor Board.

G

If VAC found, check VAC in 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer. --

If no VAC found, check and fix connection at 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.

--

If VAC found, check 2T1 Battery Charger Transformer.

If DL1 is blinking (yellow) at Line Monitor Board while DL2 and DL3 are ON (any of them): •

Check Line VAC +/- 15%. G

If Line VAC is not OK, it is an external problem.

G

If Line VAC is OK, review the Line Monitor Board adjustment. Line Monitor Board Adjustment: Configure SW1 at Line Monitor Board according to Power Line Voltage (refer to Installation chapter in Service Manual). Measure the Power Line Voltage with a Digitalmeter and adjust VDC in TP2 with POT1 at Line Monitor Board as per the following formula: V measured × 2.5 = VTP2 V nominal

Example:

V(measured:220V) V (nominal:230V)

× 2.5 = VTP2(2.4VDC)

V measured is the real voltage obtained with polymeter. V nominal is the SW1 configuration Voltage. If all Leds are off at Line Monitor Board: •

58

Check VAC in J2-1 / J2-2 at Line Monitor Board. G

If VAC is OK, review configuration of Jumper SW1.

G

If VAC is not OK, check (Magnetothermic ) 1SW1 is ON and external VAC power.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E26

DESCRIPTION :

Voltage failure in Battery Powered Generators with Stand-Alone.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal error. System shut down.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Battery Powered Generators with Stand-Alone.

APPEARS WHEN :

At the beginning of exposition.


System failure

POSIBLE CAUSES No voltage detected at Stand Alone. Shutdown DC is below or over specifications HT Controller cables are accidentally grounded.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check that DL4 is ON, if it is OFF, Stand Alone Board is not powered.

2.

Check that DL3 is OFF, if it is ON, a shutdown has occurred.

3.

Check that DL5 is OFF, if it is ON, DC is below or over specifications.

4.

Check that battery voltage cables connected to HT Controller are not grounded.

E27

DESCRIPTION :

Failure in Console EPROM. Bad checksum.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal Error. Generator does not start.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators

APPEARS WHEN :

During Console initialization.


The Console performs a checksum procedure of EPROM when it has been configured to a non-allowed calibration and it has found this value to be incorrect.

POSIBLE CAUSES The Console has been configured in a non communication mode. The non volatile RAM does not calculate and compare the Console checksum. The EPROM (U24) has been corrupted.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Check if dip--switch SW2 on ATP Console is well configured per Service Manual.

2.

If error remains, replace the non--volatile RAM (U23) on ATP Console.

3.

If error remains, replace the EPROM (U24) on ATP Console.

59


ERROR CODE :

E29

DESCRIPTION :

“ALL CLEAR” signal not active.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. Does not allow “Prep”.

APPLICABLE TO :

Nucletron Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

When pressing “Prep” in P00 mode.


Exposure is not allowed.

POSIBLE CAUSES “All Clear” signal is not ready after 5 seconds with “Prep” activated.

ACTIONS Release the exposure controls, press the “System Reset” button and check the system.

ERROR CODE :

E30

DESCRIPTION :

Relay K1 not active.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. Does not allow “Prep”.

APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

When pressing “Prep” in P00 or P03 mode.


Test--scan not started.

POSIBLE CAUSES MOSTA signal is not received at system or relay K1 is not active.

ACTIONS Release the exposure controls, press the “System Reset” push-button and check the system.

60

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E31

DESCRIPTION :

Long exposition is not initiated.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. Does not allow long “Exp”.

APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

During exposition phase in P00 mode.


Signal from K3 has not been detected after 1.6 seconds.

POSIBLE CAUSES Signal from K3 has not been detected after 1.6 seconds. The system is not ready to make the exposure or the operator has aborted the exposure.


ERROR CODE :

E32

DESCRIPTION :

Long exposition is not cut (after 3.2 seconds) as relay K3 was not detected.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. Cut exposition at 3.2 seconds of buckup.

APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

During exposition phase in P00 mode.


Signal from K3 is not received.

POSIBLE CAUSES Signal from K3 is not received. Exposure not completed, time is longer than 1.6 seconds.


TR-1005R4

61


ERROR CODE :

E33

DESCRIPTION :

No communication between Generator and Serial Console or PC Unit.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators with Serial Console.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment.


Serial Communication Error.

POSIBLE CAUSES Connecting cable between Console and Generator is loosen or damaged. Damaged ATP Console CPU Board or Serial Console.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check connection cable between connector J7/J8 from ATP Console CPU Board to connector J5 of Compatibility Module (as per Generator model) and then check cable from J5 to Serial Console.

2.

If error remains, check ATP Console CPU Board and Serial Console, replace defective part found.

E34 -- TECHNIQUE ERROR

DESCRIPTION :

Technique error.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative without acoustic alarm or Fatal after exposition. It does not allow exposition.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment after parameter selection or after exposition.


Indicated with warning “Technique error” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E34 appears in display.

POSIBLE CAUSES The calibration for that parameters is wrong.

ACTIONS

62

1.

If it occurs with time parameters close to 1mS, it means that the cable capacity is excessive for a short exposition. Also the calibration for that parameters is wrong. Check Service Manual Section: Exposure Time Adjustment.

2.

If it happens at Fluoroscopy mode with ABC, it means that the equipment is not able to perform that operation. Perform Jumper W1 in Fluoro CPU.

3.

If it happens after exposition, it means a failure in exposition timer and backup has been cut. Dangerous. Reset APR and reconfigure values.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E35 -- DOOR OPEN

DESCRIPTION :

Door Open.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. It may inhibit Exposition depending on the configuration of SW1.2 at Console.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment.


Indicated with warning “Door Open” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E35 appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”.

POSIBLE CAUSES Door open or cable disconnected or cable not installed.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Close door.

2.

If that is not the reason for the error, check Jumper TS1-22 & TS1-23. See Installation Manual Section: Door Interlock Signal.

E36 -- HEAT UNITS

DESCRIPTION :

Heat Unit. Overheating.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow expositions.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment.


Indicated with warning “Heat Unit” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E36 appears in display. Does not allow “Prep” and “Exp”.

POSIBLE CAUSES If it appears at initialization means that the thermostat of the selected tube is connected or it does not exist, if so connect to ground the correspondent signal. If it appears at any other moment is because the tube thermostat has been activated. It also may appear during the calibration process due to the high number of starting.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Check correct installation of signal Thermostat/Presostat. See Installation Manual. If tube has not this signal, perform a Jumper indicated in Installation Jumper.

2.

Wait until temperature is lowered.

63


ERROR CODE :

E37 - TUBE OVERLOAD

DESCRIPTION :

Tube Overload.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative without acoustic alarm. Does not allow Exposition.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

After “Exp” due to Tube overheating. After changing radiographic parameters. In some Consoles this error may not appear as they are provide with an automatic blocking that disable parameters above tube capacity.


Indicated with warning “Tube Overload” in Consoles with written indicators. For the rest of Consoles E37 appears in display. Exposures are not allowed.

POSIBLE CAUSES 1.

Parameters selected for a new exposition are above tube capacity. (Heat Units or Rating).

2.

Capacity Line frequency is wrong. (see SW1.1 at Console) or Tube selected in extended position E02 or E18 is not correct.

1.

Wait for Tube to cool and Heat Units available increase or modify Exposition parameters.

2.

If Heat Units of tube are 100% and E37 or “Tube Overload” warning appear: Check 3024SW1.1 in ATP Console. See Configuration Chapter in Service Manual and Test Switches or verify the X-Ray Type Selection: E02 for Tube 1 and E18 for Tube 2 in Configuration Chapter of Service Manual.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

E41

DESCRIPTION :

Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-1 Dosimeter and Generator.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators with Dosimeter.

APPEARS WHEN :

Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1.


Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection.

POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and System for Tube-1.

ACTIONS

64

1.

Check cable connections between Dosimeter and System.

2.

Turn Off and On the Generator to reset the Radiation Measuring System.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E42

DESCRIPTION :

Autotest error on Tube-1 Dosimeter.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative.

APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-1 or during regular operation.


Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection. Failure test in Dosimeter.

POSIBLE CAUSES Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-1.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.


2.


3.

If required, replace Counter Module for Tube-1.

E43

DESCRIPTION :

Tube-1 Ion Chamber status check error.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative.

APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-1 selection. Wrong Ion Chamber status request.

POSIBLE CAUSES Error during Ion Chamber checking for Tube-1. Ion Chamber not operative.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.


2.


3.

If required, replace Ion Chamber for Tube-1.

65


ERROR CODE :

E44

DESCRIPTION :

Dosimeter failure. Communication failure between Tube-2 Dosimeter and Generator.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative.

APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

Communication error starting the measuring for Tube-2.


Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection.

POSIBLE CAUSES Wrong Physical connection between Dosimeter and System for Tube-2.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.


2.


E45

DESCRIPTION :

Autotest error on Tube-2 Dosimeter.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative.

APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection. Failure test in Dosimeter.

POSIBLE CAUSES Error during electronic checking of Counter Module for Tube-2.

ACTIONS

66

1.


2.


3.

If required, replace Counter Module for Tube-2.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E46

DESCRIPTION :

Tube-2 Ion Chamber status check error.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative.

APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



Communication error 18 seconds after Tube-2 selection. Wrong Ion Chamber status request.

POSIBLE CAUSES Error during Ion Chamber checking for Tube-2. Ion Chamber not operative.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.


2.


3.

If required, replace Ion Chamber for Tube-2.

E47

DESCRIPTION :

Capacitors not charged when PREP.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Does not allow exposition.

APPLICABLE TO :

Capacitor Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment.


Indicated with warning “E47“.

POSIBLE CAUSES No power in line. Defective Capacitor or circuit.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Press the respective button on the Console to reset the Error indication.

2.

Wait one minute for Capacitor Charging before activating “PREP” control.

67


ERROR CODE :

E48

DESCRIPTION :

Collimator Error.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Does not allow exposure.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment.


Showed as “Technique Error” in Consoles with this light indicator. For the rest of Consoles E48 appears displayed.

POSIBLE CAUSES Collimator blades closed or in motion during exposure. Defective Collimator.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check collimator blades.

2.

If it is OK, check the TS3-20 is at low level.

•

If it is not at low level : Problem in Collimator.

•

If signal at low level, check J2-6 in ATP Console G

if it is at low level, replace ATP Console Board

G

If is at high level, check and fix link between J2-6 and TS3-20.

E49

DESCRIPTION :

Exposure Cycle Error.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. Does not allow exposure.

APPLICABLE TO :

Generators with two X-ray Tubes for RAD only with “Exposure Cycle” feature (a.e. Brandis).

APPEARS WHEN :

Exposure is not performed or it is aborted.


E49 appears on Console.

POSIBLE CAUSES Operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended. Exposure order is interrupted.

ACTIONS 1.

68


2.

Repeat the exposure.

3.

If error remains, check Handswitch or “EXP” button and replace what is wrong.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E50

DESCRIPTION :

Interrupted Exposure.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

When operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended.


E50 appears on Console.

POSIBLE CAUSES Operator releases “EXP” button before exposure time has ended.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.


2.

Repeat the exposure.

3.

If error remains, check Handswitch or “EXP” button and replace what is wrong.

E51

DESCRIPTION :

Checksum failure or EPROM corrupted.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. System does not allow exposition.

APPLICABLE TO :

Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.

APPEARS WHEN :

After self-test.


At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E51 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES DRAC program memory corrupted.

ACTIONS 1.

TR-1005R4

Replace U17 in Control DRAC Board.

69


ERROR CODE :

E52

DESCRIPTION :

Microcrontroller RAM failure.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. Exposure is not allowed.

APPLICABLE TO :

Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC

APPEARS WHEN :

After self-test.


At power On, after the Generator autocheck, E52 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES U17 in Control DRAC Board is defective.

ACTIONS 1.

ERROR CODE :

Replace U17 in Control DRAC Board.

E53

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient DC BUS voltage at low level voltage (220 VAC).

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN : INFORMATION / SYMPTOM :

E53 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, are low or absent. Voltage at TP18 is < 1.1 VDC.

ACTIONS

70

1.

Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 200 VDC.

2.

If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking.

3.

If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB.

4.

If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB.

5.

If it is OK, Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB.

6.

If it is not OK, replace Cable between J2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROL DRAC PCB.

7.

If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E54

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient DC BUS voltage at high level voltage (480 VAC).

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :




POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, is low (out of range). Voltage at TP18 is < 2.48 VDC.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB, it must be higher than 447 VDC.

2.

If it is not OK, perform Error 11 checking.

3.

If it is OK, check FILT 1, F3 and F4 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB.

4.

If it is not OK, replace F3 or F4 or INTERFACE DRAC PCB.

5.

If it is OK, Check VDC in J2-1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB.

6.

If it is not OK, replace Cable between J2 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB and J2 CONTROL DRAC PCB.

E55

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive DC BUS voltage at 480 or 380 VAC.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :




POSIBLE CAUSES Voltage between J2--1 and J2--2, in Control DRAC Board, are high (out of range). Voltage at TP18 is > 4.92 VDC.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

Check the input voltage to the Generator at TS2--20, TS2--21 and TS2--22, it must be according to specifications max. 480 VAC + 10%. If it is not OK, check Input Power Line.

2.

If Power Input is OK, check the DC Voltage between J2--1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB, it should be less than 890 VDC.

3.

If Voltage is < 890 VDC replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.

4.

If voltage is > 890 VDC, switch OFF and disconnect J2--1 and J2-2 in CONTROL DRAC . Switch ON and measure voltage in DC BUS +/--.

5.

If it is OK, replace CONTROL DRAC.

6.

If not OK, check Power Module and FILT1 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. Replace defective part. ( Power Module or FILT1 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB).

71


ERROR CODE :

E56

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive reference voltage.

ERROR TYPE :

Indicative. Does not allow exposures.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators with DRAC or LV-DRAC.



POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive reference voltage.

ACTIONS

72

1.

Check voltage at TP15, it must be 0V.

2.

If not 0V, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E58

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

During Anode acceleration at Low Speed.


During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E58 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main winding is detected.

ACTIONS 1.

Check Switches configuration 324SW1 and 3243SW2 in CONTROL DRAC PCB. Refer to Tube Family Selection in DRAC Documentation.

2.

Check CR8, CR9, CR10 and CR11 in INTERFACE DRAC PCB. If any of them is found defective, replace INTERFACE DRAC PCB.

3.

Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main or auxiliary) according to the X-ray Tube Stator specifications.

4.

Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2.

5.

Check Winding impedance in transformers (main or auxiliary).

6.

Turn off Generator, wait 3 minutes and check the PTR1 Module at the CONTROL DRAC PCB in the following way: G

Note

.

In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.

G

7.

TR-1005R4

Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse

In the same PCB measure PTR1-2 , 3--4, 5--6, 7--8, 9--10, 11--12 in direct and inverse . If any defective connection is found, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.

Disconnect Stator Cables at X--ray Tube Side but keep cable connected to TS2. Press “PREP” a.

If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace the X-ray Tube.

b.

If the same error remains, disconnect Stator Cable at TS2 Generator.

c.

If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Stator Cable.

d.

If Error remains, disconnect Primary at Transformer (Main or Auxiliary) at J1 Connector of Control DRAC and Press “PREP”.

e.

If any other Error message appears (Insufficient Current) replace Transformer.

f.

If the same error remains, replace CONTROL DRAC PCB.

73


ERROR CODE :

E59

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E59 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in auxiliary winding is detected.

ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


Note

.



G

7.

74




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E60

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :




POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in auxiliary winding is detected.

ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.

Check correct cable connection between Stator and TS2.

4.

Check Winding impedance in transformers (auxiliary).

5.


Note

.



G

TR-1005R4


75


ERROR CODE :

E61

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in main winding during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During acceleration of the anode at low speed, E61 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.

POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in main winding is detected.

ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.

Check Winding impedance in transformers (main).

5.


Note

.



G

76


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E62

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

During Anode acceleration at High Speed.




ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


Note

.



G

7.

TR-1005R4




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


77


ERROR CODE :

E63

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E63 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


Note

.



G

7.

78




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E64

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in auxiliary winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E64 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.



G

TR-1005R4


79


ERROR CODE :

E65

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in main winding during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During acceleration of the anode at high speed, E65 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.



G

80


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E66

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in main winding running at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During running of the anode at low speed, E66 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


Note

.



G

7.

TR-1005R4




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


81


ERROR CODE :

E67

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During running of the anode at low speed, E67 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


Note

.



G

7.

82




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E68

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in auxiliary winding running at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During running of the anode at low speed, E68 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.



G

TR-1005R4


83


ERROR CODE :

E69

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in main winding running at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During running of the anode at low speed, E69 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.



G

84


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E70

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in main winding running at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During running of the anode at high speed, E70 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


Note

.



G

7.

TR-1005R4




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


85


ERROR CODE :

E71

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During running of the anode at high speed, E71 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


Note

.



G

7.

86




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E72

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in auxiliary winding running at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During running of the anode at high speed, E72 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.



G

TR-1005R4


87


ERROR CODE :

E73

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in main winding running at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During running of the anode at high speed, E73 is displayed and it is not possible to make Exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.



G

88


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E74

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in main winding braking at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During braking operation of the anode at low speed, E74 is displayed.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.

Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (main) according to the specifications.

4.

Check correct Isolation between connections Main winding and auxiliary winding in TS2. If winding in TS2 is not OK, replace TS2.

5.


Note

.

X-ray Tube Stator



G

6.

TR-1005R4




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


89


ERROR CODE :

E75

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :





ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.

Check Stator Tube Winding impedance (auxiliary) according to the specifications.

4.


5.


Note

.

X-ray Tube Stator



G

6.

90




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E76

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in auxiliary winding braking at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :





ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.

X-ray Tube Stator



G

TR-1005R4


91


ERROR CODE :

E77

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in main winding braking at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :





ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.

X-ray Tube Stator



G

92


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E78

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in main winding braking at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



During braking operation of the anode at high speed, E78 is displayed.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.

X-ray Tube Stator



G

6.

TR-1005R4




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


93


ERROR CODE :

E79

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :





ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.

X-ray Tube Stator



G

6.

94




b.


c.


d.


e.


f.


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E80

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in auxiliary winding braking at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :





ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.

X-ray Tube Stator



G

TR-1005R4


95


ERROR CODE :

E81

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in main winding braking at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

During Anode acceleration at high Speed.


During braking operation of the anode at high peed, E81 is displayed.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.

X-ray Tube Stator



G

96


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E82

DESCRIPTION :

Wrong X-ray Tube selection.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

When changing Tube selection.


Changing the tube selection, E82 is displayed.

POSIBLE CAUSES No tube selected.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Check that the Dip switch 3243--SW4--6 is in on position (tube selection inhibited).

2.

Check delayed switch off.

E83

DESCRIPTION :

Excessive current in DC Brake.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

During Anode braking in DC voltage.


During braking operation of the anode with DC voltage, E83 is displayed.

POSIBLE CAUSES Excessive current in main or auxiliary winding is detected.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.


2.


3.


4.


97


ERROR CODE :

E84

DESCRIPTION :

Incorrect Tube selection signal.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :



Changing the tube selection E84 is displayed.

POSIBLE CAUSES No tube selected. X-Ray selection Signal is not correct on the Control DRAC PCB.

ACTIONS 1.

ERROR CODE :

Check that the Dip Switch 3243SW4--6 on the Control DRAC PCB is in ON position.

E85

DESCRIPTION :


ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :





ACTIONS 1.

98


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E86

DESCRIPTION :


ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :





ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.


2.

Check the connection of common wire.

3.

Check the voltage at TP36 in Control DRAC Board.

E87

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

During acceleration of Anode at Low Speed.



POSIBLE CAUSES Insufficient current in common wire is detected.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.


2.


3.


4.


99


5.


Note

.

Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.

G

ERROR CODE :


E88

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in common wire running at 3300 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

Running the Anode at Low Speed.




ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.

Connect a Multimeter in Capacitor or Resistor Mode between: P+ and U,V,W in direct and inverse N-- and U,V,W in direct and inverse In case you decide to measure the Gate signals with the Oscilloscope and the generator Turned On, disconnect cables J2-- 1 and J2-- 2 at Control DRAC as these points are High Voltage with respect to Ground.

G

100


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E89

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in common wire during acceleration up to 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

During acceleration of the Anode at High Speed.


E89 is displayed and it is not possible to make exposures.


ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.



G

TR-1005R4


101


ERROR CODE :

E90

DESCRIPTION :

Insufficient current in common wire running at 10000 RPM.

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

Running the Anode at High Speed.




ACTIONS 1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


Note

.



G

102


TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E91

DESCRIPTION :

Incorrect signal measure in IPRINC (CH2).

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

In Stand-by situation.



POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero.

ACTIONS 1.

ERROR CODE :

Check the voltage at TP1 and TP17 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.

E92

DESCRIPTION :

Incorrect signal measure in IAUX (CH3).

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

In Stand-by situation.



POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through auxiliary wire and it should be zero.

ACTIONS 1.

TR-1005R4

Check the voltage at TP3 and TP16 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.

103


ERROR CODE :

E93

DESCRIPTION :

Incorrect signal measure in ICOM (CH4).

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :


APPEARS WHEN :

In Stand-by.



POSIBLE CAUSES The system is detecting current through main wire and it should be zero.

ACTIONS 1.

ERROR CODE :

Check the voltage at TP1, TP3 and TP36 in Control DRAC Board. It should be 0V.

E95

DESCRIPTION :

Rapid Termination

ERROR TYPE :


APPLICABLE TO :

Generators with Rapid Termination application Installed.

APPEARS WHEN :

While Exposure. (after 10ms from exposure or after 10% of the exposure back-up time whatever is first).



POSIBLE CAUSES The selected Ion Chamber or the selected parameters (short backup time) are not appropriate for an exposure with AEC Switch SW1--3 in ATP Console A3024--XX PCB is in ON position.

ACTIONS

104

1.


2.

Select appropriate Ion Chamber or modify parameters.

3.

if error remains check SW1-3 in ATP Console A3024--XX PCB is in OFF position.

TR-1005R4


ERROR CODE :

E96

DESCRIPTION :

Voltage missing at PCB A3517--01.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal. Does not allow exposures.

APPLICABLE TO :

Capacitor Powered Generators only.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any time.


E96 appears at console display.

POSIBLE CAUSES Failure in Power supply of PCB A3517--01. Failure in reference voltage 10V.

ACTIONS

ERROR CODE :

1.

Turn Off Generator and wait for the DC Link Capacitors to discharge. For that, refer to Capacitor Discharge Procedure.

2.

Replace A3517--01 PCB.

E97

DESCRIPTION :

Voltage in capacitors not balanced.

ERROR TYPE :

Fatal. Does not allow exposures.

APPLICABLE TO :

Capacitor Powered Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

At any moment.


E97 appears at Console display.

POSIBLE CAUSES 1.-- Failure at measurements circuitry of PCB A3517--01. 2.-- Failure in Resistors 8R1 and 8R3 (voltage regulating resistors). 3.-- Failure in DC Link Capacitors.

ACTIONS

TR-1005R4

1.

For Cause 1: Replace PCB A3517--01.

2.

For Cause 2: Replace resistors 8R1 and 8R3.

3.

For Cause 3: Replace all DC Link Capacitors.

105


ERROR CODE :

E98

DESCRIPTION :

Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board set for Configuration and Calibration Mode Active.

ERROR TYPE :

Informative. It allows normal operation.

APPLICABLE TO :

All Generators.

APPEARS WHEN :

After turning on the Control Console.


E98 appears at console display.

POSIBLE CAUSES Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board set in “ON” position.

ACTIONS 1.

Reset the error condition by pressing the respective button on the Console. Keep in mind that this error will appear each time the Generator is turned OFF/ON during service procedures (configuration, calibration, etc.) whenever Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board is in “ON” (closed) position (for service mode allowed).

2.

106

When servicing is finished and the Generator is ready for normal operation, turn the Generator OFF and set Dip Switch 3024SW2-3 in ATP Console Board in “OFF” (open) position (operation mode).

TR-1005R4


SECTION 5

5.1

CENTRAL LISTING

HT CONTROLLER BOARD

5.1.1

HT CONTROLLER BOARD (A3000--10/20) JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

SW2

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TEST

8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH

JP1

A B

A3000--10 VERSION A3000--20 VERSION

JP2

A B


BOARD CONFIGURATION

LEDs LED

DS1

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

YELLOW

SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK DETECTION BETWEEN CONTROL CONSOLE AND POWER MODULE. LED STARTS IN A QUICK FLASHING MODE UNTIL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE CONTROL CONSOLE AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.

POTENTIOMETERS POTENTIOMETER

RATING

DESCRIPTION

R29

10K, 1/2w

FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT OF HV INVERTER

R49

20K, 1/2w

FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT FOR FILAMENT INVERTER

R51

10K, 1/2w

DEAD TIME CONTROL FOR FILAMENT INVERTER

RELAYS RELAY

RATING

DESCRIPTION

K1

+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPST

--12 VDC SUPERVISOR

TR-1005R4

107


5.1.2

HT CONTROLLER BOARD (A3000--30/33/34/35/36 & so) JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

SW2

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND TEST


JP1

1

COMPATIBLE WITH OLD LOW SPEED STARTER

2

COMPATIBLE WITH LF-RAC (LOW SPEED STARTER) AND DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)

1

COMPATIBLE WITH OLD LOW SPEED STARTER

2

COMPATIBLE WITH LF-RAC (LOW SPEED STARTER) AND DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER)

JP2

BOARD CONFIGURATION

LEDs LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DS1

YELLOW

SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINK DETECTION BETWEEN CONTROL CONSOLE AND POWER MODULE. LED STARTS IN A QUICK FLASHING MODE UNTIL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE CONTROL CONSOLE AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.

DS2

YELLOW

EXPOSURE INDICATOR

DS3

YELLOW

PREPARATION INDICATOR


RATING

DESCRIPTION

R29

10K, 1/2w

FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT OF HV INVERTER

R49

20K, 1/2w

FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT FOR FILAMENT INVERTER

RELAYS RELAY

RATING

DESCRIPTION

K1


--12 VDC SUPERVISOR

108

TR-1005R4


5.2

FILAMENT CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER / SWITCH JP1

A B

DESCRIPTION


BOARD CONFIGURATION. JP1-A FOR NORMAL APPLICATION

LEDs LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DS1

GREEN

DS2

GREEN

FILAMENT DRIVER STATUS INDICATOR: BOTH LEDs ARE OFF: 220VAC POWER SUPPLY IS MISSING ONLY ONE LED IS OFF: THE BOARD IS DEFECTIVE

5.3

INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

W1

2--1 2--3

AUXILARY BUCKY SUPPLY NORMAL

EXPOSURE ENABLE RELAY ( K4 ) CAN BE SUPPLIED FROM INTERNAL +24VDC ( NORMAL ), OR FROM EXTERNAL VOLTAGE ( AUXILIARY BUCKY SUPPLY ).

W2

2--1 2--3

NORMAL LOGIC LINE SYNC

FLUORO EXPOSURE SYNCHRONIZATION WITH AC LINE DIRECTLY ( NORMAL ), OR THRU A LOGIC CIRCUITRY.

W3

A B

POSITIVE ION CHAMBER SUPPLY NEGATIVE PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SUPPLY

W4

A B


W5

A B


W6

A B


W7

A B


W8

A B


W9

A B


W10

A B


TR-1005R4

THE OUTPUT OF THE PHOTO TUBE/ION CHAMBER HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY CAN BE SELECTED AS : -- POSITIVE OUTPUT ( JUMPER POSITION -- A ) -- NEGATIVE OUTPUT ( JUMPER POSITION -- B )

109


LEDs LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DS1

GREEN

GENERATOR POWER ON INDICATOR


RATING

DESCRIPTION

R29

5K, 1/2w

ION CHAMBER POSITIVE HIGH VOLTAGE ADJUST

RELAYS RELAY

RATING

DESCRIPTION

K1 -- POWER ”ON”

+6VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, DPDT

GENERATOR POWER ON

K2 -- BUCKY 1


BUCKY 1 DRIVE

K3 -- BUCKY 2


BUCKY 2 DRIVE

K4 -- BUCKY MOTION


BUCKY EXPOSURE ENABLE

K5 -- SOL DR


HV TRANSFORMER SOLENOID DRIVE

K6 -- TUBE 1


TUBE FILAMENT PREHEAT SELECTION

K7 -- SM SPOT (RAD)


SMALL/LARGE FILAMENT SELECTION

K8


DELAYED +24VDC AND +5VDC

K9


BUS DC DISCHARGE WITH POWER OFF

K10


ROOM LIGHT CONTACT

K11

PhotoMOS Relay, SPST

FILAMENT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

110

TR-1005R4


5.4

LVDC POWER SUPPLY POTENTIOMETERS

POTENTIOMETER

RATING

DESCRIPTION

R12

2K, 1w

+5 VDC ADJUST

R25

2K, 1w

--12 VDC ADJUST

R26

2K, 1w

+12 VDC ADJUST

5.5

CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARD LEDs

LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DS1

GREEN

CHARGE INDICATOR OF THE HT INVERTER CAPACITORS: LED OFF: NO CHARGE LED ON: CHARGE ACCORDING TO BRIGHTNESS

5.6

LOCKS BOARD FUSES

FUSE

RATING

NOMINAL

DESCRIPTION

F14

10 A, 250 V, S.B.

24 VAC

LOCKS/LAMP

F15

10 A, 250 V, S.B.

24 VAC

LOCKS/LAMP

TR-1005R4

111


5.7

ATP CONSOLE CPU BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

JP1

POS A COMM--COL1 POS B COMM--COL0

JP2

POS A PREP--ROW5 POS B PREP--ROW1

JP3

POS A EXP--ROW4 POS B EXP--ROW0

JP4

POS A LINE SYNC POS B CAM SYNC

SET ALWAYS IN POSITION “B”.

JP5

POS A VD SELECTION POS B IC4 SELECTION POS C PT INPUT SELECT.

POS. A -- SELECTION OF IC REFERENCE OUTPUT POS. B -- SELECTION OF AEC ION CHAMBER (IC4) OUTPUT (NORMAL MODE). POS. C -- SELECTION OF PHOTOMULTIPLIER (PT INPUT) OUTPUT FOR ABC.

JP6

POS A 27C512/27C1001/274001

JP7

POS A RS485 POS B RS422

JP8

POS A RS485 POS B RS422

JP9

POS A RS232 POS B RS422 & RS485

JP10


JP11


JP12

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

JUMPER FACTORY NOT CONNECTED (SET ONLY FOR A3024--31 BOARD)

JP13


JUMPER ALWAYS FACTORY SET.

JP14


JUMPER FACTORY SET FOR NORMAL MODE. REMOVED FOR MOBILE APPLICATION.

JP15


JP16


JP17


JP18


JP19


JUMPER FACTORY SET IN “A” POSITION (SER IN “B” ONLY FOR A3024-32 BOARD)

JP21


JP22


JP21, JP22 : POS A -- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR POS. POS. B -- RS422 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR

SW1



SW2

TEST


SW3


8 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH NOT USED -- ALL SWITCHES IN “OFF” POSITION

SW4

NOT USED

4 POSITIONS DIP SWITCH NOT USED

112

POS B 27C256

POSITION ”B” FOR APPLICATION MODE.

MEMORY SELECTION. SET ALWAYS IN POSITION “A”.

JP7, JP8 : POS A -- RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR POS. POS. B -- RS422 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR

JP9, JP10, JP11 : POS. A -- RS232 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR POS. B -- RS422 & RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ON J8 CONNECTOR

JUMPERS FACTORY REMOVED FOR NORMAL MODE. MODE SET FOR MOBILE APPLICATION APPLICATION.

TR-1005R4


LEDs LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DS1

YELLOW

WATCH--DOG TIMER OPERATION INDICATOR : LED ON INSURES THE MICROPROCESSOR AND SOFTWARE IS WORKING CORRECTLY

YELLOW

CONSOLE MICROPROCESSOR OPERATION INDICATOR : LED STARTS IN A QUICK FLASHING MODE UNTIL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS IS RECEIVED FROM THE HT CONTROLLER AND, AT THAT TIME, SLOWS TO A STEADY FLASH OF ABOUT 2 PER SECOND.

DS2

RELAYS RELAY

RATING

DESCRIPTION

K1


PREP ORDER

K2


EXP ORDER

K3


AUTO OFF

K4

+12VDC COIL, 1A CONTACT, SPDT

DIGITAL SYSTEM PREP -- EXTERNAL SYNCHRONISM SELECTION

5.8

FLUORO CPU BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

W1

ABC SELECTION

W1 JUMPER INSTALLED FOR ABC DISABLE W1 JUMPER REMOVED FOR ABC ENABLE

W2


W2 JUMPER ALWAYS INSTALLED

LEDs LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DS1

YELLOW

FLUORO MICROPROCCESOR OPERATION INDICATOR : FLASHING WHEN TUBE-2 IS SELECTED AND THERE IS COMMUNICATION WITH CONSOLE CPU BOARD.

TR-1005R4

113


5.9

FLUORO -- RF ADAPTATION BOARD

5.9.1

RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--03) JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8 JP9, JP8, JP9 JP10, JP10 JP12, JP13, JP14

JP2

JP5

JP6

JP7

JP11

JP15

JP16

JP17

JP18

JP19

JP20

JP21

JP22

JP23

114

POSITION

DESCRIPTION

Remove all jumpers

230 VAC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER

Set only JP1, JP8 and JP12


Set

Generator +24 VDC for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER

Removed


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A

Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the Line sync.

B

Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the TV Camera sync.

C

Pulsed Fluoro sync. from an external sync. (digital, etc.)

A

For ABC OUT signal from the video in

B

For ABC OUT signal from a negative System ABC signal

C

For ABC OUT signal from a positive System ABC signal

A

ABC OUT signal generated from a System ABC signal

B

ABC OUT signal incoming directly from the System

Set

When JP21 in position A

Removed

When JP21 in position B

Set Removed

Normal position To reduce noise in the ABC circuitry

TR-1005R4


5.9.2

RF ADAPTATION BOARD (A3514--04) JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER

JP1, JP3, JP4, JP8,, JP9,, JP10,, JP12 JP13, JP12, JP13 JP14

JP2

JP5

JP6

JP7

JP11

JP15

JP16

JP17

JP18

JP19

JP20

JP21

JP22

JP23

JP24

TR-1005R4

POSITION

DESCRIPTION

Set all jumpers

+24 VDC for the inputs PREP ORDER, RAD ORDER, and FLUORO ORDER

Remove all jumpers


Set only JP1, JP8 and JP12


Set

Generator +24 VDC for PREP / RAD / FLUORO ORDER

Removed


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A


B


A

Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the Line sync.

B

Pulsed Fluoro sync. from the TV Camera video.

C

Pulsed Fluoro sync. from an external sync. (TV Camera, digital, etc.)

A

For ABC OUT signal from the video in

B

For ABC OUT signal from a negative System ABC signal

C

For ABC OUT signal from a positive System ABC signal

A

ABC OUT signal generated from a System ABC signal

B

ABC OUT signal incoming directly from the System

Set

When JP21 in position A

Removed

When JP21 in position B

Set Removed

Normal position To reduce noise in the ABC circuitry

A

Normal position

B

For Fluoro order enable

115


5.10 AEC CONTROL BOARD 5.10.1

AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--01/02/05)

JUMPERS / SWITCHES JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

JP1

A B C

FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG

JP2

A B

FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER

JP4

A B

FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER -- AEC FOR ION CHAMBER -- AEC & ATS--DIG

JP3

A B


NOTE:

A3012-05: A3012 05: JP1 JP1-C, C JP2-A JP2 A AND JP4 JP4-B B FOR FOURTH ION CHAMBER & ATS--DIG ATS DIG A3012-02: JP1-A, JP2-A AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA A3012-01: JP1-B,, JP2-B AND JP4-A FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER




RATING

DESCRIPTION

R10

10K, 1/2w

LOW SENSIBILITY ION CHAMBER ADJUSTMENT

R11

10K, 1/2w

KVP DOWN WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC

R12

10K, 1/2w

KVP UP WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC

116

TR-1005R4


5.10.2

AEC CONTROL BOARD (A3012--06/07/09)

JUMPERS / SWITCHES JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

JP1

A B C

FOR TV CAMERA FOR PHOTOMULTIPLIER EXTERNAL kV CONTROL

JP1-A FOR ABC WITH TV CAMERA JP1-B FOR ABC WITH PHOTOMULTIPLIER JP1-C FOR ABC WITH EXTERNAL kV UP & DOWN CONTROL

JP2

A B



JP3

B


JP3-B FOR NORMAL OPERATION

JP4

A


JP4-A FOR NORMAL OPERATION (Only in A3012-06)

NOTE:



RATING

DESCRIPTION

R10

10K, 1/2w

PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR CINE MODE

R11

10K, 1/2w

KVP DOWN WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC

R12

10K, 1/2w

PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR RAD OR DSA MODE

R13

10K, 1/2w

PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR FLUORO MODE

R14

10K, 1/2w

KVP UP WINDOW REFERENCE FOR ABC

R22

10K, 1/2w

LOW SENSIBILITY ION CHAMBER ADJUSTMENT

R23

10K, 1/2w

PHOTOMULTIPLIER GAIN ADJUSTMENT FOR DSI MODE

TR-1005R4

117


5.11 AEC ADAPTATION BOARD


ION CHAMBER TYPE

JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8

JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6

JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16

IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4

B

B

B

IC1 = IC2 = IC3

B

B

A

IC1 = IC2

B

A

A

IC1 ≠ IC2 ≠ IC3 ≠ IC4

A

A

A

ION CHAMBER OUTPUT

118

JUMPERS POSITION

JUMPERS POSITION JP9 (IC1)

JP10 (IC2)

JP11 (IC3)

JP12 (IC4)

NO-OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

A

A

A

A

OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

B

B

B

B


TP1 -- R11

TP2 -- R8

TP4 -- R2

TP12 -- R5

TR-1005R4


5.12 LF-RAC BOARD (LOW SPEED STARTER) JUMPERS / SWITCHES JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

TB2 -- T1

TUBE 1 STATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE SELECTION

JUMPER WITH TB1--7, 8, 9 : 330 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 STATOR JUMPER WITH TB1--4, 5, 6 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 STATOR

TB2 -- T2

TUBE 2 STATOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE SELECTION

JUMPER WITH TB1--7, 8, 9 : 330 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 STATOR JUMPER WITH TB1--4, 5, 6 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 STATOR

TB3 -- T1

TUBE 1 STATOR SHIFT CAPACITOR SELECTION

JUMPER WITH TB1--11, 12, 13 : 30 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 AUXILIARY JUMPER WITH TB1--14, 15, 16 : 15 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 AUXILIARY

TB3 -- T2

TUBE 2 STATOR SHIFT CAPACITOR SELECTION

JUMPER WITH TB1--11, 12, 13 : 30 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 AUXILIARY JUMPER WITH TB1--14, 15, 16 : 15 μF SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 AUXILIARY

TB4 -- T1

TUBE 1 FAN VOLTAGE SELECTION

JUMPER WITH TB1--21, 22, 23 : 115 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 FAN JUMPER WITH TB1--24, 25, 26 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 1 FAN

TB4 -- T2

TUBE 2 FAN VOLTAGE SELECTION

JUMPER WITH TB1--21, 22, 23 : 115 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 FAN JUMPER WITH TB1--24, 25, 26 : 220 VAC SELECTION FOR TUBE 2 FAN

LEDs LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DS1

YELLOW

ROTOR ACCELERATION STATUS INDICATOR

DS2

YELLOW

TUBE 2 SELECTION INDICATOR

DS3

YELLOW

ROTOR BRAKE STATUS INDICATOR

DS4

YELLOW

ROTOR CURRENT STATUS INDICATOR : HIGH BRIGHTNESS WHEN THE ROTOR ACCELERATION, AND NORMAL BRIGHTNESS IN THE ROTOR RUN STATUS

FUSES FUSE

RATING

NOMINAL

DESCRIPTION

F1

6 A, 250 V, S.B.

220 VAC

ROTOR

RELAYS RELAY

RATING

DESCRIPTION

K1 / KACC

+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 2 Fom C

ROTOR ACCELERATION

K2 / KCT

+24VDC COIL, 7A/250V CONTACT, 3 Form C

TUBE 2 SELECTION (FROM HT CONTROLLER)

K3 / KBR


ROTOR BRAKE

K4 / KCTR


TUBE 2 SELECTION (COILS)

K5 / KCTRR


TUBE 2 SELECTION (FANS & HV TRANSF--SWITCH)

TR-1005R4

119


5.13 LV-DRAC (HIGH SPEED STARTER) 5.13.1

DELAYED SWITCH-OFF BOARD RELAYS

RELAY

RATING

DESCRIPTION

K1


SWITCH-OFF DELAYED

K2


SWITCH-OFF MAINTAINED

5.13.2

CONTROL DRAC BOARD JUMPERS / SWITCHES

JUMPER / SWITCH

DESCRIPTION

SW1



SW2



SW3



SW4



LEDs LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DL1

RED

ERROR STATUS

DL2 (flashing)

YELLOW

CODE STATUS

DL3 (ON)

YELLOW

READY

DL4 (ON)

YELLOW

TUBE 1 SELECTED

DL5 (ON)

YELLOW

TUBE 2 SELECTED

DL6 (ON)

YELLOW

DC BRAKE

DL7 (ON)

YELLOW

BUS DC+

DL8 (ON)

YELLOW

BUS DC--

RELAYS RELAY

RATING

DESCRIPTION

RL2


READY

120

TR-1005R4


5.13.3

INTERFACE DRAC--HF BOARD LEDs

LED

COLOR

DESCRIPTION

DS1

GREEN

BUS DC

FUSES FUSE

RATING

NOMINAL

DESCRIPTION

F1

0.5 A, 250 V, S.B.

220 VAC

220 SUPPLY

F2

0.5 A, 250 V, S.B.

220 VAC

220 SUPPLY

F3

15 A, 250 V, S.B.

220 VAC

BUS DC--

F4

15 A, 250 V, S.B.

220 VAC

BUS DC+

5.13.4

DRAC MISCELLANEOUS RELAYS

RELAY

RATING

DESCRIPTION

K1

RELAY


TUBE 1 SELECTED

K3

CONTACTOR

+24VDC COIL, 15A/250V CONTACT, 3NA

DC BRAKE

KT1

CONTACTOR

+24VDC COIL, 15A/250V CONTACT, 3NA

TUBE 1 SELECTED

TR-1005R4

121


5.14 CABINET MISCELLANEOUS FOR LINE POWERED GENERATORS FUSES FUSE

RATING

NOMINAL

DESCRIPTION

F2

1.5 A, 250 V, S.B.

220 VAC

220 VAC SUPPLY

LOCATION -- RECTIFIER PANEL

F3

50 A, 600 V, S.B.

LINE

LINE -- L1

LOCATION -- CABINET FRAME

F4

50 A, 600 V, S.B.

LINE

LINE -- L2

”

”

F5

50 A, 600 V, S.B.

LINE

LINE -- L3

”

”

F6

3 A, 250 V, S.B.

19 VAC

+24V SUPPLY

F7

3 A, 250 V, S.B.

10.4 VAC

+12V UNR SUPPLY

”

”

F8

3 A, 250 V, S.B.

115 VAC

115 VAC SUPPLY

”

”

F9

0.4 A, 250 V, S.B.

220 VAC

220 VAC LVDC

F12

10 A, 250 V, S.B.

LINE

INPUT TRANSFORMER

F13

10 A, 250 V, S.B.

LINE

INPUT TRANSFORMER

F14

10 A, 250 V, S.B.

LINE

LINE OUTPUT -- U

F15

10 A, 250 V, S.B.

LINE

LINE OUTPUT -- V

”

”

F16

10 A, 250 V, S.B.

LINE

LINE OUTPUT -- W

”

”

LOCATION -- RECTIFIER PANEL

LOCATION -- FRONT PANEL LOCATION -- BACK PANEL ”

”

LOCATION -- CABINET FRAME

NOTE.-- FUSES F14, F15, F16 ARE ONLY INSTALLED IN VERTICAL GENERATOR CABINET, NEVER IN COMPACT MODEL.

RELAYS RELAY K1

SOLID STATE RELAY

K3

RATING

DESCRIPTION

+24VDC INPUT, 10A/250V OUTPUT

ROTOR START RELAY

110VAC COIL, 12A/250V CONTACT, 4PDT

POWER INPUT RELAY

K5

CONTACTOR

+24VDC COIL, 50A/600V CONTACT, 3 POLE

LINE CONTACTOR

K6

CONTACTOR

+24VDC COIL, 50A/600V CONTACT, 3 POLE

CHARGE CONTACTOR

122

TR-1005R4

Technical Publication MA-1004R4

Maintenance HF Series Generators

HF Series Generators Maintenance


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0

APR 1, 2001

First edition

1

DEC 20, 2001

Text revision

2

APR 15, 2005

Review of Maintenance procedures

3

DEC 12, 2005

Reference to Calibration Chapter

4

MAR 26, 2008

Calibration of Touch Screen Sensor






Note

MA-1004R4

.



TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section

Page

1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

2

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

2.1

Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

2.2


4

2.3

General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

2.3.1

External Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

2.3.2

Internal Cabinet Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

2.3.3

Internal Touch Screen Console Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

Cable Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

2.4.1

Ground Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

2.4.2

AC Power Supply in X-ray Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

Control Console Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

2.5.1

Touch Screen Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

2.6

HV Transformer Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

2.7

X-ray Tube Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

2.8

Radiographic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

2.8.1

Test for kV Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

2.8.2

Test for Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

2.8.3

Test for Digital mA Loop Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

AEC Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

2.9.1

Optical Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

2.9.2

kV Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15

2.9.3

ATS Digital AEC (RAD) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16

2.10 Fluoro Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

2.11 ABC Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18

SPECIAL MAINTENANCE RELATED TO BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS

21

3.1

Battery Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

3.2

Battery Charger Test and Battery Condition Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

2.4

2.5

2.9

3

i

MA-1004R3


ii

MA-1004R3


SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION The purpose of this Periodic Maintenance is to assure continued safe performance of the X-ray Generator, to increase serviceability, to reduce the costs (down time, repairs, etc.) and to assure the safety (personal risk). The following checks and maintenance procedures, together with the suggested intervals, are the manufacturer’s recommendation for the most effective Periodic Maintenance schedule for this Generator. Service tasks here described must be performed exclusively by service personnel specifically trained on medical X-ray Generators. The first Periodic Maintenance Service should be performed six (6) months after installation, and the subsequent services every twelve (12) months. Periodic Maintenance Service depends on the working load of the Generator and X-ray Tube.

Note

MA-1004R4

.

Take note in the Data Book all the periodic maintenance services carried out and the data changes made during any maintenance service.

1



2

MA-1004R4


SECTION 2

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

When any major component, such as a X-ray Tube, HV Transformer or major circuit board, is replaced in the system, perform the respective Configuration and Calibration procedures. Update and take note in the Data Book any new data entered in memory.

If the HT Control Board or the ATP Console CPU Board is replaced, check specially that Extended Memory data have not been lost or modified with the Board change. Compare Extended Memory data with the values noted in the Data Book. Also, make some exposures using different techniques and Focal Spot and check that mA stations are calibrated correctly, if not perform Calibration procedures.

Before starting the periodic maintenance procedures, it is recommended to make a test exposure using the same operating factors and conditions as a typical exposure. Perform the X-ray tube warm-up procedure if the tube has not been in use for approximately one hour. (Refer to Operator Manual of the Console).

2.1

TEST EQUIPMENT The tools and test equipment required to perform the Periodic Maintenance Service are the same as specified in “Installation” document.

MA-1004R4

3


2.2

GENERAL CAUTIONS

MAKE SURE THAT THE MAIN CAPACITORS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE INVERTER DO NOT CONTAIN ANY RESIDUAL CHARGE. WAIT UNTIL THE LIGHT EMITTING DIODES ON THE CHARGE-DISCHARGE MONITOR BOARDS ARE OFF, APPROX. 3 MINUTES AFTER THE UNIT IS TURNED OFF.



4

MA-1004R4


BATTERY POWERED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. WHEN IT DOES NOT WORK WITH STAND-ALONE, IT IS POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS POWERED, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. WHEN IT WORKS WITH OPTIONAL STAND-ALONE IT IS POWERED ON IN ALL SITUATIONS. WHEN THE UNIT IS TURNED ON, THE NEON LAMP (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. KEEP THE PROTECTION COVERS IN PLACE ALL THE TIME, ONLY REMOVE THE COVERS TO PERFORM SERVICE OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CONTACTOR 6K5, LINE FUSES, BATTERY CHARGER BOARD, LINE MONITOR BOARD, BATTERY MONITOR BOARD, ENERGY GUARD BOARD AND STAND-ALONE BOARD) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE BATTERIES (APPROX. 400 VDC) ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THIS AREA.

CAPACITOR ASSISTED GENERATOR: THIS GENERATOR IS PERMANENTLY CONNECTED TO THE POWER LINE THROUGH A LINE PLUG. IT IS POWERED ON UNLESS THE SAFETY SWITCH INSTALLED IN THE ROOM ELECTRICAL CABINET IS OFF. WHEN THE UNIT IS POWERED, THE NEON (GREEN) LOCATED ON THE TRANSFORMER 6T2 IS ON. KEEP THE PROTECTION COVERS IN PLACE ALL THE TIME, ONLY REMOVE THE COVERS TO PERFORM SERVICE OPERATIONS. INTERNAL PARTS (CAPACITOR OF HV INVERTER, STORAGE CAPACITORS MODULE, LINE FUSES, DC BUS FUSES, ETC.) ARE PERMANENTLY POWERED ON AND HAVE THE FULL VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE CAPACITORS (APPROX. 800 VDC), ALTHOUGH THE UNIT IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE LINE OR THE CONTROL CONSOLE IS OFF. USE CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THIS AREA.

MA-1004R4

5


2.3

GENERAL CLEANING NEVER ATTEMPT TO CLEAN OR HANDLE ANY PART OF THE X-RAY GENERATOR WHEN IT IS TURNED ON. SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR MAIN DISCONNECT BEFORE CLEANING OR INSPECTING.

2.3.1

EXTERNAL SURFACES Clean external covers and surfaces frequently, particularly if corroding chemicals are present and specially parts in contact with the patient, with a cloth moistened in warm water with mild soap solution. Rinse wipe with a cloth moistened in clean water. Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind. Clean Console keyboard and displays with a cloth dampened in warm water. Rinse wipe with a cloth dampened in clean water. Also check painted surfaces for scratching and touch up as required.

2.3.2

INTERNAL CABINET CLEANING Remove the external access cover from the Generator Cabinet. Visually inspect all major components for dust or foreign items. Search carefully to detect objects which might cause short circuits and for loose connections. If excess dust is present, clean the interior of the Generator Cabinet using a dry brush or vacuum cleaner. Make sure that the fans operate properly and the vent holes of the cabinet are not obstructed.

2.3.3

INTERNAL TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE CLEANING MAKE SURE THAT THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE IS POWERED OFF OR UNPLUGGED. Remove the front cover of the Touch Screen Console. Visually inspect internally for dust or foreign items. Search carefully to detect objects which might cause short circuits and for loose connections. If excess dust is present, clean the interior of the Touch Screen Console using a dry brush or vacuum cleaner. Make sure that the fans operate properly and the vent holes are not obstructed. Clean the Touch Screen sensor with an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50 , always damp the lint-free cloth and then clean the screen. Spray the cleaning liquid onto the cloth, never spray directly on the screen.

6

MA-1004R4


2.4

CABLE CHECKS

CAREFULLY HANDLE ALL INTERNAL PARTS OF THE UNIT.

Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure and that all cable clamps and strain reliefs are in place. Also check that connectors do not have exposed wire-veins and check cable sheaths (cable cover) for wear and fraying. Check that all cables are correctly routed.

2.4.1

GROUND CABLE CONNECTIONS The central reference ground of the X-ray System and Generator is located at the Generator Cabinet. Check the ground lead interconnections continuity using a multimeter at its lowest ohms range.

2.4.2

AC POWER SUPPLY IN X-RAY ROOM Measure the value of AC power supply between all phases, neutral and ground. Check that these values comply with the tolerances established at the original installation.

MA-1004R4

7


2.5

CONTROL CONSOLE CONDITION Check the proper connection and condition of the cables connected to the Console. If applicable, check the Handswitch condition. Verify that the Handswitch cable and its connection to the Console are in good condition. Check correct operation of the buttons, displays and indicators by performing the following test:

8

1.

Turn the Generator / Console ON.

2.

If the Console is a Touch Screen Console, touch on different points of the operator application on the Touch Screen to check that the Touch Screen Sensor is properly calibrated. If it is not calibrated, perform the procedure described in Section 2.5.1 -- Touch Screen Sensor Calibration.

3.

If applicable, check the Handswitch condition. Verify that the Handswitch cable and its connection to the Console are in good condition.

4.

Select a radiographic technique and observe: G

Indicators of the selected workstation and Focal Spot.

G

Technique parameters are displayed on the Console. Change technique parameters and observe that changes are correctly displayed.

G

Select the parameters for an usual exposure. Press “Prep” and verify that the “Ready” indicator is activated. Release “Prep” and observe that the “Ready” indicator is deactivated.

G

Make the exposure, and verify that radiographic exposure signal sounds and the “Prep” and “X-ray On” indicators are activated during the exposure.

5.

If AEC is installed, select a technique with AEC and observe that the indicators of the selected AEC controls are activated.

6.

If APR is installed, select an APR technique and observe: G

Indicators of the selected Patient Size are activated and the Body Region / Anatomical Views are shown on the APR Display and its corresponding parameters are shown on the RAD Display.

G

Change the APR technique and observe that selection and parameters changes on both Displays.

MA-1004R4


7.

2.5.1

If Fluoro is installed, select a workstation for Fluoro operation and observe: G

Fluoro parameters are displayed on the Fluoro Display.

G

Change the Fluoro kV and observe that changes are correctly displayed.

G

Check selection of another functions related to Fluoro if they are present (ABC, PPS, etc.).

TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR CALIBRATION

Note

.

This calibration procedure only applies to Touch Screen Console. If required to calibrate the Sensor of the Touch Screen because the buttons can not be properly selected or because the Compact Flash has been changed, perform the next procedure: CALIBRATION FOR AN “ELO” TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR 1.


2.

Press the “Start--Windows” button on the keyboard connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select (double-click): “Settings / Control Panel / EloTouchscreen”.

3.

Execute the “Align” program and follow the process touching on the indicated places. Click on “Yes” and “OK”, then close the “Control Panel”.

4.

Return to the Application through “Start” and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console”.

CALIBRATION FOR A “3M” TOUCH SCREEN SENSOR

MA-1004R4

1.


2.

On the PC Desktop, press the“Start-Windows” button on the keyboard connected to the Touch Screen Console, then select: “Programs / UPDD / Calibrate”.

3.

Execute the “Calibrate” program and follow the process clicking on the indicated places.

4.

When finish this calibration, come back to the Application by entering again in “Start” and select: “Programs / Start up (select the first one) / Console”.

9


2.6

HV TRANSFORMER CONDITION The HV Transformer contains “Shell Diala AX” oil. Check that there is not oil leakage. If found, remove the oil fill plug from the top of the HV Transformer and verify that the oil level is within 20 mm (3/4”) of the top surface of the HV Transformer. If necessary add oil “Shell Diala AX”.

Note

.

This point does not apply to the hermetic HV Transfromers (black aluminium HV Transformers).

Make sure that:

2.7

•

HV oil in the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence of arcing.

•

HV Cable terminal rings are tight.

X-RAY TUBE CONDITION Make sure that:

10

•

All parts are mechanically secure with no oil leaks.

•

HV grease on the HV Cable terminals is clean and shows no evidence of arcing.

•

HV Cable terminal rings are tight.

MA-1004R4


2.8

RADIOGRAPHIC PARAMETERS With the generator power OFF, connect:

Note

2.8.1

.

G

Non-invasive kV Meter to measure kV.

G

mAs Meter to the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer to measure mA or mAs (connect the mAs Meter for Digital mA Loops calibration).

Test points on the HT Controller PCB can also be used to monitor the kV and mA readings but should not be used to calibrate the unit. These test points must be checked with scope. (Refer to Calibration chapter -- Section 2 “Calibration Procedures”, for test points and scale factors).

TEST FOR kV LOOP 1.

Verify that dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board is in “Off” position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).

2.

Turn the Generator ON and select the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation in one of the X-ray Tubes.

3.

Select 80 kV, 200 mA (or the first mA station for Large Focus), 100 ms. Make an exposure and note the kV at the end of the exposure.

4.

Check that the kV value read on the kV Meter must be 80 ±1 kV. If the kV value does not comply with the above value, perform the respective Calibration procedures.

MA-1004R4

11


2.8.2

TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP OPEN 1.

Note

.

Set the dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “On” position (Digital mA Loop Open / Filament Current Constant).

Only for Generators with LF-RAC (LSS): -- When the mA Loop is open (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “On”), the rotor runs for two minutes after release the handswitch push-button from “Preparation” position. -- When the mA Loop is closed (dip switch 3000SW2-4 in “Off”), the Tube will brake after release the handswitch push-button from “Preparation” position.

2.

Enter in Manual Calibration selecting the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation of the corresponding X-ray Tube.

3.

Select 80 kV and the following mA stations. Make an exposure and note the mAs values read on the mAs Meter.

4.

G

Minimum mA for Small Focal Spot.

G

Maximum mA for Small Focal Spot.

G

Minimum mA for Large Focal Spot.

G

Maximum mA for Large Focal Spot.

Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±6% mAs. If the mAs values do not comply with the above values, perform the respective Auto-Calibration procedures.

12

5.

Repeat this test for the second X-ray Tube.

6.

Turn the Generator OFF and set the dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in “Off” position (Digital mA Loop Closed).

MA-1004R4


2.8.3

2.9

TEST FOR DIGITAL mA LOOP CLOSED 1.

Turn the Generator ON and select the “Direct” (No Bucky) workstation in one of the X-ray Tubes.

2.

Select the following parameters, make an exposure and note the mAs values read on the mAs Meter. G

80 kV, 100 ms, 50 mA.

G

80 kV, 100 ms, 200 mA.

3.

Check that the mAs values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mAs displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±4% mAs.

4.

If the mAs values do not comply with the above values, perform the respective Auto-Calibration procedures.

5.

Turn the Generator OFF.

AEC CHECKS

Note

.

For AEC calibration, use the same Film and Cassettes used by the customer. AEC calibration must be performed using the Medium Film/Screen speed combination. The Medium Film/Screen speed has to be double of the Slow and half of the Fast (a.e. 200--Slow, 400--Medium, 800--Fast).

Note

.

When using CR (Computer Radiography) or DR (Digital Radiography) instead of measuring Optical Density: -- measure the Image Gray level by using the needed software tools inside each application (refer CR or DR documentation). -- or measure the Dose level: -- For CR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the Cassette and centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber. -- For DR, placing the Dosimeter as close as possible to the Panel, centered with the Central Area of the Ion Chamber and with the Grid removed.

MA-1004R4

13


2.9.1

OPTICAL DENSITY

Note

.

The Film Optical Density must be measured always on the same point for all the X-ray Films developed during this procedure. The recommended point is on the central axis of the Film with relation of the Anode and Cathode and as close as possible to center of the Film.

A

K

USEFUL BEAM

FILM

DENSITOMETER

R

14

1.


2.


3.


4.

Select a workstation for the Ion Chamber to be tested. Select on the Console: G


G

AEC Menu: “Central Film/Screen”.

Area”,

“Density

0”

and

“Medium

MA-1004R4


2.9.2

5.

Make an exposure without film in the cassette and note the Exposure Time displayed on the Console, it should be approximately 100 ms. If necessary, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again.

6.

Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the customer. Make an exposure, develop the film and check the Optical Density, it should be 1.0 (or the customer preference O. Density).

7.

If the Optical Density is not as required, perform the respective AEC Calibration procedure.

8.


kV COMPENSATION 1.

MA-1004R4

Select a workstation for the Ion Chamber to be tested. Select on the Console: G


G


2.

Make an exposure without film in the cassette and check that the Exposure Time is lower than 1 second. If necessary for that, change the Copper thickness (or if needed change the mA station) and make the exposure again. Take note of the final Copper thickness and mA station selected for 55 kV.

3.


15


2.9.3


5.

Insert a cassette with the Medium Film/Screen combination used by the customer. Make an exposure at 55 kV and 90 kV (use the final Copper thickness and the selected mA station noted before for each kV), develop the film and measure the Optical Density obtained with those exposures. Check that the film variation range is the same ±0.2 of the Optical Density (or ±20% of Image Gray Level / Dose Level with CR or DR) obtained before at 70 kV (Optical Density Adjustment -- Section 2.9.1).

6.

If the variation values is not as required, perform the respective AEC Calibration procedure.

7.


ATS DIGITAL AEC (RAD) (OPTIONAL)

Note

16

4.

.

If the Generator is interfaced with an “ATS Digital System”, Digital AEC test has to be performed as explained in the “ATS Digital System” documentation.

MA-1004R4


2.10 FLUORO CHECK

Fluoro functions are calibrated by performing the following steps: 1.

Turn the Generator ON.

Make sure that the Small Filament of the X-ray tube is properly warmed-up.

2.

Note

.

Set up a Dosimeter to measure the Maximum Entrance Skin Exposure Dose Rate. Position the Probe at the center of the primary beam with the entire active volume within the primary beam. Place the Tube-Collimator Assembly as close as possible to the Table-Top, fully open the Collimator Blades and align the Image Intensifier with the light beam. Block radiation input to Image Intensifier with a Lead Apron. (Refer to Illustration in Fluoro Calibration).

Note that in practice, the rejection limits for entrance exposure rate must be somewhat less than the maximum specified due to Dosimeter calibration accuracy.

REJECTIONS LIMITS

METER CALIBRATION ACCURACY

FOR 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) MAXIMUM

FOR 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) MAXIMUM

±5%



±10%



±15%



3.

For testing the Dose, make a Fluoro exposure at maximum kV and measure the dose applied, it should not be over the Rejection Limits for 5 R/min (43.5 mGy/min) or 10 R/min (87 mGy/min) (refer to the above table). In case that the value is not acquired, perform the respective Fluoro calibration process.

MA-1004R4

17


4.

The Fluoro mA values are obtained by measuring the average mA using a mA meter in Fluoro. During Fluoro exposure, mA values are read directly with a mA Meter in DC connected to the mA Test Points (banana plug connections) on the HV Transformer. Only for this purpose, remove the link between the banana plug connections on the HV Transformer.

5.

For testing the mA, make a Fluoro exposure at 50 kV, 80 kV and 110 kV. Check that the mA values read on the mAs Meter must be the same mA displayed on the Console with a tolerance of ±10 % mA. If the mA value does not comply with the above values, perform the respective Calibration procedures.

6.

Remove the Dosimeter and the Lead Apron (Blocker).

2.11 ABC CHECK

Note

.

If the Generator is interfaced with an ATS Image System, ABC testing procedure has to be performed as explained in the Image System documentation.

1.


2.


3.

18


MA-1004R4


4.

Select ABC mode.

5.


6.

Make a Fluoro exposure and check that Fluoro kVp displayed on the Console is between 80 kVp and 60 kVp. If it is more than 80 kV or less than 60 kV modify the Copper thickness in steps of 0.1 mm (or 0.2 mm) and make Fluoro exposures until the kVp is within the range.

7.

Calculate the value of the optimum dose rate (that will give optimum brightness) to obtain 2μR/frame at 9” FOV. Examples: For 25 frame/second optimum dose rate is 3 mR/min. 2 μR/frame x 25 frame/s = 50 μR/s. 50 μR/s x 60 s/min = 3000 μR/min = 3 mR/min. For 30 frame/second optimum dose rate is 3.6 mR/min. 2 μR/frame x 30 frame/s = 60 μR/s. 60 μR/s x 60 s/min = 3600 μR/min = 3.6 mR/min. The optimum dose rate (dose rate) value should be measured at Image Intensifier Radiation Input. Intensifier grid should be removed, if it can not be removed, this value should be multiplied by the value specified as Grid Absorption Factor.

MA-1004R4

8.

Make a Fluoro exposure and measure the dose rate. The dose rate read on the Dosimeter must be the same as the previously calculated with the tolerance specified by the Dosimeter accuracy. If the dose rate does not comply, perform the respective Calibration procedures.

9.


10.


19



20

MA-1004R4


SECTION 3

Note

3.1

.

SPECIAL MAINTENANCE RELATED TO BATTERY POWERED GENERATORS

This Section only applies to Battery Powered Generators and must be performed at least once a year.

BATTERY STORAGE CONDITIONS This generator should be stored at a dry environment around 20oC (68oF). The recommended operating temperature is 15oC to 30oC (59oF to 86oF). During normal storage conditions (dry environment at 20oC (68oF) the internal resistance of the batteries will cause a discharge rate of 15% per six month period. Storage above 30oC (86oF) should be avoided, since it will cause excessive battery voltage loss. Within the recommended operating temperature and under optimum float conditions, the batteries service life is expected to exceed 5 years. The batteries of the Unit are fully charged when delivered from the factory. If the Unit is going to be stored or has been stored for a period longer than six months, batteries must be fully charged during eight hours before operation or service tasks.

If the unit has not been used or it has been stored for six months, it should be installed and/or energized to prevent deep discharge of the batteries. A deep discharge will cause permanent damage to the batteries. Perform the following Maintenance Tests.

3.2

BATTERY CHARGER TEST AND BATTERY CONDITION TEST Refer to Section 2.6 “Procedures related to the Battery Powered Generators” of the Troubleshooting document in the Service Manual and perform all the indicated procedures to carry out a correct maintenance of the Battery Charger Board and Batteries.

MA-1004R4

21



22

MA-1004R4

Technical Publication SC-1005R0

Schematics HF Series Generators

HF Series Generators Schematics


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE Refer to each schematic






Note

SC-1005R0

.


HF Series Generators Schematics

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sch. No.

Scheme POWER CABINET

54302010

Compact Generator (for 2 Tubes or HS with LV-DRAC)

A3274--01

Delayed Switch-Off PCB (only used with HS generators)

A3000--xx

HT Controller PCB (12 bits)

A3004--xx

Filament Control PCB

A3009--xx

Interface Control PCB

A3063--03

IPM Driver PCB

A3212--01

Charge / Discharge Monitor PCB

A3024--xx

ATP Console PCB -- Console CPU PCB

A3012--01/02/05

AEC Control PCB

SC-1005R0

i

F

E

POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER 6T2 44

4

connect according with the input line

10 9

440 VAC

7

415 VAC

8

400 VAC

5

230 VAC

POWER LAMP

9

115 VAC SW 115 VAC 18

3K3

115 VAC

6NL1 4

3

2

4

A

2 3 4

3F9 T 0.4A

+5V

7 10 8 9

jumper jumper

+5V

+12V

+12V

--PWR OFF

6J2 4 5

--PWR ON

--12V

3

--12V GND

9 2 8

6

6 7 1

0 VAC

17

21 VAC 15

1

LVDC POWER SUPPLY 3PS1

13

( S3,S4--B3) 0 VAC

1

3LF3 14

B ( S3,S4--C4)

240 VAC SW

5

480 VAC 3F8 T 3A

C

Note.-- Input Transformer 6T2 could be as shown on sheet 2 of the schematic for input line below 400 VAC

3F2 T 1.5A

240 VAC 20

530 VAC

D

3F6 T 3A

--PWR OFF --PWR ON +12V --12V +12V UNR +12V UNR

4

GND GND GND

3TS1 0 VAC 14 40

110 VAC 11 VAC 12

1 ohm 4w

+24V--PSU 3F7 T 3A

-11

+

3BR4

7

--

3BR2

+

10

17 16

3K3

3C6 2400 MF

3C7 2400 MF

6

54

+24V

15

0 VAC 11 28 VAC 26 VAC 24 VAC 22 VAC 20 VAC 16 VAC 14 VAC 12 VAC 0 VAC

3 3

60 VAC

2 1

0 VAC

26

240 VAC SW

35 34 16 33 32 31 30 19 13

-12

24 VAC TR

8

3BR1

( S5--F2)

0 VAC TR

27

115 VAC SW

+

240 VAC SPLY +24V --12 V +12 V 240 VAC SW 115 VAC SW

3

+SUPPLY ( S3,S4--E1) --SUPPLY

Shield Stud T3

L3

0 VAC RTR 60 VAC RTR 230 VAC RTR

6F13 T 10A 6R1 20 ohm 100w

6F12 T 10A 6F3 T 50A 6F4 T 50A

L2

6F5 T 50A

L3

L1

T1

L2

T2

L2

T2

L3

T3

L3

T3

C3 1 nF LOAD

L1

AC2

CR1 C4 470 nF

C12 470 nF C7 1 nF

GND NEUTRAL

C8 470 nF Note.- 12TS4, 12F14, 12F15, and 12F16 are optional

12TS4 N U

DELAYED +24V

12F14

W

12F16 T 15A

1

6J3 10

AC3

A2(B)

T 15A

V

--LINE CONT

+

AC1 6LF1

MAINS

2

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO THREE PHASE GENERATOR

( S8--F4)

12F15

A1(A)

T 15A

A2(B) A1(A)

6K6

6K5 --LINE CONT ( S3,S4--B4)

C

CN 05/109

F. GARCIA

B

CN 03/46,55,58,60

F. GARCIA

09/04/03

F. GARCIA

12/12/02

A F

E

D

REV

CN 02/197 DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

R3 33 ohm

CR3

R5 33 ohm

C1 470 nF

C5 470 nF

C9 470 nF

C2 470 nF

C6 470 nF

C10 470 nF

R2 33 ohm

R4 33 ohm

R6 33 ohm

--

C11 1 nF

--CHRG DR ( S3,S4--D4)

+24V--PSU

R1 33 ohm

CR2

BUS + ( S5--F2)

2

BUS -( S5--F2)

1

INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD 5A5

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

30/09/02

REVISED

A. DIAZ

11/11/02

SHEET / OF 1/8

DWG:

54302010 C

B

A

02/08/05

DATE

SEDECAL

COMPACT--LV DRAC/LF RAC GENERATOR

REV

F

E

POWER INPUT TRANSFORMER 6T2

connect according with the input line

7

240 VAC

240 VAC 20

D Note.-- Input Transformer 6T2 could be as shown on sheet 1 of the schematic for input line greater than 240 VAC

3F2 T 1.5A

9

115 VAC SW 115 VAC 18

4 POWER LAMP

115 VAC

3K3

6NL1

230 VAC

0 VAC

17

4 21 VAC 15 21 23 3

4

+5V

7 10 8 9

jumper jumper

+12V

+12V

--PWR ON

--12V

3

--12V GND

9 2 8

6

6 7 1

3F6 T 3A

--PWR OFF --PWR ON +12V --12V +12V UNR +12V UNR

4

GND GND GND

3TS1 0 VAC 14

120 VAC 110 VAC

11 VAC 12

1 ohm 4w

+24V--PSU 3F7 T 3A

-11

+

3BR4

7

--

3BR2

+

10

54 17 16

3K3

3C6 2400 MF

3C7 2400 MF

6

+24V

15

0 VAC 11

100 VAC

28 VAC 26 VAC 24 VAC 22 VAC 20 VAC 16 VAC 14 VAC 12 VAC 0 VAC

60 VAC

2 1

2

2 3 4

3F9 T 0.4A

+5V

6J2 4 5

208 VAC

3 9

3

A --PWR OFF

0 VAC

8 22

1

LVDC POWER SUPPLY 3PS1

13

( S3,S4--B3) 5

1

3LF3 14

B ( S3,S4--C4)

240 VAC SW

5

6 3F8 T 3A

C

0 VAC

26

240 VAC SW

35 34 16 33 32 31 30 19 13

-12

24 VAC TR

8

3BR1

( S5--F2)

0 VAC TR

27

115 VAC SW

+

240 VAC SPLY +24V --12 V +12 V 240 VAC SW 115 VAC SW

3

+SUPPLY ( S3,S4--E1) --SUPPLY

Shield Stud L1

T1

0 VAC RTR 60 VAC RTR 230 VAC RTR

6F13 T 10A

Note.- For Two Phases, replace Neutral Cartidge (L2/N) by Fuse 6F4.

6F3 T 50A

L1

Neutral or 6F4 Cartridge T 50A

N / L2

L1

T1

L2

T2

6R1 20 ohm, 100w

C7 1 nF

6LF1

L2

T2

Note.- 12TS4, 12F14 and 12F15, are optional

N

U

AC3 DELAYED +24V

12F15

V

T 15A

12F14 T 15A

W

+24V--PSU

A1(A)

6J3 --LINE CONT

10

A1(A) 6K5

R5 33 ohm

C5 470 nF

C9 470 nF

C6 470 nF

C10 470 nF

R4 33 ohm

R6 33 ohm

--

6K6

2

BUS -( S5--F2)

1

INPUT RECTIFIER BOARD 5A5

--LINE CONT ( S3,S4--B4)

E

BUS + ( S5--F2)

--CHRG DR ( S3,S4--D4)

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO SINGLE PHASE GENERATOR F

C11 1 nF

R3 33 ohm

CR3

A2(B)

A2(B) 1

CR2

C8 470 nF

GND 12TS4

+

AC2

LOAD

2

MAINS

6F12 T 10A

( S8--F4)

D

C

CN 05/109

F. GARCIA

02/08/05

B

CN 03/46,55,58,60

F. GARCIA

09/04/03

A

CN 02/197

F. GARCIA

12/12/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

30/09/02

REVISED

A. DIAZ

11/11/02

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 2/8

DWG:

54302010 C

B

A


REV

E

D

C

B

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH HT TRANSFORMER FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES

--12V

4

+12V +5V

2 +12V 3 +5V 4 GND 5 GND

6J3 PT CRL --KV UP --KV DWN HT--C DAT HT--C CLK --EXP C--HT DAT C--HT CLK --PREP

7 15 8 3

--FIL1 SCL --START --PRE CHRG --CHRG DR

--KV UP 2 --KV DWN 6 --EXP

6 1 2

--TUBE 3

4 C--HT DAT 5 C--HT CLK

5 4

P4 3

RTR I ( S8--F1)

8 4

BUCKY SPLY BUCKY SPLY AUX BUCKY SPLY --BUCKY 1 MOTION --BUCKY 2 MOTION BUCKY 1 DR BUCKY 2 DR 0 VAC 0 VAC BUCKY 1 MOT RTN GND BUCKY 2 MOT RTN GND SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) SUPPLY (BUCKY 2)

--FIL DR1 --FIL DR2 GND

RTR I FIL I See NOTE 2

1 --KV 2 +KV

3TS1 2 9

--RTR RUN --ACC --BRAKE --HS SCL --RTR RDY

6 --MA 7 +MA 5 GND

46

-- IGBT FAULT -- AUTO OFF INH HI MA

12 13 14 15 16 17 P3 6 1 2 4

--TUBE 2 SCL ( S8--F1)

--T2 SCL ( S8--F1)

+12V

--START ( S8--F1)

--BUCKY 1 DR CMD

( S5--F3)

--BUCKY 2 DR CMD

5 3

+5V +24V +24V +24V

DELAYED +24V

PT CRL

--LINE CONT +5V OUT

--ON GND

DISCHARGE 1 DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN

+12V GND

GND

+24V GND GND

LINE SYNC

P4 12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 9 BUCKY SPLY 5 AUX BUCKY SPLY 11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION

PT SPLY IC SPLY 1 IC SPLY 2 IC GND --ROOM LIGHT

10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION ROOM LIGHT SW 8 BUCKY 1 DR ROOM LIGHT SUP 7 BUCKY 2 DR 18 --TUBE 2 SCL 19 --BUCKY EXP --FIL 1 SCL 17 115 VAC FIL PREHEAT 14 0 VAC FIL RTN 115 VAC SW 22 --FIL 1 ACK FIL 1 RTN See NOTE 1 FIL 2 RTN

P5 5 7 6 9 4 3 1 10

4 2 1

ERROR DRAC ( S3--A2 )

--KV DR2

6

--PWR ON --PWR OFF

P3

+24V

--CHRG DR ( S1, 2--E1 )

--KV DR1

2 1

-- IGBT FAULT ( S5--D3)

SOL DR

P5 6 8 5 16

+5V +24V +24V--PSU DELAYED +24V

2 1 4 12 14 13 10 9


J1

3

K A

0 VAC

6 13

DELAYED +24V

14

+5V

1 8

+SUPPLY --SUPPLY

P1 5

FIL PREHEAT --FIL DR1 FIL RTN 6 --FIL DR2 FIL SUP 3 +5V 8 DELAYED +24V 7 FIL I 1 GND

P2 4 1

P3 2

B

--BUCKY 1 DR CMD

C D E

1 4

+SUPPLY

FILAMENT DRIVER BOARD

--SUPPLY

3A3

--TUBE 2 SCL (S8--F1) HT SW CONTROL 10A2 J2 1 2 3 +24V

4

F H

J1 1

G N

3TS1 39

5

2

U

3

--ROOM LIGHT (S5--B4)

4

4 5

0 VAC

6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version ( See LV DRAC documentation ) E

D

C

CN 05/109

F. GARCIA

02/08/05

B A

CN 03/46,55,58,60

F. GARCIA F. GARCIA

09/04/03 12/12/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

CN 02/197

J

240 VAC SW

--T2 SCL signal is shortcircuited with --TUBE 2 SCL signal for High Speed Version --ACC and --BRAKE signals for Low Speed Version become --TUBE 1 RTR and --TUBE 2 RTR respectively for High Speed Version

V

6

--HT INTLK NAME

DATE

F. GARCIA

30/09/02

REVISED

A. DIAZ

11/11/02

GND

115 VAC (S1,2--E4)

1

0 VAC

3 15

115 VAC SW

NOTE 1.-- For Generators with HT Transformer for two Tubes: Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2 RTN (P4--16) are factory inverted on the INTERFACE CONTROL

16 20

--BRAKE (S8--F1) 6J1

+24V

10

ERROR DRAC ( S3--D3 )

8

+ 24V

--RTR RUN --TUBE 2 RTR

4

--HS SCL

5

P1

HT DR1 ( S5--C4 )

P3

HT DR2 ( S5--C4 )

SEDECAL

--TUBE 1 RTR

3

( S5--B4)

3/8

DWG:

--SF PREP

7 12

--FL EXP --PREP

11

--PREP ( S5--F3)

COM ( S5--E2 )

SHEET / OF

--RTR RDY

6

--SF PREP --FL EXP

2

ERROR DRAC

9

mA

SHLD

DRAWING

ROOM LIGHT SUP

18

P4 6

3

ROOM LIGHT SW

47

1

SW1 SW2

IC GND

48

Black

SW COM

PT SPLY

42

7 2

test ] posts

FIL SUP

GND

2

Red

FIL 2 RTN

--BUCKY 2 DR CMD

16

3

2

--BUCKY EXP --BUCKY 1 DR CMD

11

--BUCKY 2 DR CMD

P2 1

HT TRANSFORMER 9HT1 HI MA GND GND +KV --KV +MA --MA FIL 1 RTN

LINE SYNC

14

--ACC (S8--F1)

11

7

6J3 9 12

P3 3

4

10

4

--LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 ) +5V OUT (S5--F3)

12

NOTE 2 :

F

4 3

See NOTE 2

11

8

--PWR OFF

P1 10

5

( S1, 2--B3 ) 1

ERROR DRAC --KV DR1 --KV DR2

3 --PREP 9 GND 7 --CHRG 8 --FIL 1 ACK

--CHRG ( S5--A2)

2

HT--C CLK

HT--C DAT --TUBE 2 SCL

P1 1

--PREP ( S3--A1)

3

HT CONTROL BOARD 3A1 --12V

P1 7

--PWR ON

( S1, 2--A4 ) P2 1

INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD 3A2

A

(S5--A2)

F

GND

1

6J3 13

--HT INTLK

54302010 C

B

A


REV

E

D

C

B

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO GENERATORS WITH HT TRANSFORMER FOR ONLY ONE X--RAY TUBE

( S1, 2--A4 ) --12V

4

+12V +5V

P2 1

2 +12V 3 +5V 4 GND 5 GND

6J3 PT CRL --KV UP --KV DWN HT--C DAT HT--C CLK --EXP C--HT DAT C--HT CLK --PREP

7 15 8 3

--FIL1 SCL --START --PRE CHRG --CHRG DR

--KV UP 2 --KV DWN 6 --EXP

6 1 2

--TUBE 3

4 C--HT DAT 5 C--HT CLK

5 4

P4 3

RTR I ( S8--F1 )

8 4

BUCKY SPLY BUCKY SPLY AUX BUCKY SPLY --BUCKY 1 MOTION --BUCKY 2 MOTION BUCKY 1 DR BUCKY 2 DR 0 VAC 0 VAC BUCKY 1 MOT RTN GND BUCKY 2 MOT RTN GND SUPPLY (BUCKY 1) SUPPLY (BUCKY 2)

ERROR DRAC --KV DR1 --KV DR2

3 --PREP 9 GND 7 --CHRG 8 --FIL 1 ACK

--CHRG ( S5--A2 )

2

HT--C CLK

HT--C DAT --TUBE 2 SCL

P1 1

--PREP ( S4--A1 )

3

HT CONTROL BOARD 3A1 --12V

--FIL DR2 GND

RTR I FIL I See NOTE 2

1 --KV 2 +KV

3TS1 2

--FIL DR1

9

--BRAKE --HS SCL --RTR RDY

6 --MA 7 +MA 5 GND

46

--RTR RUN --ACC

-- IGBT FAULT -- AUTO OFF INH HI MA

P1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P3 6 1 2 4

See NOTE 2 --T2 SCL ( S8--F1 )

INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD 3A2 P1 7

--PWR ON

4 3

--TUBE 2 SCL ( S8--F1 )

+12V

--START ( S8--F1 )

4 2 1

ERROR DRAC ( S4--A2 )

--KV DR2

6

( S5--F3 )

--BUCKY 1 DR CMD --BUCKY 2 DR CMD

3

GND


+12V GND

GND

+24V GND GND

LINE SYNC

PT SPLY IC SPLY 1 IC SPLY 2 IC GND --ROOM LIGHT

10 --BUCKY 2 MOTION ROOM LIGHT SW 8 BUCKY 1 DR ROOM LIGHT SUP 7 BUCKY 2 DR 18 --TUBE 2 SCL 19 --BUCKY EXP --FIL 1 SCL 17 115 VAC FIL PREHEAT 14 0 VAC FIL RTN 115 VAC SW 22 --FIL 1 ACK FIL 1 RTN See NOTE 1 FIL 2 RTN

P5 5 7 6 9 4 -- IGBT FAULT ( S5--D3 )

SOL DR

5

P5 6 8 5 16

+5V +24V +24V--PSU DELAYED +24V

2

14 13 10 9


J1

3

K A

0 VAC

6 13

DELAYED +24V

14

+5V

1 8

P1 5

FIL PREHEAT --FIL DR1 FIL RTN 6 --FIL DR2 FIL SUP 3 +5V 8 DELAYED +24V 7 FIL I 1 GND

P3 2

B

--BUCKY 1 DR CMD

C D E

1 4

F H G N

3

+SUPPLY --SUPPLY

P2 4 1

+SUPPLY

FILAMENT DRIVER BOARD

--SUPPLY

3A3

V J

NOTE 2 :

--ROOM LIGHT ( S5--B4 )

4 6

2

115 VAC (S1,2--E4)

1

0 VAC

3 15

115 VAC SW

NOTE 1.-- Only for one FL tube : Wires FL 1 RTN (P4--15) and FL 2 RTN (P4--16) are factory inverted on the INTERFACE CONTROL board, and 6J3--13 unconnected to J1--J of the HT TRANSFORMER

16 20

--BRAKE ( S8--F1 )

--T2 SCL signal is shortcircuited with --TUBE 2 SCL signal for High Speed Version CN 05/109

--ACC and --BRAKE signals for Low Speed Version become --TUBE 1 RTR and --TUBE 2 RTR respectively for High Speed Version

C B

CN 03/46,55,58,60

F. GARCIA

09/04/03

6J1 connector used only for High Speed Version ( See LV DRAC documentation )

A

CN 02/197

F. GARCIA

12/12/02

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

E

D

F. GARCIA

6J1

+24V

10

ERROR DRAC ( S4--D3 )

8

COM ( S5--E2 )

--HT INTLK

REVISED

A. DIAZ

11/11/02

SHEET / OF 4/8

DWG:

( S5--B4 )

9

--RTR RUN --TUBE 1 RTR --TUBE 2 RTR --HS SCL --RTR RDY

6

--SF PREP --FL EXP

--SF PREP

7 12

--PREP ( S5--F3 )

--FL EXP --PREP

11

GND

1

6J3 OPEN -- for Fl tube GND -- for RAD tube

13

--HT INTLK

54302010 C

B

A

02/08/05

DATE

SEDECAL

2

ERROR DRAC

4

HT DR2 ( S5--C4 )

SHLD

DATE

+ 24V

3

HT DR1 ( S5--C4 )

SW1

30/09/02

GND

5

P3

NAME

ROOM LIGHT SUP

18

P4 6

3

ROOM LIGHT SW

47

mA

P1

F. GARCIA

IC GND

48

Black

DRAWING

PT SPLY

42

7 2

1

FIL SUP

SW2

GND

3TS1 39

5

test ] posts

SW COM

--BUCKY 2 DR CMD

16

2

Red

FIL 2 RTN

--BUCKY EXP --BUCKY 1 DR CMD

11

--BUCKY 2 DR CMD

P2 1

HT TRANSFORMER 9HT1 HI MA GND GND +KV --KV +MA --MA FIL 1 RTN

LINE SYNC

14

--ACC ( S8--F1 )

11

7

6J3 9 12

P3 3

4

10

4

--LINE CONT ( S1, 2--E1 ) +5V OUT ( S5--F3 )

1 4 12

12

( S1, 2--B3 )

F

--LINE CONT +5V OUT

--ON

P4 12 --BUCKY 1 DR CMD 13 --BUCKY 2 DR CMD 9 BUCKY SPLY 5 AUX BUCKY SPLY 11 --BUCKY 1 MOTION

U

1

DELAYED +24V

PT CRL

P3

+24V

--CHRG DR ( S1, 2--E1 )

--KV DR1

2 1

5

3 1 10

8

--PWR OFF

--PWR ON --PWR OFF

+5V +24V +24V +24V

A

( S5--A2 )

F


REV

F

E

D

C

B

A 3TS1

HT DR2 ( S3,S4--B1 ) 5C11 2 MF

5C10 2 MF

5C8 2 MF

3

J1 1 2 3

4

E2

C2E1

J2 1 2 3

DR1 DR2 GND +5V

5A1

4

J1 1 2 3

4

J2--3 J2--20

2 3 4 1 5

J2 1 2 3

J2--5 to J2 connector of the ATP CONSOLE board

4

--IGBT FAULT ( S3,S4--D2 ) DC +

remove 5L2 for Single Phase Generator

1

--THERM. 1

2

--THERM. 2

3

THERM. COM

J2--4 J2--17

to J2 connector of the ATP CONSOLE board

4

J2--13 J2--24 J2--9

10/11J7--5 10/11J7--6

( S6,S7,S8--F1 )

10/11J7--7

--SFC ABC OUT

( only required for DSI option)

FL DSI

3

CAM SYNC

--

To Three Phase Generator

5C3 3900 MF

5C4 3900 MF

5C1 3900 MF

5C2 3900 MF

DC -TB7 1

7A3

F14 T 10 Amp

3 4

2

24 VAC 0 VAC

To Lamp (Collimator)

F15 T 10 Amp

5

+ R1 1K5 2w

C8,9,10,11 2200uF 35V

+24 VDC

5C1 3900 MF

5C2 3900 MF

5C3 3900 MF

NAME

DATE 30/09/02

+

REVISED

A. DIAZ

11/11/02

C B A D

REV

CN 05/109

F. GARCIA

02/08/05

CN 02/197

F. GARCIA F. GARCIA

09/04/03 12/12/02

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

CN 03/46,55,58,60

DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 1

( S3,S4--B4 )

--CHRG ( S3--F3 )

P1 2 1 P2 2 1

5A3

P2 2 1

CHARGE / DISCHARGE MONITOR #1 BOARD

P1 2 1

2 DISCHARGE 2 RTN DISCHARGE 2

( S3,S4--B4 )

DISCHARGE 1 RTN DISCHARGE 1

( S3,S4--B4 )

--CHRG ( S3,S4--F3 )

1

DC --

0 VDC

F. GARCIA

+24V GND

5C4 3900 MF

To Locks

8 6

--

DRAWING

E

CHARGE / DISCHARGE MONITOR #2 BOARD + 5A4

+

TS4 --

P1 2 1

--

DC +

1

FANS POWER SUPPLY

CHARGE / DISCHARGE MONITOR #1 BOARD

For Single Phase Generator

7 BR5

5A3

P2 2 1

+

TB7

LOCKS BOARD

F

--READY

20

DC +

COM ( S3,S4--B1 )

2

0 VAC TR

53

19

To Single Phase Generator

DC --

BUS -( S1, 2--A1 )

( S1, 2--D3 )

PT INPUT --ALOE

J2--18 J2--8

For Three Phase Generator 5L2 200 uH

24 VAC TR

51 52

18

J2--11

J2--15

--KV DR1 --KV DR2

BUS + ( S1, 2--A2 )

--FL EXP

7

J2--16

J2--14

115 VAC SW 0 VAC +5V OUT GND ( S3,S4--D3 )

37

J2--19

4TS3

FAULT

2 3 4 1 5

36

--ROOM LIGHT --SF PREP

( S3,S4--A1 )

SNR-CNI-VNC--GND VNI--VCC FNO--FAULT

SPR--+5 REG OUT CPI--CONTROL VPC--GND VPI--VCC FPO--FAULT IPM DRIVER 1

J4

115 VAC 0 VAC

C1

E2 SNR-CNI-VNC--GND VNI--VCC FNO--FAULT

5A2

FAULT

DR1 DR2 GND +5V

IPM DRIVER 2

2 3 4 1 5

J3

115 VAC 0 VAC

2 3 4 1 5

J4

DOOR RTN

24

( S3,S4--A1 )

5C9 40 MF for Single Phase Generator 10 MF for Three Phase Generator

5IGBT 1

--DOOR

23 ( S3,S4--B3 )

HT DR1 ( S3,S4--B1 )

5IGBT 2

SPR--+5 REG OUT CPI--CONTROL VPC--GND VPI--VCC FPO--FAULT

C1

C2E1

4

J3

5L1

5R2 1 Mohm, 2w

22

DATE

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 5/8

DWG:

54302010 C

B

A


REV

F

E

D

CONTROL DRAC PCB ( A3243 -- 03 ) 11A1 4

GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC

J4 1 ERROR DRAC 2 3 --RTR RDY 4 5 6 GND 7 8 9 10 11 12 +24 VDC 13 --SF PREP 14 15 --FL EXP 16 17 --HS SCL 18 19 --RTR RUN 20 21 22 23 --TUBE 2 RTR 24

3

cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )

6J1--8 6J1--5

6J1--11

6J1--10 6J1--6 6J1--7 6J1--4 6J1--1

6J1--3

GND ERROR CODE NC RDY1 RDY1 OUT +15 VDC RDY1 RTN NC SPARE2 SPARE2 RTN SPARE1 SPARE1 RTN SF SF RTN FL FL RTN HS HS RTN ST ST RTN T3 T3 RTN T2 T2 RTN

Ferrite Core

J3 +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC

+15 VDC +15 VDC --15 VDC --15 VDC VUNR VUNR PRECH IF PRECH IF +5 VDC +5 VDC T3 IF T3 IF T2 IF T2 IF T1 IF T1 IF

P 1

COM

2

12

R2

10

2

3 8

1 SHL

2

10

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

11K2

R1

R2

7 P

1

2

R1

V-V+

Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector +24V DELAYED GND 240 VAC SW

1

( S5--B3 )

115 VAC SW --THERM. 1 4TS3--1 THERM. COM 4TS3--3 0 VAC F

1 2

COM T1 AUX T1 MAIN T1

11K2 3

12

R4 R4

11K3

R3

R3

MAIN T1

1 (9)

AUX T1

2 (10)

COM T1

3 (11)

--THERM. 1

4 (12)

THERM. COM

5 (13)

See Note FAN 1

4

6 (14)

0 VAC

7 (15)

GND

8 (16)

115 VAC SW

17

240 VAC SW

18

3 Note: Connect FAN to 11TS2--17 or 11TS2--18 as required

+24 VDC

K1

Note

K3

11K3 A1

A2

A2

1 2 3

2

Note : Connections to 11TS2 of the Generator Cabinet Ferrite Core

from DC voltage Bus ( S5--D2 )

11K2 A1 J4

3

11J7 1

11TS2


2 4 3

MAIN TRANSFORMER

Ferrite Core

Connections ( ) for only one FL tube

11A2

J5 1

1

4

J2

+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC

11K3

VR1 V480LA20A

4

PRIN

Ferrite Core

8

7

A

INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB ( A3240--05 ) J1

CLAMPING

AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER

4

B

Ribbon Cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

J1

AUX

C

J2 5 4 3 2 1

{

240 VAC SW 0 VAC

J3 1 2

to 11TS2

--DC OUT +DC OUT GND +DC IN --DC IN 1

+24 VDC

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER FOR ONE X--RAY TUBE

3 4 NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

30/09/02

REVISED

A. DIAZ

11/11/02

2 5

to 11TS2

7 8

E

D

C

CN 05/109

F. GARCIA

02/08/05

B A

CN 03/46,55,58,60

F. GARCIA F. GARCIA

09/04/03 12/12/02

REV

CN 02/197 DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 6/8

DWG:

54302010 C

B

A


REV

F

E

D

CONTROL DRAC PCB ( A3243 -- 03 ) 11A1 4

GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC

J4 ERROR DRAC

3

cable to High Speed Starter connection 6J1 ( S3,S4--A2 )

6J1--8

--RTR RDY

6J1--5

GND

6J1--11

6J1--10 6J1--6

+24 VDC --SF PREP

6J1--7

--FL EXP --HS SCL

6J1--4

--RTR RUN

6J1--1

--TUBE 2 RTR

6J1--3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

GND ERROR CODE NC RDY1 RDY1 OUT +15 VDC RDY1 RTN NC SPARE2 SPARE2 RTN SPARE1 SPARE1 RTN SF SF RTN FL FL RTN HS HS RTN ST ST RTN T3 T3 RTN T2 T2 RTN

Ferrite Core

J3

+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC


P 1

12

R2

10

2

7

8

1

8

3

COM

2

SHL

R1 R2

R1

V-V+

Note.-- 11J7 is an aerial connector +24V DELAYED 240 VAC SW 115 VAC SW

1

GND 4TS3--1 ( S5--B3 )

4TS3--2 4TS3--3 F

1

+24 VDC

11TS2

4

18

2

17

tube 2

54

R4

11K3

R3

R4

6 7

61

FAN 2

53

FAN 1

to 11TS2

C

to 11TS2

B A

8 E

D

REV

TUBE 2 SCL TUBE 1 SCL TUBE SCL COMM

F. GARCIA

02/08/05

CN 03/46,55,58,60 F. GARCIA CN 02/197 F. GARCIA

09/04/03 12/12/02

DESCRIPTION

THERM. COM

5

FAN 1

6

0 VAC

7

GND

8

MAIN T2

9

AUX T2

10

COM T2

11

--THERM. 2

12

THERM. COM

13

FAN 2

14

0 VAC

15

GND

16

4

3

+24 VDC

11KT1 A1

11K2 A1

J4

11K3 A1 A2

A2

1

K1

A2

2 3

K3

J5 1

Note

R3

3

4

MAIN T2 MAIN T1

3

ISSUED BY

DATE

{

240 VAC SW

J3 1

0 VAC

2

Note Ferrite Core

for external interface

CN 05/109

3 4

11KT1

R3

R4

11KT1

COM T1 --THERM. 1

2

3

J2 5 4 3 2 1

DC+ DC--

to 11TS2

--DC OUT +DC OUT GND +DC IN --DC IN

11KT1

72 84

1

71

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO HIGH SPEED STARTER FOR TWO X--RAY TUBES

83

tube 1

3

--THERM. 2

62

Note

COM T1 COM T2

11J7

5

0 VAC

AUX T2 AUX T1

1

from DC voltage Bus ( S5--D2 )

--THERM. 1

THERM. COM

R1

2

11A2


11KT1

MAIN TRANSFORMER

Ferrite Core

1 2

2

1

AUX T1

2 4 3

4

J2

R2

1

11TS2 MAIN T1

11K2

12

7 P

1

11K3

VR1 V480LA20A

10

+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC GND GND GND GND +15 VDC +15 VDC

Note : Connections to 11TS2 of the Generator Cabinet

2

1

4

PRIN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

11K2

A

INTERFASE DRAC--HF PCB ( A3240--05 ) J1

Ferrite Core

CLAMPING

AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER

4

AUX

B

Ribbon Cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

J1

2

C

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

30/09/02

REVISED

A. DIAZ

11/11/02

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 7/8

DWG:

54302010 C

B

A


REV

F

E

D

C

NOTE.-- 10T3, 10C5--1 and 10R4--1 for 330 VAC Stator

THIS SHEET ONLY APPLIES TO LOW SPEED STARTER

B

A

10C5--1 15uF

NOTE.-- Use tube 2 connections for Fl tube

47 2w

10T3

8

100 nF 1 KV 10LF2

3

2

4

1

3

9

10K1 2

T1

6 7

Tube 1

9 10

220V

KCT K2--1

1 0V

6

TB2

5

T2

4

KCT K2--3

Tube 2

TB2

7

330V

T2

F1 T 6A

3 10RC1

TB3

2

3

0 VAC RTR

15 16

6 7

T2

T2 Tube 2

Tube 1

CR6 KBU4J

5

KBR K3--1

IMAIN

from HT CONTROL board

1

115 VAC SW

2

+24V DELAYED

1

GND

3

--START --ACC --T2 SCL --BRAKE RTRI --TUBE 2 SCL

( S5--B3 )

0 VAC 4TS3--1 4TS3--2 4TS3--3

+ KCTRR K5

LF--RAC BOARD 10A1

R1 L 4K75

CR1 R2 1N4007 KACC 4K75 K1

R3 4K75

TUBE 2 SCL

TUBE SCL COM

5 13

THERM. COM

TP2

Q2 2N4401

4

--THERM 1

12

--THERM 2

2

18

10

19

1 9

16

J1 +24V

1

C4 100uF 35V TP1 GND

R7 1K5

KCTRR K5--2

2

FAN 2 COM T1 COM T2 0 VAC 0 VAC THERM. COMM. THERM. COMM. --THERM 1 --THERM 2 AUX T1 AUX T2

3

MAIN T1 MAIN T2 GND GND

+24V DELAYED

GND

4

Q1 2N4401

2

3 KACC K1--2

DS4 HLMP1700

CR3 1N4007 KBR K3

7

6

+24V

R8 1K5

R4 6K19

DS3 HLMP1700

DS2 HLMP1700

J1

9

CR2 1N4007 KCT K2

15

8

CR7 1N4007 C2 100nF

DS1 HLMP1700

GND

7

4

FAN 1

CR8 1N4007

CR9 VM48

+24V

10

R6 475

R5 4K75

TP3 RTRI

5

C1 22uF

8

11

1

12 13 14 8

--THERM. 1

5

--THERM. 2

6

THER. COM

7

F

CR5 1N4007

240 VAC SW

+24V DELAYED

11

T1/T2 COMM

20

CR12 1N4007 C3 100nF

KCTR K4--3

115 VAC SW

12

17

CR11 1N4007

+24V

10J7 4

3

KCTR K4--2

KCTRR K5--3

1

CR4 1N4007

KCT K2--2

T1

KCTR K4--4

CR10 VM48

2

240 VAC SW

10 11

14

TB1

+

4

9

J1

6

TB4 Tube 1

_

10K1

10R5 475 2w

28

KCTR K4--1

+24V

3

KCTRR K5--1

Tube 2

KCTR K4

27

KBR K3--2

1

9 10

T1

5

IAUX

T1

TB4

T1/T2 COMM (to 10TS2) +24V DELAYED

24 25 26

21 22 23

TB3

_

60 VAC RTR

14

10TS2

0 VAC

KACC K1--1

2

12 13

+

1

230 VAC RTR

( S1, 2--D2 )

1

11

10

TB1

TB1

15uF

_

10J8

30uF

TUBE 1 SCL

10R4--2 1 Mohm, 2w

NOTE.-- 10J7 and 10J8 are aerial connectors

115 VAC SW

10R4--1 1 Mohm, 2w

4

240 VAC SW

for external interface 10C5--2 30uF

NAME

DATE

0 VAC

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

30/09/02

--THERM. 1

REVISED

A. DIAZ

11/11/02

--THERM. 2

to 10TS2

C B A

THERM. COM E

D

REV

CN 05/109

F. GARCIA

02/08/05

CN 02/197

F. GARCIA F. GARCIA

09/04/03 12/12/02

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

CN 03/46,55,58,60

DATE

SEDECAL

SHEET / OF 8/8

DWG:

54302010 C

B

A


REV

CONTROL DRAC BOARD

+15VDC

+15VDC J1

J4 6

+15 VDC

2

5

RDY1 OUT

3

1

GND

22

24

+15V TP3 R1 10K

C4 100nF

14

R2 1M

CR1 1N3595

6

C1 470uF 25V

OFF DLY

1

GND TP5

CR6 1N3595

CR5 1N3595

C3 3,3uF

2 3

ADD JUMPER T3 RTN

T2 RTN

6

7

U1 ICM7556

C2 100nF

6

7

GENERATOR CABINET

U1 ICM7556

PWR OFF

8

R4 10K

1

4

2 6

12 CR9 1N3595

1

K1

K2 OFF MANT

OFF MANT TP2

9

13

C5 3,3uF

R5 1K5 7--8

CR2 1N3595

8

PWR OFF TP6

14

R8 1M

10

R3 1M5

Q1 2N4401 CR7 1N3595

CR8 1N4148

R9 150K

11 OFF COND TP4

OFF COND

C7 1uF

CR3 1N3595

R7 30K1

R6 10K

DELAYED SWITCH--OFF BOARD ( A3274--01 )

+15VDC

CR4 1N3595

C8 10uF

J1 8

OFF DLY TP1

K1

5

+15VDC

J2 4

2

5

21 23

4

R10 1K5

C9 100nF

C6 100nF

7--8 K2

INTERFACE CONTROL BOARD

C

CN 00/183

F. GARCIA

06/09/00

B

CN 99/003

F. GARCIA

13/01/99

REV DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. GARCIA

05/05/98

REVISED

A. DIAZ

05/05/98

SHEET / OF

SEDECAL INNERSCAN

1/1

DWG:

A3274--01 C

B

DELAYED SWITCH--OFF

REV

A

B

C

C5 100nF

C2 33pF

D

+12V

+5V

E

(*) Use jumpers only for A3000-34 and 35

C6 100nF

(*)

+5V +5V

Q3 2N4401

C1 1uF

+5V

EA/VP

R77

4K99

C4 100uF

D1 1N4148

R6 825

R4 825

-DESEQ

16

P1.3

-KV SAFETY

5

P1.4

-mA SAFETY

6

P1.5

7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15

P1.6 P1.7 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5

RP1 470

P1

U1 2501

-KV UP

1

1

2

2

K1

C1

16

-KV DWN

2

3

4

4

K2

C2

14

6

6

K3

C3

12

8

8

K4

C4

10

-PREP C-HT DAT

5

3 4

7 RP2 470 1

2

-EXP

6

3

4

4

K2

C2

14

-CHRG

7

5

6

6

K3

C3

12

8

8

C4

10

7

8

DS3 EXP

R70 475

C57 100nF

+5V

R71 475

BATST 1 BATST 2 BATST 3 GND

-IGBT FAULT

1

2

2

3

4

4

1 2 3

A0 A1 A2

7

TEST

K1

C1

K2

C2

14

6

6

K3

C3

12

7

8

8

K4

C4

10

SCL

6

SDA

5

1

R22

3

2

2

K1

C1

16

4

4

K2

C2

14

K3

C3

12

K4

C4

10

-BATT FAULT

2

5

6

-AUTO OFF INH

1

7

8

8

2

L1

47uH

+5V

3

GND

4

GND

5

GND

C72 100nF

U8 74HCT574

VCC

9

28 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7

AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7

Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

R15 3K3

-HS SCL -ACC -BRAKE -RTR RUN

9 7 6 5

RP8 22

4

1 3 5 7

11 1

R9 56K2

C7 3n3

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

U9 ULN2803 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8

CLK OC

2 4 6 8

10 8

HI mA -BAT TEST

RP5 22

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

1 3 5 7

P1 2 4 6 8

17 10 11 12 13

-TUBE3 HT-C CLK HT-C DAT -TUBE2 SCL -FIL 1 SCL

2 4 6 8

14 15 16

-START -PRE CHRG -CHRG DR

RP6 22 1 3 5 7 R12 2.7

D23 +12V

1N4148

A B C

1 2 3

A8 A9 A10

G2A G2B G1

4 5 6

A13

R10 475 R13 1K5 R82

R14 1K5

D2 1N4148

C81 1uF

100K

Q2 2N4403

C11 100nF

D3 1N4148

2

+5V RP12 10K

1

U13 74HCT541 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

C20 100pF

U12 74HCT541

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

G2 G1

19 1



18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8

19 1

G2 G1

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

RP9 10K

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

SW2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

C27 100nF -RD

FAULT

TP3 +12V +12V

TP4 -12V

R65 1K

-12V

1

R45 1K

TP2 +5V L3

R30 1K

47uH

+5V

NAME

TP1 GND

6-9

6 C13 100uF

A

3

475

+5V

P2

1

C10 2n2

U14 74HCT138

-L DAC

2 4 6 8

Vref

C8 510pF

-CS DAC

P5

1 3 5 7

(*)

Q1 IRLZ14

U16 2501

6

1

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

6 1

VREF CAZ

Z8 BZX55C5V1

D6 1N4148

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

DATA BUS 16

5

475

+12V

CLK OC

U15 2501

RP11 470

3

-12V

23

11 1

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8

+5V

6

47uH

CLK

A11 A12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DS1 LED

RP10 470

L2

24 25

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

R11

2 4 6 8

18 19 20 9

+5V

A0 A1

C9 100nF

C58 100nF

4

RTR I

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

RP7 22

+5V

P5 -RTR RDY

5

R8 681

D7 1N4148

RP3 3K3

P3 ERROR DRAC

AIN3

100nF

P1

2

17 4 3 2 1

FIL I

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8

C19 100nF

1 3 5 7

C18 1nF

DS2 PREP

P3.7 P3.6 P1.2 P1.1 P1.0

BYSL RD WR CS

-12V

U3 24C16

R64 1K R63 1K

C1

7

R7 1K21

+5V

K1

16

K4

30

21 18 20 19

4

-EXP

5

-FIL 1 ACK

ALE/P

A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

AIN2

+5V

2

C-HT CLK

29 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

KVP

-WR DAC

U2 2501

A4

3

PSEN P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7

AIN1

3

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

U11 ULN2803

9

Z1 BZX55C8V2

DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7


GND

31

4

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

U10 74HCT574 mA

9

RESET

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

U4 AD7582 AIN0 2

GND

9

39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7


AGND

R3 100K

XTAL1 XTAL2

RP15 10K AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7

DGND

18 19

1

7

R1 1K

U5 87C51

XT1 20MHz

VDD

C3 33pF

R5 1K

VSS

R2 6K81

8

Q4 2N4403

27

+12V

C12 100nF

Z3 1N4744

C17 100uF

C16 100nF

B

K1 2-13

Z2 1N4744

C15 100uF

C14 100nF

C

TP9 GND

TP10 GND

DATE

K

NC 05/061

F. Díaz

01/04/05

DRAWING

F. Díaz

26/05/05

J

NC 05/027

F. Díaz

08/02/05

REVISED

A. Díaz

26/05/05

I H

NC 04/202 AC 01/04

F. Díaz

02/12/04

F. Díaz

G

NC 03/216

F. Díaz

21/09/04 18/12/03

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

SEDECAL D

SHEET / OF

1/3

A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44 K

J

I

H

G

HT CONTROLLER E

REV

A

HV TANK

B

JP3

JP4

JP5

C

D

R73 16K5

JP6

U3 24C16

+5V

2

1

2

2

VERTICAL

1

2

1

1

U5 80C32

8

Vcc

COMPACT

E

+5V

U8 74HCT574

40

Vcc

+5V

U10 74HCT574

20

Vcc

+5V 20

Vcc

1 JP6 R20 36K5

4

TP16

C31 100nF

4

GND

KVP

C21 100pF

KV -

C29 100nF

(3)

C30 100nF

20

GND

C32 100nF

10

GND

10

GND

4

KV + R16 1K

P4

TP12 KV-

(3)

TP11 KV+

TP7 R18 100K

U18A TL084

-KV

1

2

+KV

2

3 R17 1K

1 JP3

RTR I1

4

RTR I2

3

R19 100K

1

C24

1nF

10nF Z4

+

U12 74HCT541

KVP D16 1N4148

R66 10K

1V=16.6 KVP for A3000-36

C28 10nF

C22

1nF

10nF

C23 100pF

R21 36K5

+5V 1

C25 100nF

Vcc

10

GND

C36 100nF

+12V

C35 100nF 8

GND

+5V

A2

5

A3

U2 2501 1

A1

3

7

D15 -12V 1N4148

3

+5V 16

C34 100nF

U1/U15/U16 2501

1N4744 1N4744

D14 1N4148

U14 74HCT138

(3)

Z5

+12V

+5V 20

Vcc

10

GND

R72 16K5

U13 74HCT541

C33 100nF

JP5

C76

+5V 20

Vcc

KVP

1

1

JP4

C75

-

1V=33.3KVP

E7

15

E6

13

E5

11

E4

9

A4

-12V

A1

3

A2

5

A3

E7

15

E6

13

E5

11

E4

9

C37 100nF

3

R25 274K BR1 VM48 -

AC2

+

1

C79 100pF 6 -

C26 100nF

5 +

R81 1K

R27 10K

JP1

34K 6 5

1 C38 4nF

D22 1N4148

TP6

(1)

R28 49K9

16 15 3 2 1

RTR I

2 C64 100nF

+

1

9 10

C66 100nF

5 6

+

8 6 4 2

C40 100nF

2

+

C77 10nF

R76 100K

Vref

8

-

7

-

+5V

R33 1K D18

D4

1N4148

1N4148

Z9

R32 3K3

R78 1K -KV SAFETY

5V1

D5 -EXP D20

-12V TP15 U17A LM319J

7

4 5

+

12

-

1N4148 Q5 IRLZ14 -DESEQ

R79 FAULT

R31 100K

22 1

C68 100nF

R59 10K

R57 3K01

(1) The value of R28 is 86K6 for A3000-35 (2) (REV)1 - Remove D19 for three phase generators (3) R16, R17 = 4K02, and R20, R21 = 69K8 for A3000-36 (7) Adjust R29 to have a period of 48 us at U19-5 for A3000-43

-12V

A

10

4K75

9

+

R56 10K

C65 100nF R58 10K

RP13 1K 7 5 3 1

(2)

1N4148

-

1

U17B LM319J

R55 1K65

R51 3K01 U7B LF353

KV +

C69 100nF

E1 E2 REF DC DT

9 10 14 13 4

3

R50 10K

R52 10K

8 11

-KV DR 1 -KV DR 2

1 2

7

C1 C2

D19 1N4148

U18C TL084

R54

-

-12V

C44 100nF

12

U19 TL594

P3 6 8

+5V

R53 10K

8

3

4

KV -

C67 +12V 100nF

11

8

+12V U7A LF353

+2 -2 FB -1 +1

5 7

7

+12V

6

C63 100nF

C41 10nF

R75 49K9

RT CT

C78 1nF

KV DEM

RTR

2

RP14-A 22

U20-B ULN2803A

R23 R74 6K04

1

C39 +12V 100nF

(7)

12

+12V D21 1N4148

14 5

R29 10K

R80 10K

C80 100pF

U18B TL084 FREQUENCY

JP2

U20-A ULN2803A

R24 4K99

7

9

AC1

V+

6

R26 1M 3

GND

4

B

C

NAME

DATE

K

NC 05/061

F. Díaz

01/04/05

DRAWING

F. Díaz

26/05/05

J

NC 05/027

F. Díaz

08/02/05

REVISED

A. Díaz

26/05/05

I

F. Díaz

02/12/04

H

NC 04/202 AC 01/04

F. Díaz

G

NC 03/216

F. Díaz

21/09/04 18/12/03

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

SEDECAL D

SHEET / OF

2/3

A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44 K

J

I

H

G

HT CONTROLLER E

REV

A

B

C

D

9

(4) R38, R39 = 226K, and R60, R62 = 25K5 for A3000-36

E

U24B DG300

+12V

C73 100nF

+5V R61 10K

(8) Remove Z6 and Z7 for A3000-44

R60 12K7

1V = 100mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA) 11

13

R34 1K

(5)

13

-

+mA

7

12

+

(5) (8)

C42 100nF 250V

C46 100nF

R37 100K R39 113K

Z6 1N4757A

D17 1N4148

(5)

4

8

C74 100nF

R40 10K mA

14

-12V

U18D TL084

(8)

Z7 1N4757A

U24 DG300

C52 10nF

R67 10K

6

R35 1K

R38 113K

R36 100K

-mA

C43 100nF 250V

A3000-44

(4)

TP13 mA -

C48 10nF P4

1V = 200mA (FROM 100mA UP TO maximum mA)

7

TP14 mA +

1V = 20mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)

TP5 mA

A15 4

14

1V = 10mA (FROM 10mA UP TO 80 mA)

(5) R36, R37 = 200K, and R40 = 2K21 for A3000-44

C45 100nF

R62 12K7

C47 10nF

U24A DG300

(4)

R41 8K87

(4) 2

6

4

D9 -12V 1N4148

3

+12V

5

C50 1uF C49 10nF

1

VIN

8 7

ID BI

4

CAV

9 10

C53 100nF

+12V

-12V

+VS

14

VD

6

-VS

3

TP8 FIL FIL I -12V

RL G

C51 100nF

C70 100nF

-12V

6 Vdd

DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 A0 A1

Vss

7 2

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

VrefA VrefB

-L DAC

LDAC WR CS

U6 AD7837

RfbB VoutB RfbA VoutA

2 4

C59 10nF

AGDNA AGNDB

5 8

6 5

V22 LM336AZ

16 15 3 1 2

KV DEM

R48 10K

+12V

7-8

RP14-B 22 3 1

18

P3 4 2

-FIL DR 1 -FIL DR 2

4 5

1

FREQUENCY

R47 49K9

C56 100nF

RT CT

+2 -2 FB +1 -1

U23 TL594 C1 C2

8 11

E1 E2 REF DC DT

9 10 14 13 4

RP4 1K 7 5 3 1

2

8 6 4 2

R68 10K C62 100nF

C71 100nF

11

14 13 1

DGND

DATA BUS

R49 20K

3 10

12 9

C60 100nF

(6) C55 100nF

1-14

U20-D ULN2803A

R46 4K99

C54 100nF

K1

16 3

R44 10K

R43 1K54 AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 A11 A12

U20-C ULN2803A

9

GND

8

+12V

12

FIL I

U21 AD536

V+

R42 1K

GND

D8 1N4148

7

+12V 3

C61 100nF

-WR DAC

R69 205

-CS DAC -mA SAFETY

1

1

(6) Adjust R49 to have a period of 150 us at U23-5 NAME

A

B

C

DATE

K

NC 05/061

F. Díaz

01/04/05

DRAWING

F. Díaz

26/05/05

J

NC 05/027

F. Díaz

08/02/05

REVISED

A. Díaz

26/05/05

I H

NC 04/202 AC 01/04

F. Díaz

02/12/04

F. Díaz

G

NC 03/216

F. Díaz

21/09/04 18/12/03

REV

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

DATE

SEDECAL D

SHEET / OF

3/3

A3000-33/34/35/36/43/44 K

J

I

H

G

HT CONTROLLER E

REV

5

4

3

2

1

NOTE 1: W1-A for version A3004-10/11/12, W1-B for version A3004-09 NOTE 1: W1-A para versión A3004-10/11/12, W1-B para versión A3004-09 NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms for A3004-09/10 R11= 1K4 ohms for A3004-11 R11= 1K ohms for A3004-12

R13 1 5W

NOTE 2: R11= 2K68 ohms para A3004-09/10 R11= 1K4 ohms para A3004-11 R11= 1K ohms para A3004-12 D

D

R12

+15V

+24V R6 3K74

R4 10K

8 D5 UF4006

1

R5 2K

D4 UF4006

5

10 12

U2 HCPL2232

TP8

C

10K

6

4

11

R17 1K

D8

HIN

U1 HO

7

R2 100

VB

6

VS

5

VCC

3

LO

1

COM

2

LIN

SD

10K

1

C7

+

+

C8 330uF/450V

C3 1uF

C6 470nF/630Vdc

C2

IR2113

P3 4 3 2 1

T1

D1 1N4148

FIL SUP FIL PREHEAT FIL RTN

1

2

C

Pulse. PE-67300. 1 : 300 4

1uF

U5 H11AA1

R18

Q2 SGP23N60UFD

330uF/450V

5

2 BZX55C18V

Green

D3 UF4006

R16

7

2 3

D7

100nF

R3 10K

9

R8 2K

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C4 100nF

R19 33 C1

TP2

VSS

TP7

TP1

VDD

+5V

13

P1

GND GND +5V +5V -FIL DR1 -FIL DR2 FIL I DELAY +24V

D2 1N4148

+5V

+24V R7 3K74

100K 3W

3

R1 100

4

Q1 SGP23N60UFD R10 2K43 A

W1 NOTE 1

1V=0.31 Arms

B

D6 1N4007

TP4 +24V

R9 10

+15V

U3

B

1

11

C13 10uF/50V

+

10uF/50V

+

IN

OUT GND

C12 100nF

2

TP5

B

3

C14

R15 10K C15 100nF TP6

+

10uF/50V

10

3

13

4 3 2 1

EC4A13

1

-SUPPLY

C5

U4 LM7805 1

R11 NOTE 2

4

+SUPPLY

2

P2

C9 1.5uF/250V-X2

R14 10K

+5V

TP3

L1

C11

10nF/250V-Y2

C10 10nF/250V-Y2

Ground stud A

A

PCB 90068-03 NAME DRAWING REVISED

5

4

3

Cb1

NC 05/112

REV

DESCRIPTION

F. Díaz A. Díaz

DATE

26/10/04 26/10/04

SEDECAL ISSUED BY

SHEET / OF

1/1

A3004-09/10/11/12 Cb1

Ab1

b2

b1

Filament Driver HC

DATE 2

Bb1

1

REV

A

B

C

D

E

P6 GND +11V PERM -PWR ON -PWR OFF

4 3 2 1

P3 DS1

P4 1 3

115 VAC

2

K1

13

9

1

6 3

5

D16

6

1

R15 15

1

4 DB104

-PWR OFF -PWR ON

R14 1K5

C4 470uF

4

P1

K1

D Q1 MTD3055

G

R12 10

D14

S

7

R11 3K3

C3 100nF

C2 10nF

3

K1

8

8

5

1

D11

13

(4)

13 K4

K5

(4)

-BUCKY 2 MOTION

10

-TUBE 2 SCL -FIL 1 SCL FIL PREHEAT FIL RTN

18 19 17 14

K3

14

9

K5

13

K6 14

9

13

14

D13

9

K7

BUCKY 1 DR

7

BUCKY 2 DR

6

-BUCKY EXP

1 5

12

K7

5

1

C6

4

2.2nF 400V

1 K9 12

5 +24VDC

L1 500uH

4 8

16

FIL 2 RTN

15

FIL 1 RTN

22

-FIL 1 ACK

21

SPARE

20

SOL DR

3

12

4

L2 500uH

1

5 K4

K6

K7 14

D12

9

1

6

4

3

D17 1N4738

D18 DB104

8

C5 2.2uF

R17 499

R16 1K

U2 AQV210EH 2

11

14

13

D9

12

K3

8

L3 500uH

D10

K4

8

3

2

4

-BUCKY 1 MOTION

12

4

1

3

12 13

P4

K5

4

9

-BUCKY 1 DR CMD -BUCKY 2 DR CMD

GND

12

4

+24VDC +24 VDC

GND

2

C22 100nF

C23 470uF

R8 3K3

W1 AUX BUCKY SPLY

1

2

W2

11

8

8

8 ON

R7 15K

U1 ULN2803A

4

1

P4 BUCKY SPLY

+24 VDC

+24VDC

+24VDC

D3 14

3

OFF

R13 27

D15

4

115 VAC 5W

4

5 2

6

0 VAC

LINE SYNC

9

4

3 D4

T2

13 K9

D19 14

P5 2

DISCHARGE 2

13

DISCHARGE 1

12

+24 VDC

16

9

12

K8

P5 1 2

5 K8

10

DISCHARGE 2 RTN

14

DISCHARGE 1 RTN

3

SPARE

2

DELAYED +24 VDC

7

SPARE

6

+5 VDC

4 8

14 R9

GND

9

+24 VDC

5

+5 VDC OUT

4

+24 VDC

8

-LINE CONT

1

K8

D7 13

47

9

+24VDC

+24VDC C1 100uF 1

D1

R3 3K3

D2 1N4733

R2 10K

16

3

D6 D5 BZX55C10V

R4 10K

U1 ULN2803A

U1 ULN2803A

2 R6 100K

5 K2

4 8

K2 13

U1 ULN2803A

R5 10K

1

14

D8 12

7

12

K2

VERSION

USED FOR

A3009-09

RAD + HV

COMPONENTS ON SHEET 2 REQUIRED

L1, L2, L3, K6 NOT REQUIRED

A3009-10

R&F

NOT REQUIRED

REQUIRED

A3009-11

ONLY RAD

NOT REQUIRED

NOT REQUIRED

A3009-12 A3009-15

R&F + HV

REQUIRED

REQUIRED

MAMO

NOT REQUIRED

NOT REQUIRED

17 R1 2M2

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. Díaz

30/01/06

REVISED

A. Díaz

30/01/06

SEDECAL REV

A

B

C

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

NOTES:

1.2.3.4.-

FILAMENT 1 IS SMALL FOR RAD AND LARGE FOR SF HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY ON AEC OR ABS UNITS ONLY LI, L2, L3 AND K6 NOT USED ON RAD SYSTEM K5 AND D11 NOT PRESENT IN A3009-15

1.2.3.4.-

FILAMENTO 1 ES FINO PARA RAD Y GRUESO PARA SF 1 LA FUENTE DE ALTA TENSION SOLO PARA UNIDADES CON AEC O ABS L1, L2, L3 Y K6 NO SE USAN EN SISTEMAS RAD K5 Y D11 NO SE MONTAN EN A3009-15

NOTAS:

SHEET / OF

A3009-09/10/11/12/15

1/2

Jb1

I b1

INTERFACE CONTROL

DATE

D

I b2

E

REV

A

B

C

D

E

+24VDC R10 56 5w U3

W7

2

T1 PE6189

4

In1

Out1

3

7

In2

Boot1

4

Out2

1

9 11

P1 +12 VDC

6

+12 VDC

5

PT CRL

4

R42 22

R41

C21 100uF

C15 100nF

R28 6K8 C14 2,2nF

6

1N4148 C20 100nF

R43 10K

R29 22K1

C16 100nF

R30 2M2

6

3

GND

2

CT

12 8 11

16

+2

E1 E2

9 10

15

-2

REF

14

3

FB

DC

13

1

+1

DT

4

2

-1

GND

7

R31 100K

2 C9 2.2 uF

2.2uF 63V

GND

R35 1M 1w

W6

8 A

3

C18 1KV 10nF

B

R34 1M 1w

5

RT

PT SPLY

1 +Vref

3 R24 10K

3

R26 10K

R19 10K

5

R32 47K5

W4

R22 10K

C19 10nF 1KV

R33 33K 1w

D21 FR107

R18 10K

A GND

7

C8

10

R23 10K -ON

8

C10 2.2 uF

P2 V+ C1 C2

R40 1K

Boot2

4

U5 TL594

A

D23

3

En

A

1

GND Sense

R39 10K

6K04

Vref

L6203

W8 B

Vs

5

B

D22 FR107

R25 10K

B C13 100nF

1

R27 332

7 C17 100pF

A 2

R38 4M75

B W5

R37 4M75

12

+Vref

C12 100nF

+24VDC A

R21 10K 6 U4A TLV2460

9

4

K10

8

2

1

K10

5

B

4

ROOM LIGHT SW

2

-ROOM LIGHT

13

W3

8 7

ROOM LIGHT SUP

6

R36 4M75

K10

D20 14

2

SD

R20 5K

3 4

C11 100nF

NOTE.- BE SURE THAT THE VALUE OF THE PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT IN P2-1 IS THE REQUIRED BEFORE CONECTING THE SYSTEM INTERFACE

PHOTO TUBE SPLY OUTPUT ( P2-1) +500 VDC OR +300 VDC : JUMPERS W3 TO W8 IN POS "A", AND ADJUSTING WITH R20

NOTA.- ASEGURESE DE QUE EL VALOR DE LA SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY EN P2-1

VARIABLE NEGATIVE OUTPUT : JUMPERS W3 TO W10 IN POS "B" 1

ES EL REQUERIDO ANTES DE HACER LA INTERCONEXION DEL SISTEMA 1

SALIDA PHOTO TUBE SPLY (P2-1) +500 VDC O +300 VDC : PUENTES W3 A W8 EN POS "A",Y AJUSTAR CON R20 SALIDA NEGATIVA VARIABLE : PUENTES W3 A W10 EN POS "B"

NAME

DATE

DRAWING

F. Díaz

30/01/06

REVISED

A. Díaz

30/01/06

SEDECAL REV

A

B

C

DESCRIPTION

ISSUED BY

SHEET / OF

A3009-09/10/11/12/15

2/2

Jb1

I b1

INTERFACE CONTROL

DATE

D

I b2

E

REV

A

B

C

D

E

NOTE.- TWO TRANSFORMER FORMATS CAN BE USED, USA AND ROW. NOTA.- LOS TRANSFORMADORES PUEDEN TENER DOS FORMATOS, USA Y ROW.

U2 HCPL4503

4

REG1 7815 2

VI

1

6

3

C1 470uF

CR3 1N4007

3

6 3

C3 470uF

4

8 R2 6K81

5

C7 100nF

C2 100nF

1

4

VO COM

BR1 VM48

2

SEE NOTE T1

J2 115 VAC

115 VAC RTN

5

1

1

2

4

U1 HCPL4503

6

8

7

J3/J5 2

SPR (+5V INPUT 1)

3

CP1 (-KV DR1)

4

VPC (GND 1)

1

VPI (+15V OUTPUT 1)

5

FPD (-FAULT 1)

2

6

8

5

3

3

-FAULT

4

3

3

BR2 VM48

REG2 7815 1

6

3

2

C6 470uF

VI

2 VO

8

CR4 1N4007

3

6 3

COM

4

C5 470uF

R3 6K81

5

C8 100nF

C4 100nF

1

IPM DRIVER 1

U4 HCPL4503

U3 HCPL4503 8

J1 +5VDC

-DR1 2

-DR2

GND

+5VDC -DR1 -DR2 GND

115 VAC 115 VAC RTN 1

C9 100nF

4

R5 332

J4/J6 2

SNR (+5V INPUT 2)

3

CN1 (-KV DR2)

4

VNC (GND 2)

1

VNI (+15V OUTPUT 2)

5

FND (-FAULT 2)

2

6

R6 332

5

3

1

2

2

3

J1 4 1 2 3 J2

IPM DRIVER 2

1 2 1

3 -FAULT

4 NAME

A

B

C

B

NC 04/195

REV

DESCRIPTION

F. Díaz ISSUED BY

DATE

DRAWING

F. Díaz

26/11/04

REVISED

A. Díaz

26/11/04

SEDECAL

23/11/04

SHEET / OF

A3063-03

1/1

B

IPM DRIVER

DATE

D

E

REV

A

B

C

D

E

+

4

4

R2 100K 3W

R3 10K 15W

R4 10K 15W

R5 10K 15W

R1 39K 15W

R6 27K 4W

CR2 BZX85C56V

TO MAIN STORAGE CAPACITORS

Q1 IRF840

DS1

CR3 BZX85C56V

CR1 1N4733A

3

3

U1 H11B1 1

-

R7 3M9 6

2

P1

5

2

CHRG

4

1

GND

P2 2

DISCHARGE RTN

1

DISCHARGE

2

2

1

1

E

CN 98/114

F.GARCIA

10/10/98

D

CN 98/057

F.GARCIA

29/04/98

C

CN 96/033

F.GARCIA

06/03/96

B

CN 95/080

F.GARCIA

10/05/95

A

REV A

B

C

CN 95/74

DESCRIPTION

F.GARCIA

25/04/95

ISSUED BY

DATE

ENG

CHARGE/DISCHARGE MONITOR

F. GARCIA

CHK

A. DIAZ

REV

CN99/80 (22/07/99)

3212-01

SEDECAL S.A.

DWG

REV. REV.

DATE D

REV.

E

11/01/95

F

A

from J2-14

B

EXT SYNC

14 JP4 A

LINE SYNC from J3-9

K4

CAM SYNC

ABC IN TPx

1, 14

7, 8

2

13 K4

6

-DS PREP

3

3

2

6

4

RP16 470

6

5 U33C 74HCT32

-INTEN

+5V U28 71084C R9 10K

CR7 1N4148

4 6

C50 10uF 16V

RDY1 RDY RDY2 CLK

11

R

3 7 13 15 1

AEN1 AEN2 F/C X2 ASYN CSYNPCLK

X1

5 8

R28

330

XT1 10MHz

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

+5V

12

2

C43 33pF 33 23

MN/MX T A15 A16 A17 A18 HLD NMI GND

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

39 38 37 36 31 17 1

C OE

11 1

25

ALE

18

INTR

R18 10K

-INTA

24

DEN

26

DT/R AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7

27 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

K1

C1

3

4

4

K2

C2

14

5

6

6

K3

C3

12

8

8

C4

10

5

11

CLK RST

2

CLK 500 to U29-19

9 7 6 5 3 2 4 13 12 14 15 1

11

19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A19

INTA

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 35

U38 74HC4040 10

CLK

11

RST

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12

19 20

A1

22

RD

23

WR

21

CS

-IORD 9 7 6 5 3 2 4 13 12 14 15 1

-IOWR A8 R21 100

18 15 9 11 14 16

C36 1nF

A0

CLK2 CLK1 CLK0 G0 G1 G2

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

IR1

20

IR2

21 22 23

IR3 IR4 IR5

24

IR6

25

A9 A0

2 3

UART RQ

-IOWR

-INTA

OUT0 OUT1 OUT2

G DIR A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

-IORD

INTR

DATA BUS

-INTEN

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Vcc

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8

11 1

C OE

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

U31 74HCT573 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8

11 1

C OE

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

TMR 1 to U29-24

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

20 27 22

CS WR OE

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19

12

1

CS

CAS1

13

27

A0

CAS2

15

WR RD

EN

16

INTA

INT

17

A16

+5V 14

Vcc

GND

Vcc

U20 74HCT245

+5V 20

GND

U23 MK48T08

+5V 16

+5V 28

U28 71084C

+5V 18

Vcc

26 GND

11

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

C41 100nF 8

Q4 MTD3055

U30 8088 Vcc

GND

+5V 40

GND

U31 74HCT573 Vcc

C46 100nF 20

+5V 20

B

24 C18 100nF 12

+5V 32 C26 100nF 16

U29 8259A

+5V 28

GND

GND

C45 100nF 14

U32 74HCT00

GND

+5V

C27 100nF 7

to U34-17 (sheet 1) A17 A18 to U34-16 (sheet 1)

U33 74HCT32 Vcc

GND

ATP CONSOLE

+5V 14 C28 100nF 7

U34 74HCT573

+5V 20

Vcc

Vcc

C47 100nF 10

GND

U38 74HC4040

GND

+5V 16 C61 100nF 8

1

ENG CHK

F. GARCIA A. DIAZ SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4 CN 04/158 (04-10-04)

A3024-XX

A15 to J12A-16, J12B-16 and U34-19

SEDECAL S.A. D

2

14

PAGE 1 OF 4

U32D 74HCT00

C

GND

Vcc

C48 100nF 10

DWG

REV. REV. REV.

DATE A

+5V

U24 27C256

Vcc

C44 100nF 9

G S

4

+5V E2

REV

R13 22

GND

Vcc

C25 100nF 14

GND

U21 8253 Vcc

C20 100nF 10

Vcc

C22 100nF 10

+5V 20

Vcc

C17 100nF 7

U22 74HCT573

D CR6 1N4148

CAS0

U26 74HC4040

U24 27C512/27C1001/27C4001 12 A0 D0 13 11 A1 D1 14 10 A2 D2 15 9 A3 D3 17 8 A4 D4 18 7 A5 D5 19 6 A6 D6 20 5 A7 D7 21 27 A8 26 A9 23 A10 NC 30 25 A11 4 A12 PGM 31 28 A13 29 A14 3 A15 +5V 2 A16 24 OE Vpp 1 22 CE

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14

12

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 25 24 21 23 2

13

-EXPT

+

IR7


3

+5V A1 SPK

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

U19 74HCT14

U23 MK48T08


10 13 17

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

26

GND

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CONNECTED TO PIN 14 FOR A3024-50/90 VERSION

1

19

-EXPT

TMR 1

A0..........A7

U21 8253 A1

IR0

CLK 500

DATA BUS

13KHz 6.5KHz

A0

9

U19D 74HCT14 8

U29 8259A 18

U20 74HCT245

10

U22 74HCT573

500Hz

11

U19E 74HCT14 10

C55 100nF

-IOWR -IORD

8

CLK

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12

13

C60 100nF

9 6

U19F 74HCT14 12

-MWR -MRD

U26 74HC4040 10

K4

U32C 74HCT00

U32B 74HCT00

16

2

16

13

4

INTR

1.665 MHz

IO/M WR RD

C42 33pF

U34 74HCT573 A15 A16 A17 A18

RESET READY CLK

1

2

7

U33D 74HCT32

28 29 32

17

+5V

3

21 22 19

R7 2K55

8

10

R14 10K

U30 8088

R6 10K

U27 2501

9

+5V C51 1nF

R5 10K C59 100nF

U33B 74HCT32

MASTER RESET

R34 1K

1

2

K5

FL-C CLK

U33A 74HCT32

U32A 74HCT00 1

4

AEC STOP +5V

K5

+12V ISO

CR15 1N4148

E

HT-C CLK

+5V

from J4-9

D

7, 8

1

B

C

E

10/10/00

A

B

C

D

E

J15 2 3 4 1

V ON K3

K2

1, 14

7, 8

1, 14

7, 8

+12V ISO

1, 14

13 4

K1

CR5 1N4148

CR4 1N4148

6

1 2 3 4

R4 330

13

13 K2

K3

CR3 1N4148

6

R3 330

6

JP1, JP2, AND JP3 ON POSITION "A" FOR NOVEL CONSOLE A

A

B JP1 COMM

B

A

V ON

JP2 PREP

V ON

J9 3

11 10

RD

A12

22

CS

POWER OFF

39-40

POWER ON

37-38 33-34

2 3

35-36 31-32

4 5

A0

21

CLK

3 38 39 1 2 5 6 7 8

+5V 1

U2E MC14050B 12

11

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

2

4 37 36

SL0 SL1 SL2 SL3

32 33 34 35

1 2 3

A B C

Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

+5V

23

G1 G2A G2B

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7

OA0 OA1 OA2 OA3 OB0 OB1 OB2 OB3

RL0 RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6 RL7

RESET

+12V UNREG TP9

-COL0 -COL1 -COL2 -COL3 -COL4 -COL5

C3 100uF

S

C4 100nF

+12V ISO TP10

R33 1K REG2

C9 470uF

CR2 1N4733

+Vin

+Vout

-Vin

-Vout

27 26 25 24 31 30 29 28

REG1 78SR105 +Vin

C54 470uF

+12V TP7

R32 1K

+12V ISO

TP11 GND UNREG

4

C56 470uF

-12V TP8

R35 1K

+5V

R36 1K +12V

C2 100nF

C57 2200uF

C1 10uF

C6 10uF

C5 100nF

TP6 PT CRL

C7 10uF

C8 100nF

3

J12A-J12B PT CRL A0 A1

DATA BUS

-12V

+Vout

TP1 GND SL2 SL1 SL0 CS1 CS2 CS3 CS4 CS5 CS6 CS7 CS8

8 7 5 15 16 13 14 11 12 9 10

+5V TP3

R31 1K

J11

A0 CLK

D

G

OFF

S

DC-DC CONVERTER

U17 74HCT138

6 4 5 BD

4 5 7 9 3 8 2 6 1

+12V UNREG

WR

-IOWR -KV UP

9

1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

5

U2B MC14050B 4

13

U2F MC14050B 14 to U37 (sheet 3) IN1 IN2

3

U2A MC14050B 2

7

U2C MC14050B 6

1

OFF

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

-IOWR

36

WR

-IORD

5

RD

A11

6

CS

A0

8

A1

A1

9 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

8 7 6 5

+12V ISO +12V ISO GND GND

4 3 2 1

U1B MC14072B

U11 8255A (82C55 )

PT INPUT to J2-13 (page 3)

DB0.....DB7 to J16 (page 4)

PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PA6 PA7

4 3 2 1 40 39 38 37

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

+12V ISO

13

11 12

U1A MC14072B

+5V

6

9 10

ON

SW1

1

IRQ CN/ST SHFT

G

ON

Q2 MTD3055

D

V ON

AEC CONTROL BOARD

J1 1

PT CRL

3

A0

4

A1

5

-IDWR

6

-KV UP

2

GND

8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

15

AEC STOP

16

A15

17 18 20

-12V +12V +5V

19

-KV DWN

21

PT INPUT

22

ABC OUT

(A3012-01/02/05/06)

+5V

RP1 10K

1 2 3 4

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

-IORD

11-12 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 13-14 23-24 27-28 29-30 25-26 15-16 17-18 19-20 21-22

-COL0 -COL1 -COL2 -COL3 -COL4 -COL5

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

-IOWR

V (ON) COL 0 COL 1 COL 2 COL 3 COL 4 COL 5 ROW 0 ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 3 ROW 4 ROW 5 ROW 6 ROW 7

RP15 10K

U25 8279

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

R29 1K

J1

C38 100nF

JP3 EXP

Q1 MTD3055

POWER ON V ( ON )

-PWR OFF -PWR ON GND -12V +12V +12V UNREG +12V UNREG GND UNREG GND UNREG

C39 100nF

B

COMM PREP EXP POWER OFF

5 6

R2 100 -AUTO OFF to J2-21 (page 3)

COMM

CR1 1N4007

J14

7, 8

+12V ISO

V ON TP2 R1 475

GND

K1

PREP EXP


AEC STOP A15

J10


7 10 12 11 14 13 16 15


+12V

JP5 POSITION:

+5V

A.- VD SELECTION B.- IC4 SELECTION C.- PT INPUT SELECTION

JP5

A B

-KV DWN

EN2 to J16-7 (page 4) PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7

14 15 16 17 13 12 11 10

RESET

35

A0 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7

ABC OUT to JP19-A (page 3)

-CSE2PROM SI C/-D SCK

6 8 9 5

RS EN1 EN2 R/W

4 3 2 1

+5V VD GND GND

J5 IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4/VD -FLD1 -FLD2 -FLD3 -STRT DR GND

+5V

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5

C / -D to J16-8 (page 4)

Vcc

V ON 14

U2 MC14050B Vcc

+5V 1

U11 +5V 8255A (82C55) Vcc 26

U17 74HCT138 Vcc

+5V

U25 8279

16

Vcc

U18 X25320

+5V 40 +5V

C11 100nF GND

7

C12 100nF GND

8

C14 100nF GND

7

C13 100nF GND

8

C40 100nF GND

20

1

CS

SI

5

2

SD

SCK

6

3

WP

HLD

7

4

GND

VCC

8

U19B 74HCT14 3 +5V

R8 1K

J6A

J6B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PAGE 2 OF 4

+5V

U1 MC14072B

C

J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4/PT INPUT -FLD1 -FLD2 -FLD3 -STRT DR GND VD

1

ENG CHK REV

4

B

C


A3024-XX

C49 100nF

SEDECAL S.A.

DWG

D

REV. REV. REV.

DATE A

not supplied in A3012-01/02/05

RIBBON CABLE

ATP CONSOLE

DS2

2

-12V

E

10/10/00

B

C

U5A 74HCT02

NOTE.- ALL DIODES 1N4148 UNLESS SPECIFIED SET JP13 FOR DIGITAL MODE

C21 1.0

+5V

1A 1B 1CLR 1CX 1RX/CX

9 10 11 6 7

2A 2B 2CLR 2CX 2RX/CX

A2

5

A3

7

A4

DS1 +5V

CR18 R17 10K

R10 1K 1Q 1Q 2Q 2Q

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

E7

15

E6

13

E6

13

-IOWR

E5

11

E5

11

-IORD

5

RD

E4

9

E4

9

A13

6

CS

A0 RP2 470

-BUCK EXP

1 3 5 7

FL-C DAT -THERMOSTAT 1 -DOOR

U3 2501 2 4 6 8

2 4 6 8

K1 K2 K3 K4

RP10 470

-COL

7 5 3 1

-COMP -THERMOSTAT 2

JUMPER NORMAL

C1 C2 C3 C4

8 6 4 2

K4 K3 K2 K1

C4 C3 C2 C1

10 12 14 16

JP15

removed

set

JP16

removed

set

JP17

removed

set

-IDWR

JP18

removed

set

-IDRD

100nF

1 3 5 7

-PT SEL -FL EXP

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 WR

5

RD

2 4 6 8

2 4 6 8

K1 K2 K3 K4

RP19 470

to J2-15 -SPARE IN2

1 3 5 7

-SPARE IN1 to J2-22

Vcc

+5V

U5 74HCT02

16

8

8

A1

A0

9

A0

Vcc

2 4 6 8

2 4 6 8

8 7 6 5

K1 K2 K3 K4

C1 C2 C3 C4

U6 8255A

14

Vcc

GND

7

U15 8255A

26

Vcc

7

PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4 PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0

PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7

14 15 16 17 13 12 11 10

Q8 Q7 Q6 Q5 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

11 12 13 14 18 17 16 15 -DS PREP (PAGE 1, K4)

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I8 I7 I6

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q8 Q7 Q6

JP15

26

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

RP4

22

-HT INTLK

1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8

7 5 3 1

8 6 4 2

-AUTO OFF (PAGE 2, R2)

ABC OUT

JP19 A

-DOOR -COL -LEFT

SW3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-COMP

B -THERMOSTAT 2

U8 ULN2803 I4 I3 I2 I1 I5 I6 I7 I8

Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

15 16 17 18 14 13 12 11

U36 2501 16

C1

14

C2 C3 C4

A1 K1 A2 K2 A3 K3 A4 K4

4

3

6 8

5 7

JP16

JP17

U35 2501

JP18

14 12 10

A1 C1 K1 A2 C2 K2 A3 C3 K3 A4 C4 K4

RP17 470

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2

1

4

3

6

5

8

7

JP23 CR19 1N4148

B

C

-BUCK EXP

6

HT-C CLK

13

-HT INTLK

1 4

-EXP -PREP

2 5 11 14

C-HT DAT C-HT CLK -BUCKY2 DR CMD -BUCKY1 DR CMD

25 23 21 10 8

-ACT EXP ALOE -AUTO OFF EXP OK -ROOM LIGHT

22

-SPARE IN1

9 24

-READY -ALOE

19

-DOOR

6

-COL

7

-COMP

11

ABC OUT/ -LEFT -THERMOSTAT 2

3

-THERMOSTAT 1

3 5 1 7

4 6 2 8

12

-DIRECT SEL

4

-SF PREP

RP7

22

17

-FL EXP

16

-PT SEL/ -SFC

13

PT INPUT

14

EXT SYNC

15

-SPARE IN2

5 18

GND GND

CR12

-SF PREP

CR13 -FL EXP

2

J4 (to J4 - FLUORO CPU)

FL-C CLK CAM SYNC +12V ISO

2 1 7

-CAM FL EXP C-FL DAT C-FL CLK

3

FL-C DAT

4

FL-C CLK

9

CAM SYNC

5 6 8

+12V ISO GND GND

PAGE 3 OF 4

ATP CONSOLE

1

ENG CHK REV

EXP STOP EXT REF


A3024-XX

SEDECAL S.A.

EXT SYNC to J2-14

DWG

D

REV. REV. REV.

DATE A

LINE SYNC

12

3

-THERMOSTAT 1

FL-C DAT

J20 2 1

9

4

-SFD SEL -GEN OK

-SPARE IN2

1

HT-C DAT

2 1

EXT SYNC

2

-KV DWN

3

22

PT INPUT

RP18 470

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-KV UP

8

8 6 4 2

-PT SEL

-FS -TOMO EXP TOMO ON -TOMO PREP TIME 1 TIME 2 TIME 3 TIME 4 -PS (DSI) SEL -CINE (DSA) SEL -HCF SEL SPARE IN EXT REF EXP STOP GND

15

7 5 3 1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

15 10 11 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 14 13

PT CRL

RP6

J13 35

7

20

CR20 1N4148

RESET

-LINE CONT

J2

-SPARE IN1

ABC OUT to J12-22 (page 2)

10

-PREP to J13-9

-PREP

16

7

22

HT-C CLK

RP11 22

18 17 16 15 14 11 12 13

+5V

JP14

RP3

-BUCK EXP

RP5 10K

10

+5V

2 4 6 8

RP13 22

4 3 2 1 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

HT-C DAT LINE SYNC

-DWR to J16-5 (page 4)

1

PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3

C15 100nF GND

U5D 74HCT02

I8 I7 I6 I5 I1 I2 I3 I4

MASTER RESET

12

IN1

8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4

-DRD to J16-6 (page 4)

35

37 38 39 40 1 2 3 4

to RP15 (sheet 2) IN2

16 14 12 10

C24 100nF GND

15

RP14 10K

+5V

C23 100nF

25 24 23 22 18 19 20 21

6 7 8 9 3 4 5 10 2

13

+5V

1

16 14 12 10

U7 ULN2803

FS to J16-19 (page 4)

+5V

U37 2501

+5V

C19 100nF GND

C1 C2 C3 C4

PC1 RESET

CS

A1

SW2 1 2 3 4

U4 74HCT123

6

U14 2501

-SF PREP

1

34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 36

10

1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6

U15 8255A

A14 +5V

PB7 PB6 PB5 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1 PB0

10 11 12 13 17 16 14

- KV UP

+5V

8

12

C10 1nF

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

C52 1uF

U13 ULN2803 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC0

PT CRL

to J8-1 and J7-1 (page 4) -ACT EXP

1 3 5 7

11

DATA BUS

removed

-HT INTLK

A0

1 2 3 4

RP9 10K

set

RP12 470

9

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18

8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3

JP14

1K

A1

PA3 PA2 PA1 PA0

Q3 MTD3055

RP20 470

R19 2K74

1

16 14 12 10

MOBILE

2

8

37 38 39 40

S

U5C 74HCT02

R20 10K

PA7 PA6 PA5 PA4

R12 150K

4

9

+5V

U12 2501

8 6 4 2

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 WR

G

- KV DWN

6

U6 8255A

12 5

A1

3

5

DATA BUS

U35/U36 2501

HT-C DAT

R40 10K

+5V

13 4

CR8

U5B 74HCT02 PREP

34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 36

U3/U12/U14/U27/U37 2501 1 A1 E7 15 3

-EXPT

D

R41 2K7

9

CR16 4

1 2 3 14 15

to U21-10 (page 1)

3

GND

R11 330K

AEC STOP

J3

9

U4 74HCT123

to U29-18 (page 1)

E

CR9

1

GND

+5V

+5V

2

JP13

GND

CR17

D

9

A

E

10/10/00

A

VERSION

HYBRID 55 61 70 62 63 80 90 132 133 134

REV H N N N N N N N N N

C

D

SERIAL COMMUNICATION REQUIRES THE COMPONENTS SHOWN IN THIS BOX

R15 4K7 JP22 485

JP21 422

A

485

+5V

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

25 16 24 17 23 18 22 19

DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

-IOWR

8

WR

-IORD

9

RD

A10

35

CS

A0

1

RS1

A1

3

RS2

A2

5

RS3

A3

6

RS4

31 10 32

B

A

XT2 3.6864MHz

33

B A

Vcc

NC R REB DE D GND

+5V

13 12 11 10 9 8

NC A B Z Y NC

RS232/422 JP10

232 422

A

RS232/422 JP9 A

15 26 14 27 13 28 12 29

TXDA TXDB

30 11

C31 10uF 16V C33 10uF 16V

C32 10uF 16V

U9 MAX232

C30 10uF 16V

2 1 3 4 5 6

IP6 IP5 IP4 IP3 IP2 IP1 IP0

37 38 39 2 36 4 7

IRQ

21

D0

34

1 2 3 4

6

B

B

2 3 5

2

+5V +5V

16

Vcc

C29 10uF 16V

+12V UNREG

JP12

9 14

3

TXD

12

13

RXD

10

7

2 6 5

9

8

CR24 1.5KE15CA CR22 1.5KE15CA

CR23 1.5KE15CA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1

J16

RP8 10K +5V

R38 10K Q7 2N4401

R39 1K

-DRD (PAGE 3, U6-15)

R37 1K

-DWR (PAGE 3, U15-3) EN2 (PAGE 2, J10-9)

+5V

J4 J3

+12V ISO

Q5 2N4403 R22 1K

C53 100uF

CR14 1N4148

ATP CONSOLE BOARD

J4 J10

R30 10K

FS (PAGE 3, U15-2)

C58 1nF

+5V R24 1K

CR10 BZX55C 6V2

C16 1uF

MASTER RESET (PAGE 3, U6-35) and (PAGE 1, U30-21)

R27 6K81

DB0......DB7 (PAGE 2, J10)

DISPLAY BOARD

R25 825

TP12 GND

1 2

FGND GND

3 4

VDD VEE

5

-WR

6

-RD

7

-CE

8

C/ -D

19 9 10

FS

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18


20

RV

ATP CONSOLE

R26 681

-RESET

1

ENG CHK REV

F. GARCIA A. DIAZ SEE TABLE ON PAGE 4 CN 04/158 (04/10/04)

A3024-XX

J11

SEDECAL S.A.

DWG

B

C

D

REV. REV. REV.

DATE A

2

PAGE 4 OF 4

Q6 2N4401 CR11 1N4148


R23 100K

J9

1

GND

CR21 1.5KE15CA

-12V

KEYBOARD

3

DTR -ACT EXP

11

C/ -D (PAGE 2, U11-11)

INTEGRATED FLUORO CPU BOARD

J7 4 1 8 7

SET JP12 FOR FLUOROSCAN

15

GND

U19A 74HCT14

J2

RXD+ (RXD) TXD+ (TXD) GND

+5V

2

UART RQ (PAGE 1, U29-25)

8 7 6 5

V+ C1+ C1C2+ C2V-

+5V -ACT EXP RXDTXD-

9 422

+5V DP7 DP6 DP5 DP4 DP3 DP2 DP1 DP0

J8 4 1 8 7

7 40

B

R16 75

U10 MAX489

GND

C35 100nF

SW4

RXDA RXDB X1 X2

A

RS485 JP7

B

1 2 3 4 5 6

20

C37 33pF

C34 100nF

422

4

RS485 JP8

232

Vcc

U16 2681

GND

DATA BUS

3

-ACT EXP (PAGE 3, J2-25)

+5V

+5V

RS232/422 JP11 232 422 A B

E

NOTE.- SOME COMPONENTS COULD NOT BE REQUIRED ACCORDING TO THE VERSION USED

14

4

11 21 25 31 32 40 50 92 93 94

B

E

10/10/00

B

C

+5V

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

U7 74HCT138 6

G1

5

G2B

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

4

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

+12V

RESET

17

VOUT

2

VREF

3

DGND

5

VSS

1

-IOWR

5

4

A15

16

3

C

Y2

13

A1

4

2

B

Y1

14

LDAC

16

3

1

Y0

15

CS

14

G2A

A

15

WR

U2 AD7590 D0 D1 D2 D3

3 4 5 6

A1 A2 A3 A4

7

W

U6 ULN2803

U4 74HCT574 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8

11

CLK

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

OC

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8

J2 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

5 6 7 8 9 10

-FLD 1 -FLD 2 -FLD 3 -STRT DR GND VD 4

9

U3 7224

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13

A0

E

AEC/ABC SW

J1 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

D

GND

A

SCL 2 SCL 1

REFERENCE (as calibration number)

RP2 1K

J2 1 3 5 7

1 2 3 4

IC 1 IC 2 IC 3 PT INPUT

TP4 RAMP

U5 5108 2 4 6 8

4 5 6 C8 100nF

C9 100nF

C10 100nF

S1 S2 S3

12 11 10 9

S5 S6 S7 S8

D

8

A0

1

A1

16

VC S4 A2

2 7 15

R16 1M

SCL 1 +12V

SCL 2

+5V

U2C AD7590 12

A

-

7

+

1

S

U2A AD7590 16

S

B

R6 1M

A

D

10

TP2 UP PT R14 10K

FLUORO ABC C24 100nF

C6 1nF

JP1

R11 10K

R5 10K

C11 1nF

U1 CA3140 2

B CR1 1N4148

CR2 1N4148

-

8

-

9

+

JP2 B

6

R18 1K

CR3 IN3595

R17 1K

10

-

11

+

-KV DWN

7 5 3 1

6

-KV UP

+5V

2

+5V

+12V C14 100nF 7

-

5

+

2

+

U8B LM339

U1 CA3140 C15 100nF

VERSION

JP1

JP2

JP4 A

3012-01

PHOTOMULTIPLIER

B

B

3012-02

FOR TV CAMERA

A

A

A

3012-05

4 ION CHAMBERS

C

A

B

NOTE.- JUMPER JP3 IN POSITION A FOR ION CHAMBERS WITH HIGH SENSIBILITY (GAIN 2V / mR )

4

4

12 +12V

+5V

U2 AD7590 +V

17

C2 10uF

C4 10uF

C5 100nF

U3 7224 Vcc

+12V 18

U4 74HCT574 Vcc

+5V

U5 5108 +V

20

+12V C20 100nF 13

U7 74HCT138 Vcc

2

2

+12V C16 100nF 8

TP5 GND GND

C3 10uF GND

19 +12V

13

3 -12V

J1

-12V -12V

1

RAD

BOARD

C17 100nF -V

C18 100nF

1 GND

4

C19 100nF GND

10

GND

18

FL

8 6 4 2

C1 100pF

14

+12V

9

A

J1 20

D

R12 10K

RP1 1K

+12V C22 1uF

+5V

S

R13 10K

14

+ 1

A

3

+12V

PT CRL 3

R9 100K

U8C LM339

U8D LM339

INTEGRATION

C

TP1 DWN PT

TP3 ABC IN

R2 1K

8

2

1

+5V

14

S

2

C7 470nF

+12V

U2B AD7590 13

+

R15 100

U2D AD7590

INTEGRATION RESET R1 604K

5

See Note

15

D

-

C13 100nF

JP3 R3 1K

4

11

R7 10K

R10 10K

AEC STOP

C12 100nF

R4 22K D

15

U8A LM339 U8B LM339

R8 2K2

3

JP4 B

J1

6

-12V

C21 100nF -V

1

16

AEC CONTROL

GND

ENG CHK REV

C23 100nF

3 -12V

+5V

8

SEDECAL S.A.

DWG

B

C

D

A. DIAZ

CN 00/155 (07/07/00)

A3012-01/02

REV.

I

A3012-05

REV.

B

REV. DATE

A

F. GARCIA

E

05/05/97

Technical Publication RP-1024R0

Renewal Parts HF Series Generators KODAK

HF Series Generators Renewal Parts


DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0

OCT 1, 2005

New edition






Note

RP-1024R0

.



FRU CODES FRU column identifies the Field Replaceable Units (FRU) with the codes: 1 = Replacement Part that should be in stock. 2 = No need to have it in stock, easy to get after order.

X-RAY GENERATOR SHF 535 / 635 / 835 Item

Designation

Qty

FRU

Rep

Mfg. Ref.

Remarks

1

FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3)

Refer to pages 6-5

2

BACK PANEL (MOD. 4)

Refer to pages 6-6

3

IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY INVERTER (MOD. 5)

Refer to pages 6-7

4

RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6)

Refer to pages 6-8

5

LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12)

Refer to pages 6-9

6

HV TRANSFORMER

Refer to pages 6-9

7

LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11)

Refer to pages 6-10

MISCELLANEOUS

Refer to pages 6-11

1 4

6

7

RP-1024R0

5

3

2

1


FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3) Item

Designation

Qty

FRU

Rep

Mfg. Ref.

Remarks

FRONT PANEL (MOD. 3) 1

PCB, HT Controller 12 bits

1

1

Y

A3000--33

2

U5 EPROM for 50, 64, or 80 kW

1

2

N

SOFT--HT

It can not be ordered without Generator Serial Number

3

PCB, Interface Control Rad without HV.

1

1

Y

A3009--11

For only Rad Generator

4

PCB, Filament Driver

1

1

Y

A3004--05

5

Low Voltage Power Supply Unit

1

1

Y

53418001

6

Rectifier Bridge FAGOR / 10 A

3

2

N

53404002

BR1, BR2, BR4

7

Filter Line

1

2

N

50208001

LF3

8

ON/OFF Relay K3 / 4PDT /110V

1

2

N

51401012

K3

2

2

N

54002007

C6, C7

9

Capacitor ELE 2400 Micro/50V

10

Fuse F2 (1.5 A, 250 V) SB

See Fuse Kit

11

Fuses F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250 V) SB

See Fuse Kit

12

Fuses F9 (0.4 A, 250 V) SB

See Fuse Kit

1

2

3

11

11

10 11

8

4

2

6

12

7

5

9

6

RP-1024R0


BACK PANEL (MOD. 4) Item

Designation

Qty

FRU

Rep

Mfg. Ref.

Remarks

BACK PANEL (MOD. 4) 13

PCB, Delayed Switch OFF

1

2

N

A3274--01

Only for High Speed Generator

14

PCB, ATP Console

1

1

Y

A3024--21

Standard

15

PCB, AEC Control

1

1

Y

A3012--05

Used for AEC

16

U24 EPROM

1

1

N

SOFT--ATP


13

15

16 14

RP-1024R0

3


IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER (MOD. 5) Item

Designation

Qty

FRU

Rep

Mfg. Ref.

IGBT PANEL ASSEMBLY -- INVERTER (MOD. 5)

1

1

Y

A6362--56S

Remarks Inverter 3 Ph, 380-480 VAC R&F, High kW

17

IGBT 300A/1200V for 3 Ph equipment

2

2

N

53416011S

Selected IGBT

18

Capacitor 10 Micro /1000DCV

1

2

N

54001011

C9

19

Capacitor ELE 3700 Micro /450V

4

2

N

54002011

C1, C2, C3, C4

20

Capacitor 2 Micro/1000 V

3

2

N

54008002

C8, C10, C11

21

PCB, IPM Driver

2

1

N

A3063--03

22

PCB, Charge/Disharge Monitor

2

1

N

A3212--01

23

PCB, Input Rectifier 3 Phase

1

1

N

A3255--01

24

Rectifier SKKD 40F10

3

2

N

53404019

CR1, CR2, CR3 Behind Input Rectifier

18

17

23 24

22

21

20 19

4

RP-1024R0


RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6) Item

Designation

Qty

FRU

Rep

Mfg. Ref.

Remarks

RIGHT SIDE PANEL (MOD. 6) 25

Contactor 3 Phase / 24V / 50 A

2

2

N

51405007

K5, K6

26

Resistor 20 Ohms / 100 W / 10%

1

1

N

52707021

R1

27

Transformer T2

1

2

N

50509029

T2

28

Green Light Lamp 220 VAC

1

2

N

54203006

29

Input Filter for 3 Phase

1

2

N

A6371--01

30

Fuses F12, F13 (10 A, 250V) SB

See Fuse Kit

31

Input Line Fuses F3 ,F4, F5 (50 A, 600V)

See Fuse Kit

LF1

30

27 25

28

26

31

29

RP-1024R0

5


LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12) / HV TRANSFORMER Item

Designation

Qty

FRU

Rep

Mfg. Ref.

Remarks

LOCKS AND ADAPTATIONS PANEL (MOD. 12) 32

PCB, Locks

1

1

N

A3214--01

33

PCB, AEC Cabinet Adaptation -- 4 Ion Chambers

1

2

Y

A3263--03

34

Fuses F14, F15 (10 A, 250V) SB

Used for 4 Ion Chambers See Fuse Kit

HV TRANSFORMER 35

HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tube, 400 VAC

1

1

Y

A6097--07

35

HV Transformer (150 kV ) 1 Tubes, 480 VAC

1

1

Y

A6097--08

33

32 34

35

6

RP-1024R0


LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11) Item

Designation

Qty

FRU

Rep

Mfg. Ref.

Remarks

LV-DRAC -- HIGH SPEED STARTER (MOD. 11) 36

LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 400 VAC

1

2

Y

A6378--26

For 1 or 2 Tubes

36

LV-DRAC -- High Speed Starter for 480 VAC

1

2

Y

A6378--27

For 1 or 2 Tubes

37

PCB, Control DRAC

1

1

Y

A3243--04

38

PCB, Interface DRAC with Cable

1

1

Y

A3240--05

39

Fuses F3, F4 (15 A) and F1, F2 (0.5 A)

40

PCB, Clamping (A3)

1

1

N

A3109--01

41

LV-DRAC Transformer 380 VAC

2

2

N

6456--11

Main and Auxiliary Transformer 380 VAC

41

LV-DRAC Transformer 480 VAC

2

2

N

6456--12

Main and Auxiliary Transformer 480 VAC

42

DC BUS Cable

1

2

N

A3237--02

43

Contactor 24 V / 15 A

3

2

N

51405004

K2, K3, KT1

44

U17 EPROM DRAC

1

2

N

53406157


45

Auxiliar Contactor

1

2

N

51405006

46

Fans Micro Boxer 24 VDC

3

2

N

53103001

See Fuse Kit

46

45

43

42 40

41

39

41

36

RP-1024R0

44

37

38

7


MISCELLANEOUS LIST OF PARTS WITHOUT ILLUSTRATION Item

Designation

Qty

FRU

Rep

Mfg. Ref.

Remarks

F2 (1.5 A, 250V ) SB

1

2

N

53801012

On the Front Panel (Mod. 3)

F3, F4, F5 (50 A, 600VAC) SB

3

2

N

53801011

Input Line Fuses (Mod. 6)

F9 (0.4 A, 250V ) SB

1

2

N

53801015

On the Power Supply at the Front Panel (Mod. 3)

F6, F7, F8 (3 A, 250V) SB

3

2

N

53801003

On the Front Panel (Mod. 3)

F12, F13 ( 10 A, 250 V, T) SB

2

2

N

53801008

On Transformer T2 (Mod. 6)

F14, F15 ( 10 A, 250 V, T) SB

2

2

N

53801008

On Looks PCB (Mod. 12)

Fuses F3, F4 (15 A, 600 V) for LV-DRAC

2

2

N

53801018

On Interface DRAC PCB (Mod. 11)

Fuses F1, F2 (0.5 A, 250 V) for LV-DRAC

2

2

N

53801019

On Interface DRAC PCB (Mod. 11)

Interface AEC Cable

1

2

N

A3251--02

Ion Chamber Cable

1

2

N

A3252--03

Cable Generator -- Interface Box

1

2

N

A3352--01

Cable Interface Box -- PC

1

2

N

A3363--01

1

2

N

A3223--05

1

2

N

A6470--08

Pre-installation Manual

1

2

N

--

Service Manual

1

2

N

--

FUSE KIT

CABLES

HAND SWITCH Hand Switch with Sub--D

For PC On/Off Box

COVER Generator Cover DOCUMENTATION

8

RP-1024R0

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR X-RAY TUBE SEASONING

The seasoning procedure should be carried out to assure a correct operation of the X-ray Tube when it is putting into operation for the first time (new X-ray Tubes). This action establishes a favorable distribution of the electrical charges and electrostatic stresses in the insulation system of the tube and the associated equipment.

Included in each X-ray Tube, the manufacturer gives the instructions to perform the Tube seasoning. It is mandatory to follow these instructions, calibrating previously the combinations of kV / mA stations required for carrying out the seasoning procedure. (Refer to Calibration document for calibration of kV / mA combinations).

A correct seasoning will assure the most accurate calibration of the Generator (Filament Current Numbers) and a subsequent trouble-free operation.

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR AUTO-CALIBRATION Auto-calibration procedure of “Digital mA Loop Open” (Filament Current Numbers) is the recommended method to achieve the most accurate calibration. In any case, Auto-Calibration is a help for the Manual Calibration procedure that can be performed at any moment or when Auto-calibration procedure is not fully performed. (Refer to Section 2.5 “Digital mA Loop Open” in the Calibration document).

During the Auto-calibration process, the Generator informs about different conditions through messages or codes displayed on the Console. The table below is a resume of these situations: MESSAGE / CODE “TUBE OVERLOAD”, “GENERATOR OVERLOAD”, ETC “CONFIRM” / “DISMISS” “222” “TUBE TOO HOT” “111” “AUTOCALIBRATION FAILURE” “777” or “888” “AUTO CALIBRATION OK” “999”

SITUATION The Generator can not calibrate in this moment the selected kV / mA combination (because anode overheated, space charge, generator power limit, etc...). In this case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the following available kV/mA combination for the selected Focal Spot. At the end of the process it will try to calibrate or calculate the combinations previously uncalibrated. This message / code appears at the beginning of the Auto-calibration procedure to confirm or leave the Auto-calibration procedure. Exposures are inhibited momentarily because the Heat Units capacity that remain is 40% or less less. Wait until the X-ray X ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Units capacity. Auto-calibration procedure has been cancelled after ten attempts of calibration of the same kV / mA combination. In this case, calibrate manually the kV / mA combinations uncalibrated. C d “777” appears iinstead Code t d code d “888” when h A t Auto-calibration lib ti procedure d is i cancelled due to “space charge” during calibration of 40 kV at any mA station for Small Focal Spot. Auto-calibration procedure has been successfully performed for the selected Focal Spot.

Auto-calibration procedure is independent for each Focal Spot. If Auto-calibration has been successful for one of the Focal Spots and aborted for the other Focal Spot, it is only required to perform the Manual Calibration of the mA station uncalibrated for the other Focal Spot. Enter in “Manual Calibration” mode, select each kV / mA combination and identify the combinations that require to be manually calibrated (these combinations keep the Filament Stand-by value as Filament Current Number).

Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual

Recommend Documents